Home

Netspan - Keekles.org

1. Actions Allow edit Check the boxes to enable edit boxes in this section Port Agent port number for the subscriber Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public Default is public Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public Default is private Timeout The number of milliseconds that the agent waits for a response See Action Buttons 99 Netspan Release 6 5 Subscriber Station Add Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning To open this page either enter a MAC address for a new SS and click the configure button on this case the title of the page is Add instead of edit or click and existing SS in the Subscriber Provisioning page and click edit Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning MAC Address Description Fs Service Product SRo Pasa wf Custom Config Profle NewRFCDyname amp Port VLAN Profile PonMode VLAN 60 FrameType Untagi50 sy Service Enabled veo gi Semce Allowed Channel Registered Channel Registration Allowed Channels Allow configuration to be set on SS Yes Restrict allowed channels Channel BSID 000000 000000000 Channel BSID Mask Selected Channels SNMP Properties Allow edit r IP Address 100365131 Pon ie Version SNMPv2c Read Community public Write Community private Timeout Soo o MAC Address This field i
2. Close Reload Hep This window shows the SSs registered on the BS TRx Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter By Home Channel By Last Seen on Channel By Service Product By Custom Config Profile e Edit This button allows user defined criteria to be edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e List Lists all criteria see Creating Filters List e Alarm Status increasing severity normai Alarm has cleared warning P Minor A major 244 Configuration Management A critical Mirndeterminate e Hardware Type Hardware Type e MAC Address MAC Address of SS e Address IP address assigned to the SS e Registered Checked Registered e Service Enabled Checked Enabled e Service Product See Service Products e Configuration Profile Modulation Used e Port VLAN Profile Port VLAN Profile e Service Home Channel BS TRx Selected as a home BS TRx See Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning e Last Seen On Channel Last channel to have established a link with the SS e Provisioning Error Count Netspan will provisio
3. between equipment and NMS on request The Netspan server is accessed using upper level WEB browser recommended Internet Explorer v6 or later with BS TRx and Subscriber Station BS TRx and SS provisioning management and fault handling being accessed via web based pages An SQL database is used to store all the provisioning information alarms events and statistical information The web browsers clients are normally remote from the server machine but it can be arranged to run both the client and server on one machine if required Netspan uses a management information base that can be monitored by a network management system The management information base is used by SNMP which allows monitoring of equipment within the ASMAX product range The three MIBs are identified as follows o 802 16f standard MIB o BS TRx private MIB developed by Airspan o SS private MIB developed by Airspan The private MIBs contain features that are important for the management of the radio network but which are not defined within the standard 802 16f MIB Netspan Components 3rd Party Server Components o IIS Microsoft Standard o Framework Microsoft Standard o SQL Server Database Microsoft o NetToolWorks SNMP Manager Library Netspan Server Components developed by Airspan Introduction o Front end ASP NET web intranet application o SNMP job engine service o Discovery service o Service o Archive Service o Event
4. Fiter No Filter j 7g Lid Evert Type Source Evert info R BS TRx Added ps TRx 313238 303032 User Netviee Discovery Service 1200772 BE n Total Database hems 1 Total Loaded ems Reload Export View Export All Paged V Sze 20 Prev Next 1 sors Close Reload Help Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters No Filter m By Event Type m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters Events Events may be raised by e SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan e Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event tab shows the events stored in the database for the selected BS TRx e Event Name See Fault Management Event Types e Source The BS ID as set in the shelfcfg txt file on the BS TRx e Event Information For event messages see Fault Management Events e Received Time Time when event was last raised 214 Configuration Management SF Status Subscriber Station
5. Advanced C Software Download C Channel Table Settings C Base Station ID Settings C System Info Settings C Code Banks List osoft Internet Explorer Detailed Log i C Connections List C Change User Name C Change Password C Maximum TX Power Sett C IP mode Settings C Reset2Default Clear Log C WiFi Control C Restart 3 Click OK to accept A page is displayed informing you that all Log entries have been cleared as shown below WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Log clear completed 4 Click Back to return to the Advanced page 170 Configuration Management Resetting a WiFi Device In the event the unit is WiFi enabled for example the ProST WiFi and or EasyWiFi wireless access device there is the option to perform a reset or reset to factory default f Note If the device is not WiFi enabled the WiFi Control option page will not be displayed To access WiFi Control 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page select WiFi Control and click Select The WiFi Control page appears as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced WiFi Control Keep Alive Enable C Disable Submit Reset C Reset To Factory Default Submit Back Keep Alive enables the device ProtST EasyST to communicate with the WiFi module If for any reason there is no
6. E INS Protocol EasyST Applicaton Applicaton Paged V 20 PevMed s motis 2 Click Add to add additional pointers to the image code Add Software Image Configuration File Information Name Create An image File Suste File Information Product Category Image s inot defined OS Application SCRT SecurityCerticates Image Type 08 bd Image File Server Protocol Type TFTP Image File Sarver Type ip Image File Server Address 10 0 25 40 Image File Name With Path DS 9 B 50 007 Software Version Expected In The Image File Sofware Version OK j Cancel Validate Reload o Product Category image s Select hardware that the image is intended for OS Application SCRT Images etc o Image Type Select the image type The image types offered are dependant on the product selected OS Application SCRT A separate image file is needed for each image type o Image File Server Protocol Type This is automatically assigned dependant on the image selected TFTP for BS TRx FTP for Subscriber Station o Image File Server Type IP address type only Ipv4 supported currently o Image File Server Address Enter the network address where the TFTP FTP server is located o Image File Name With Path The file name of the Image file must NOT contain the path only the file name The path will be handled by the TFTP FTP server There is no ability to browse to location SS Conf
7. New Source Type Alit hanges Location This displays where the BSDU located within the network and displays a graphic of the type of BSDU deployed Tabs The BSDU Management page has the following tabs Provisioning State Software Inventory Alarms Events 275 Netspan Release 6 5 Provisioning General Properties Name BoSU1 MAC Address Region Site Managed Port Assignments Port 1 connected to MicroMAX 1 Port 2 connected to MicroMAX 2 Port 3 connected to MicroMAX 3 Port 4 connected to MicroMAX 4 Port 5 connected to MicroMAX 5 Port 6 connected to MicroMAX 6 Port 7 connected to MicroMAX 7 Port 8 connected to MicroMAX 8 SNME Properties Y General Properties e Name User defined e MAC Address MAC address of Shelf Manager e Region Select required region To add a new region see Add New Region e Site Select required site To add a new site see Add New Site e Managed Check this box to set to managed A Shelf cannot be deleted unless this box is un checked Port Assignments Allows user to assign a MicroMAX BS TRx per BSDU Port as physically connected SNMP Properties o Allow edit Check this box to enable access to all other boxes in this section o IP Address IP address of Ethernet connection o Port SMNP port number o SNMP Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o SNMP Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private publi
8. Reload Export View Export All szet xot e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters e Alarm Status in order of increasing severity Normal Indicates the alarm has cleared warning Minor Mirndeterminate e Alarm Type See Fault Management Alarms e Source ShelfID of the shelf e Alarm Information For alarm messages see Fault Management Alarms e Ack This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged e User Name of user e Last Received Time when alarm was last raised e Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised 268 Configuration Management Edit This gives additional alarm details including a history of that particular alarm See Alarm Details Acknowledge Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one o
9. The Inctalishon Wizard allows you to upgrade an masing c SQL Sev 200 m Heo Cancel 5 On Software License Agreement screen click Yes 33 Paaie read 0 loben Lennon Ageenert Pert the PAGE DOWN hey to tee te of the agreement Do you accept the tema of the vice T To natal Microsoft SOL Ene ko dn salt ea i SSeS 25 Netspan Release 6 5 6 On Instance Name screen click Next To appl Service Pack to the defa inttance check the Detout box and click Next To appi Service Pack to named of SOL Delia 7 On Connect to Server screen select The Windows account information I use to log on to my computer with Windows authentication and click Next Select the authentication mode setup should use to connect to SQL Server The Server aeinsitrator login information Bac sedg aer The Windows account information uve to log on to my computer with Window authentication FY oes 8 On the SA Password Warning screen select I do not want a blank password set password Enter and confirm password click OK Service pack setup has detected that your SA password is sel to blank It is highly recommended that you set strong password and secure your database server even if you are using Windows authentication lt do not want a blank password set Ente SA Password Confirm SA Password C Ignore the securit
10. e Medium Security Policy applies stricter rules on what strings are acceptable for password eliminates obvious strings like password pass and enforces password change of first login of a new user e High Security Policy in addition to Medium one introduces strict password recycling with configurable expiry period Miscellaneous o Use of AJAX technology 10 What s New AJAX enables a web page to be partially updated without the need to fully reload the page It helps to eliminate the delay flicker and loss of scrollbar position which can be seen when pages communicate with the server without the use of AJAX Netspan makes use of AJAX to improve the user experience by giving a smoother richer experience for the user o Global SS provisioning SS provisioning in SR5 was offered in form of single SS edit and multiple SS edit The multi edit feature is limited to 100 SSs which often is not enough for many users On the other hand the Service Product cannot be edit while in use To address the need of changing Service Product assigned to large number of SSs SR6 Netspan introduces Global SS Provisioning Page The Global SS Provisioning page operation is similar to multi edit but the selection of the population of SSs to edit is performed based on the criteria given by user rather than by selecting SSs on the list The selection criteria choose SSs which are provisioned with a given set of profiles Service Product Custom Conf
11. 163 Netspan Release 6 5 LAN Table management The LAN Table Management page enables the user to reduce the number of LAN MAC table entries therefore limiting the number of network entities concurrently connected though the EasyST ProST Once the number of the MAC table entries reduced to desired value N N lt 128 N 1 MAC will not be updated on the table until aging time of one of MACs in the table has expired aging time can be set separately By doing that the traffic from this LAN entry PC or SOHO router for example will be prevented from forwarding through the WiMAX network Via this menu operator can set aging time default is 60 sec To access LAN Table Management 1 Access the Advanced page as described in Accessing the Advanced Page section 2 Inthe Advanced page select LAN Table Management and click Select The LAN Table Management page appears as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced LAN Table Settings LAN Table Limit Bridge Aging Time Submit Back Define the LAN Table Settings as required LAN Table Limit define the number of users to be connected concurrently Bridge Aging Time define the number of seconds for MAC entry aging in the bridge oo um Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without defining LAN table settings or 5 Click Submit A confirmation window appears confirming that
12. 179 Netspan Release 6 5 Multiple SS Management Inventory Multiple Subscriber Station Management 2 Subscriber Stations In Selection Registered SerwceEnebled Service Product Configuration A The SS Product Code is obtained from a BS TRx on which the SS has registered The Product Code and Product Description give details on the type of SS This information may not be available if the BS TRxs or SSs do not support this functionality An overview of the active network inventory is shown as part of the Navigation menu The screen capture above shows the inventory for two selected SSs For details see Subscriber Station Inventory 180 Configuration Management SS Management Alarms Subscriber Station Management Alarms Fiter E No Filter Search 7 Layout AJarm into Aen D Alarm SS Provinicring Error 5S 00 A0 04 CO CF 97 aled Change Nul In Totel Database kem 1 TotalLos Edit vckmowiedg Ei Release 1 Delete Reload Export View Export All Pagod V Size 20 PrevNex 1 Multiple Subscriber Station Management Alarms Multiple Subscriber Station Management i State Actions Software Inventory Alarms Events Statistics Fiter No Filter 18 Seerch 7 h34 SS Provisioning Error ES 00 A0 04 C0 38 0C Fe n ES Authorization Fature ES 0A C1 682 i 107 ES Authorization Fature ES 00 A0 04 C0 3E 94 Authonzeton Fature ES 0
13. ATCA shelves are now discovered by Netspan via discovery of either the Shelf Manager via SNMP or information provided by the HiperMAX and HiperMAX micro SDRs contained within the ATCA shelf A new discovery type Shelf has been added to the list of discovery types to enable the discovery parameters to be specified for Shelf Managers A new Shelf list page is available under Configuration Management giving access to Edit and Manage pages for a single Shelf Shelf Management o Provisioning Identity and SNMP connection information o Slot Details of each slot in the Shelf such as whether a board is present and the board type o Alarms Alarms based on Netspan events Events Events based Netspan internal conditions Netspan Release 6 5 Topology o Topology changes The topology hierarchy has been updated to recognise that 1 HiperMAX BS TRxs are grouped together in Shelves 2 MicroMAX BS TRxs are grouped together by sharing a BSDU A Shelf list page has been introduced and shelves may be added deleted and have their properties edited The relationship between BS TRxs and Shelves is automatically determined by the discovery service o Topology Navigation Tree The Topology Navigation Tree is a new view showing the hierarchy of items managed by Netspan and provides the following features e Integrated search of Names and Ids as they appear in the tree e Layout is remembered so that the same items are shown n
14. Aditess D00000 005093 1006093 10050202 00 50 193 State Actions Channels Software Inventory Harms Events Stabsbes ad Cm 1429 Seerch 7 toot Ld TRX cece Bs 010000 060193 State Displays the auto discovered SNMP parameters for the BS TRx and the state of provisioning activity within the BS TRxs Actions Allows requests for actions to be made to the BS TRx and queued for implementation Channels Lists BS TRx channels Software Displays current software build and is used for downloading software to an the selected BS TRxs Inventory Displays inventory for these BS TRxs Alarms Displays alarms for these BS TRxs Events Displays events for these BS TRxs Statistics Displays statistics for these BS TRxs 218 Configuration Management Multiple BS TRx Management State Provisioning State Provisioning Re provision Bs TRx and channels only state Leake NProgress Queued Fi Changes Resporse Provisioning State o BSID BS TRx ID o Name BS TRx Name o Provisioning State o Re Provision Select BS TRx to re provision and use this button to re provision the BS TRx Provisioning Statistics o BSID BS TRx ID o Name BS TRx Name o All Changes New Changes In Progress Queued Awaiting Response Failed These list items show the status of changes to the BS TRx Actions See Action Buttons 219 Netspan Release 6 5 B
15. Database Engine Version amp Type Server type IIS Version IIS version Country Variant Code default Copyright Copyright Notice Contact Contact link Licence The use of Netspan is controlled by license Netspan Servers o Server Name Name of PC with the host server software o Description Description o Installation Type Full or Full Upgrade o Installation Version Displays current Netspan software version O Active Indicates that current installation is active 76 Getting Started o Type and Product Major Rel Version Minor Rel Version Build Number Build information o Time Updated Date of installation Installation History This screen logs the installation steps o Info Installation process information o For description of other field names see Netspan Servers above 77 Netspan Release 6 5 Basic Network Configuration This topic is an overview of the steps required to configure a minimal basic WiMAX network Depending on the application additional steps may be required for setting up a specific network configuration f Note 1 Sample profiles are included in Netspan and it is recommended not to use them directly but instead clone your own set of profiles with different names MicroMAX basic configuration may differ Connect Client Connect a client to the Netspan server see Client Installation This can be o The IP address of the server i e HTTP 10 0 35 221 Netspan or
16. Edit This gives additional alarm details including a history of that particular alarm See Alarm Details Acknowledge Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Release Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Release of an alarm indicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all Other Actions See Action Buttons 227 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Events Fiter No Filter j 7g Lid Evert Type Source Evert info R BS TRx Added ps TRx 313238 303032 User Netviee Discovery Service 1200772 BE n Total Database hems 1 Total Loaded ems Reload Export View Export All Paged V Sze 20 Prev Next 1 sors Close Reload Help Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The
17. 20 03 2007 25 46 Bane Station Profe BS Custom Config Totate impoteds1 Enss 0 Waren Processing Log import stated wang werd fe Portal xw at 10 3642 pec n tated Pogot es san ented eat pe esto perce cusses perace clans Name New 5Ok bext an Name F iow 60k lenti 182 182 Fond proceste g vensce casses Start processing 85 custoe config templates imported BS cestom contig Template Name tems as Name Strattiont dome SMH 4 961 751 o Press the Import button o During import all imported profiles will be renamed with the string of the format I N attached to the original name e g service product A I 123 N is a number generated internally in an attempt to maintain uniqueness of name Once a name reaches a maximum length of 64 characters this suffix string will take as many characters as necessary from the end of the name o The new name will appear in the information displayed after the import is finished o Each import from an exported file will be treated as a new import with a new set of objects being created in Netspan o Note that when an object is to be imported its dependant object s will be imported first e g service class of a VLAN when a VLAN is to be imported If the import of the dependant object fails the import of the main object will also fail If however the dependant object is imported ok bu
18. IP based Broadband Wireless Access BWA System 605 0000 845 Rev E Netspan Release 6 5 User Manual 0 co x t to c gt I Connecting the World Table of Contents Whats NeW Sa xxaxseesster ro ele a regala cee QrRn P Re xni YR ERR TE Maa ehagreaeeusmiaceenaane X MEE 5 Tristal lation E ETE CIT LL UL OL QI 13 Server Installation recidere ia rer rper e aad Sawa ERR RR diag demon DABAT ER D ATARE ERN E RRSRET ER DERE iR 17 Server UpQrad et eet EU ERA 54 NMS Server Management en nbi Re eri e ae di dies AX PERRIEARDARTERRERRBR a RRRR RCRRURENIER 57 Getting Started ete aie clau a tee caldo weet eee a nearest 67 Malere eroaa 85 Configuration Management m ar iesi eie IRAN AID ses aoe ees ete 95 Subscriber Provisionings 2 2 9300209 RECO EHE ee ee eee E 95 SUbSCriDEr Statio oe via os ice eii lk eii dbus i siebse is 100 Subscribe r Station Management 3 5 59 02 aaa e piYelkkR riens pir errat Ea enge 105 Remote Management 22 eee tere ike a da uh ei steeds 120 Multiple Subscriber Station Management 2 cece eee cece e eee eee eee eee semen semen hs
19. Read Soft Switch Connection Parameters e Address Type Currently fixed at IPV4 e IP Address Address of Soft Switch e Port Port connection at Soft Switch QoS Parameters e Max Bandwidth Per BS TRx Restricts the bandwidth used for a call kbps e Max Number Of Calls Sets the Maximum number of calls that the BS TRx will accept e Keep Alive Retries Sets the number of times the BS TRx will try to keep the connection alive before it decides the connection has been lost e Link Fail Call Clear Policy Select either for the BS TRx to clear calls in progress if the link fails or for the normal call clear process to be used VLAN Tagging e Tagging Behaviour Enable Disable VLAN tagging 342 BS TRx Profiles e Tag VLAN ID VLAN ID e Tag VLAN User Priority User Priority Actions See Action Buttons 343 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Unlicensed Channel Profiles BS TRx Unlicensed Channel Profiles List e Y Aveisbity ins DFS Check Channel List Allowed Tx Max Power Tx Max Schema Channels Configuration Power List below for description of headers Actions See Action Buttons Bere for Add Add BS TRx Unlicensed Channel Profile Name t a Dynamic Frequency Switching Ead 8 Dynamic Frequency Switching 99 Availability Check Enade 8 In Serice Check enabled Standard FCC bd Channel List S
20. Total Loaded tems 1 Reese Reload Export View Export Al Pee szet mot e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters e Alarm Status in order of increasing severity Normal Indicates the alarm has cleared warning Minor Mirndeterminate e Alarm Type See Fault Management Alarms e Source ShelfID of the shelf e Alarm Information For alarm messages see Fault Management Alarms e Ack This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged e User Name of user e Last Received Time when alarm was last raised e Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised 248 Configuration Management Edit This gives additional alarm details including a history of that particular alarm See Alarm Details Acknowledge Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator
21. d Address When a blade in the graphic is highlighted with the mouse the corresponding slot is highlighted in the list If a blade in the list is double clicked with the mouse it will open the BS TRx Management page for that blade If the slot is empty it will open the Edit Shelf Slot page 266 e Slot Number Slot number in ATCA chassis e Board Present Checked if present e Board Type TRx or switch e Board Name User defined e Board IP Address IP address assigned to slot Edit Shelf Slot Edit Shelf Slot General Properties Shelf Name Shelf AUTO 00 50 C2 3F F9 72 Slot Number Name IP Address 10 25 212 47 OK Cancel Validate Reload Configuration Management The edit page allows the user to name and assign an IP address to a slot so that any Ethernet switch that is placed into that slot can be managed using that IP address Ethernet switches should only be provided in slots seven and eight of a fourteen slot shelf and slot one on a five slot shelf Note If a slot is assigned an IP address and then a HiperMAX blade is placed in that slot then the IP address assigned to the blade takes precedence 267 Netspan Release 6 5 Management Alarms This tab shows the alarms Fiter No Filter Ar search Layat d Shelf A amp LITO 00 50 C2 44 1C 04 Sheit Connection State Onine Total Database tems Total Loaded tems 1 meees
22. e Edit the Web Config file in this directory using any standard text editor e Locate the line in subsection lt WiMaxWS1 WS gt lt add key WebServiceEnabled value true gt and change the value true to value false e Locate the WebUI Netspan subdirectory of the Netspan Installation typically C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 WebUI Netspan e Edit the Web Config file in this directory using any standard text editor e Locate the line in subsection lt WiMaxWS1 WS gt add key WebServiceEnabled value true gt and change the value true to value false e Restart IIS so that the changes to the Web Config files take effect AUTHENTICATION AND AUTHORISATION By default authentication is enabled In this mode the user name and password of a user entitled to access the Netspan Web services must be provided in the SOAP Header of every Web Service method request Netspan is pre configured with an administrative user for web services called wsadmin which has the WS Administrators role This role automatically has rights to all Netspan web services An additional role WS Service Provisioners whose access is restricted to purely the SS Provisioning methods in the web service interface is also supplied Provided the web service interface is enabled the wsadmin user is visible from the Users page in Netspan and it is possible to create new users having either the WS Administrators
23. A confirmation window appears confirming that the new MAC table settings have been stored Or Click Cancel to disregard 166 Configuration Management WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced New MAC Table Setting stored 4 Click Back to return to the Advanced page Changing an Entry from Dynamic to Static It is possible to change a dynamic MAC address to a Static one To Change a Dynamic Entry to a Static Entry 1 Select the MAC entry to be modified Alternatively click Select All to modify all available MAC entries 2 Click Set As Static to change a dynamic MAC address to a Static one A confirmation window appears confirming that the new MAC table settings have been stored WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced New MAC Table Setting stored to the Advanced page Deleting an Entry To Delete a table entry from the MAC table 1 Select the MAC entry to be deleted Alternatively click Select All to delete all available MAC entries maximum static entries 10 2 Click Delete the MAC entry A confirmation window appears confirming that the new MAC table settings have been stored 3 Click Back to return to the Advanced page 167 Netspan Release 6 5 Reset to default In the event you want to reset the device WiMAXWeb tool allows you to reset the device to the factory default settings and replace the user defined settings To Reset to D
24. BS TRx Air Interface Partially Usage Supported SS RF Statistics SS Modulation Statistics BS TRx Air Interface Counts For details of statistics see Performance Management section BS TRx Air Interface Usage BS TRx Air Interface Counts SS RF Statistics SS Modulation Statistics 258 Configuration Management BS TRx Inventory BS TRx Inventory me wr w i GHG p Product Code Descrptior Board Aiuri BS 313238 303131 t BSRIS0LF XT 1 BSR Connectorized 34 36 T BS 313238 303132 BSR3S0LF EXT 1 BSR Comectorized 3 436 BS 313238 303031 BSRISOLF EXT 1 BER Conmectorized 3 4 3 8 BS TR 313238 303032 BSROSQLF EXT 1 BSR Connectorized 3 4 3 6 BS 313238 303033 t BSR350LF EXT 1 ESR Connectorized 34 358 BSRI60LF EXTA BSR Conmectorized 3 4 3 6 BS 313238 303035 1 BSRISOLF EXT 1 BSR Cormectorized 3 4 3 8 BS TR 313238 303036 1 3 amp XF EXT BSR Cormectorized 3 4 3 6 diss 313238 303037 1 BSRISOLF EXTA BSR Comectorized 3 4 3 6 BS TR 313238 303038 BSR3SULF EXT BSR Cormectorized 3 4 3 6 lt 5 313238 303038 1 IBSR3 amp 0LF EXT BSR Cormectorized 3 4 36 E Total Database 513 Total Loaded 20 Reload Export View Export All Paged V Se o0 x ot26 As soon as a BS TRx is discovered by Netspan an entry is made in BS TRx table and the relevant inventory entries are
25. DateEnd 97 08 2007 Date Span days F Allow Eat Apply Current Software Status Use Upgrade 4 Latest Request NME Sate Cahegory Contig P Address Last Loaded From Database 211 26 11 Close Reload Help o Hardware Category Image Type Each Hardware type uses a number of software images this field displays the image types that will be downloaded o Current Configuration Current Specification for this BS TRx o BS TRx Specific Configuration Current Specification for this BS TRx o Hardware Category Global Configuration Specification for all hardware categories See Hardware Category o Request Enter new action for software e If setto idle the software will not be downloaded until the request is set e If download then the software is downloaded into the BS TRx based on the image set defined in the selected profile e If activate is set then the BS TRx is set to run with this image set defined in the selected profile The BS TRx will be rebooted and then the requested software that is downloaded into the standby bank will run on the BS TRx e Download and activate will perform both the steps of download and activate as outlined above o Image File Suite Image File Suite used Enter new profiles See Image File Suite o Schedule If in allow edit mode a request is made other than idle then a schedule box appears o Schedule for Selects the date and time for start end and duration of download If t
26. Edit Upgrade Category to initiate request and select required Image File Suite 1 Download and 2 Assign to Primary or Activate e Download The NMS Server requests SS s to retrieve Image files for a specific SS type from a location on the FTP server SS requests downloads from FTP server SS Downloads specified image files and places in standby bank e Assign to Primary Moves image files to primary bank e Activate Activate will ensure that the version for activation ends up in the Primary bank provided it exists in any of the banks and then reset from it After reset BS now running new software In BS list Running Version field shows new version Note In any upgrade a request is made to Download the image and then another request is made to either Activate or Assign to Primary Client Operations for Specific SS Upgrade Note All SSs for individual specific upgrade should be set to Use this SS Config 1 Create pointers to Image Files 2 Group the pointers into an Image File Suite based on product category 3 Use Edit Upgrade Category to initiate request and select required Image File Suite 1 Download and 2 Assign to Primary or Activate e Download The NMS Server requests SS s to retrieve Image files for a specific SS type from a location on the FTP server SS requests downloads from FTP server SS Downloads specified image files and places in standby bank e Assign to Primary Moves image files to pri
27. Exclude SS Events Raised in Last 5 Minutes Raised in Last Day Raised in Last Hour m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Lists all criteria see Creating Filters Events Events may be raised by o SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan o Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event tab shows the events stored in the database for the selected SS 117 Netspan Release 6 5 SF Status This screen shows the service flow status BS TRx 85 203 Service Flow Status Serace Flow ID Direction Service Product ISO ADOA C1 58 2 apo 0 1 58 2E Zo ADOA C1 58 2E Last Updated 18 07 2007 18 42 45 o Mac Address Mac Address of the SS o Service Flow ID Service flow ID o Description Service Flow Description taken from Service Product dynamic service flow indicates that this Service Flow exists only on the BS TRx and not on the NMS o Direction Service Flow Direction taken from either the Service Product or from the BS TRx o Service Product Name of the Service Product to which this Service Flow belongs o State Service Flow State reported by the BS TRx 118 Configuration Management Statistics BE a a NN Een enum cece i oe semen DWa
28. In the case where Netspan is being upgraded and the user has chosen to keep his existing database the install process runs a series of SQL scripts to upgrade the existing database to each intermediate version of the database until the required database version is reached There are no scripts provided to carry out the reverse procedure i e restore a database to an earlier version You should backup a copy of the database before carrying out the upgrade 55 Netspan Release 6 5 Netspan Server Uninstall Process 56 1 2 3 Go to Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs Select Netspan V8 and click the Remove button If the existing Netspan version was a Standard Network Server installation a popup window will ask you if you want to keep the existing Netspan database In order to upgrade a Standard Network Server installation you must keep the existing database and answer Yes to this question Whichever option you chose the existing Netspan database will automatically be backed up in C Program Files Airspan Backup Files The installer automatically removes the installation from your machine NMS Server Management NMS Server Manager The NMS server manager enables the server administrator to check the status of services used for the NMS and stop and start services as required NMS Server Manager o Server Displays the name of the server o Services Selects the service to be managed NMS Server Mana
29. List Subchannelisation restricts the number of tones that are used in the uplink channel by the SS This allows each tone to be transmitted at a higher power allowing a subscriber station that may otherwise be out of range to obtain a link It also creates a better balance between the uplink and downlink transmitted power The tones are grouped and unused tone groups may be allocated to other SSs Data throughput for a single SS will be less as a result of sub channelisation but the overall capacity of the link will not be affected Subchannelisation selection is determined by the BS TRx dependent on the current transmit level requirements of individual SS s Not all SS may be capable of sub channelisation Airspan SS s are capable of sub channelisation Once admitted to the system uplink modulation and sub channel width are adapted depending on uplink CINR reports and system configuration In theory uplink sub channelisation should provide a 3dB link budget gain for each halving of sub channel width up to a maximum of 12dB And although the theoretical value is almost achieved with BPSK the efficiency is less as the modulation rate increases The preference is to use a prefer full bandwidth scheme so as uplink CINR degrades the SS uplink switches to lower order modulation while maintaining full bandwidth transmission When the uplink modulation reaches BPSK 1 2 and CINR degrades further then subchannelisation is invoked to effect additiona
30. MAC Frames a rs List e See Add Edit 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profile below for details of list items Actions See Action Buttons Add Edit 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profile Different configurations are displayed for HiperMAX HiperMAX micro and MicroMAX HiperMAX HiperMAX micro Add Base Station 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profile Name MAC Messages General Settings DCD Interval DCD Transition UCD Interval UCD Transition Max MAP Pending DSx Request Retnes DSx aei Retries Name e Length 2 to 64 characters Allowed characters 0 to 9 A to Z a to 2 _ MAC Messages General Settings e DCD Interval ms Time between transmission of DCD Messages Default Not Specified Allowed Range 0 to 10000ms 326 BS TRx Profiles e DCD Transition MAC frames The time the BS TRx shall wait after repeating a DCD message with an incremented configuration change count before issuing a DL MAP message referring to uplink burst profiles defined in that DCD message Allowed Range 2 to 65535 MAC frames e UCD Interval ms Time between transmission of UCD Messages Allowed Range 0 to 10000ms e UCD Transition MAC frames The time the BS TRx shall wait after repeating UCD message with an incremented configuration change count before issuing a DL MAP message referring to downlink burst profiles defined in that UCD message Allowed Range 2 to 65535 MAC frames e Max MAP Pending
31. Netspan Release 6 5 Components to Install Select the components to instal or upgrade Select SQL Server Database Services and click the Advanced button Expand the Client Components node click on the Management Tools item and select Will be installed on the Hard Drive then click Next 32 Installation Instance Name You can install a defauk instance or you can specify a named If you are asked to enter an instance s name type SQLSERVER2005 otherwise select the default instance radio button Select use the built in System Account radio button and the Local system account in the drop down list then click Next 33 Netspan Release 6 5 Authentication Mode The athentication mode specifies the security used when connecting to SQL Server Collation settings define the sorting behavior for your server Binary order based on code pork comparison For use wath the 850 g Strict compakiblty with version 1 x case insensitive databases for use wth the Click Next 34 Installation 35 Netspan Release 6 5 r E E E Click Next SO i er 005 Setup Completing Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup Setup has finished configuration of Microsoft SQL Server 2005 alysis Services Analysis Services was upgraded from SQL Server 2000 all cubes dimensions and mining models must be reprocessed using SOL S
32. Percentage of uplink frames using BPSK modulation Uplink Frame Data QPSK 1 2 Percentage of uplink frames using QPSK 1 2 modulation Uplink Frame Data QPSK 3 4 Percentage of uplink frames using QPSK 3 4 modulation Uplink Frame Data 16 QAM 1 2 Percentage of uplink frames using 16 QAM 1 2 modulation Uplink Frame Data 16 QAM 3 4 Percentage of uplink frames using 16 QAM 3 4 modulation Uplink Frame Data 64 QAM 2 3 Percentage of uplink frames using 64 QAM 2 3 modulation Uplink Frame Data 64 QAM 3 4 Percentage of uplink frames using 64 QAM 3 4 modulation Uplink Frame Available The proportion of the uplink subframe that is unused empty Uplink Frame Contention The proportion of the uplink subframe that is used for contention regions Uplink Frame Size The proportion of the whole frame period that the uplink subframe occupies Read From BS TRx Last read from BS TRx Actions e See Action Buttons for other buttons 387 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Air Interface Counts BS TRx Air Interface Counts Latest from each BS TRx Upknk Mgnt Soy Downink Mgmt Sd Upkmk Count Court Octet Count Sector Colin 91 D p n Sector Jenna 203 0 p D Sector Dave 207 D p D Sector Tins 193 D b D Karot 93 m D p aj E Total Database tems 7 Total Loaded tems 5 Reload Export View Export All Paged F Sue 5 Previient 7 mjot2 e Filter Filter by By Date Changed
33. Save L3 Rufe 12 Rule Classifier Priority Present Prasent Total Database items 0 Total Loaded Items 0 Classifier ARP Bst o Service Flow template configuration for Downlink 1 Click Add on the Service Flow Template List Give a meaningful descriptive name like Downlink Normal Untagged Set service class to the required class see Service Classes Set direction to Downlink SL we puc S Initial State set as required Active Admitted Provisioned 6 Convergence Sublayer Type Packet 802 3 Ethernet O Service Flow template configuration for Downlink 1 Select associated Packet Filter classifier rule or Filters if more than one rule is required per QoS profile Classifiers are listed in the drop menu Select the required rule and click Add Once selected the rule is added to the Service Flow Template Classifier Configuration list and removed from the choices offered in the drop list Each rule has a priority assigned to it so that the highest priority takes precedent over rules of a low priority in order to avoid a conflict of rules See Packet Classifier Rules 2 Click OK to add the service flow to the service product Beware you will then need to press ok on the service product page to save the complete configuration o Service Flow template configuration for Uplink 1 Click Add on the Service Flow Template List Give a meaningful descriptive name like Uplink Normal Untagged Set servic
34. Select from Basic Medium or High Statistics Management Basic Security Policy is defined by what is implemented in Netspan SR5 This is a default policy Medium Security Policy applies stricter rules on what strings are acceptable for password eliminates obvious strings like password pass and enforces password change of first login of a new user Security Policy Medium 7 Valid Password Characters IMIDS gode High Security Policy in addition to Medium one introduces strict password recycling with configurable expiry period Security Policy High Password Expiry Wam Days 50 Password Expiry Days 60 Valid Password Characters 1 2 9 _ 89 1 e BS TRx Ethernet Stats BS TRx Air Interface Stats BS TRx Statistics Enable for statistics collection e SS Ethernet Stats SS Air Interface StatsSS RF Stats SS Modulation Stats SS Packet Counts SS Statistics Enable for statistics collection Server Properties e User Activity Logging Most user actions are logged in user activity log For the purpose of activity logging user is either Netspan login user or Netspan service The log stores the type of action but does not store low level details of the action e g BS TRx Channel provisioning change is logged but which properties have changed is not be stored in the log The user activity log is archived daily in the file stored in the directory lt Netspan Data Root gt Logs Activity The log files
35. Server User 404 Server Config Mgmt Service Prov Expert Viewers All screens with the ability to read only Expert Users read only Viewers All screens with View only except Server Global settings Expert Viewers Server Discovery Global Config Installers Ability to View Edit and Create Subscribers but not Service Profiles Everyone implicitly Config Mgmt Shelf Config Mgmt BSDU Config Mgmt BS TRx Config Mgmt Channel Config Mgmt SS List Prov Config Mgmt SS Mgmt BS TRx Profiles read only Service Profiles read only Faults Mgmt Software read only Compact Reports SS Installers Ability to View Edit and Create Subscribers but not Service Profiles Everyone implicitly Config Mgmt Shelf read only Config Mgmt BSDU read only Config Mgmt BS TRx read only Config Mgmt Channel read only Config Mgmt SS List Prov Config Mgmt SS Mgmt Service Profiles read only Faults Mgmt Software read only Compact Reports Service Provisioners Access only to Subscriber Provisioning Everyone implicitly Config Mgmt Service Prov Config Mgmt SS List Prov Everyone Implicit Main menu Login About Set home Go home etc Main menu Login About My Account Set home get home etc Web Service Administrators Northbound interface only Entirety of Web Services group Web Service Provisio
36. Service and select Use the Local System Account and click Next Usp the same account for each corvee Auto stat SOL Server Saraco Customige the settings for each service Sereces r Service Setings C accord 9005 C Une a Doman User account foes 22 Installation 10 Click Next on Authentication Mode screen 11 Click Next on Start Copying Files screen 12 On Choose Licensing Mode screen select Per Seat for and type in the number of seats current license typically 5 devices This will vary from customer to customer 23 Netspan Release 6 5 13 On Setup Complete screen click Finish Setup has trashed instaling an of Miesorait SOL Server 27 2000 on your computer Dkk Firuth to complete Setup B Installation of SQL Service Pack 4 24 1 Run each of the 4 executables shown below under Pre install SQL2KSP4 directory Netspan Installation Disk SQL2000 AS KB884525 SP4 x86 ENU EXE SQL2000 MSDE KB884525 SP4 x86 ENU EXE SQL2000 KB884525 SP4 ia64 ENU EXE SQL2000 KB884525 SP4 x86 ENU EXE Pe Edt Yew Favortes Tock ep Bock Gy Soarch Ga Folders 09122 0 SRR eR EESE fodes x amp C Meetings amp AT ed MiReadmesat teo Aas Readme s2deships htm Ces ResdmeSizka2sp4 hire e C3 est ReadmeSqios4sp him 2000 AS KBB84525 SPA xIS6 ENU EXE C3 695 3000 359 an
37. This reports only unicast and not broadcast multicast or management traffic o Uplink Basic Octet Count Octet count on SS basic management uplink to BS TRx connection o Downlink Basic Octet Count Octet count on SS basic management downlink from BS TRx connection o Uplink Primary Octet Count Octet count on SS primary management uplink to BS TRx connection o Downlink Primary Octet Count Octet count on SS primary management downlink from BS TRx connection o Uplink Secondary Octet Count Octet count on SS secondary management uplink to BS TRx connection 394 Performance Management o Downlink Secondary Octet Count Octet count on SS secondary management downlink from BS TRx connection o Uplink Octet Count Octet count on SS uplink to BS TRx connection This does not include management traffic o Downlink Octet Count Octet count on SS downlink from BS TRx connection This reports only unicast and not broadcast multicast or management traffic o Last Read From BS TRx Time stamp of the last time a value was read from BS TRx o Last Changed Time stamp of the last time a value read from BS TRx changed from the previous read values Actions e See Action Buttons for other buttons 395 Server Discovery Parameters Discovery Tasks Discovery Tasks 30 0 6031 10 0 50 91 30 0 0 32 100 50 92 00 35 251 100 35 251 40 0 E0 33 10 0 50 93 30 0 50 202 10 0 0 202 Total Datsbase bems16 Total Loaded t
38. and a brief description e Name Length 2 to 64 characters Allowed characters 0 to 9 A to Z a to 2 e Description User defined Service Flow Template Classifier List Click Add to add service flows to the list Service Flow Template Configuration For Service Product Service Flow Template Configuration Service Flow Description 3 Direction Downlink E Service Class 256k Normal Prority 1 162 Ust Initial State Active Convergence Sublayer Type Packet 802 3 Ethernet z Service Flow Template Classifiers Glaszifer Piaty Presert L2 Rule Present Classifier ARP Add service Flow classifiers to the list See Create Service Flows Click OK to add the service flow to the service product Beware you will then need to press OK on the service product page to save the complete configuration 294 Service Profiles Actions See Action Buttons 295 Netspan Release 6 5 Service Flows Create and configure a Service Flow Template by clicking Add on the Service Flow Template List f Note Separate Service flows need to be created for both the Uplink and the Downlink 296 Service Flow Template Configuration Service Flow Description F Service Class ATT Test rtp 10ms Unlimited y List Direction Downlink E Initial State Active bd Convergence Sublayer Type Packet 802 3 Ethemet z Service Flow Template Classifiers Layout
39. bit 3 in the full TOS byte If bit 3 is set to 1 this denotes high throughput If bit 3 is set to 0 this denotes normal throughput To select based on the IP precedence use a TOS mask of 254 and select the low and high values based on the decimal values in the table above e g to select exactly just traffic with IP precedence Internetwork Control set the TOS Low Limit and TOS High Limit to 192 To select traffic with IP precedence of Internetwork Control or Network control set the TOS Low Limit to 192 and the TOS High Limit to 224 To select based on the throughput bit use a TOS mask of 8 To select just normal throughput traffic set the Low limit and High Limit to 0 To select just high throughput set the Low Limit to 1 and the High Limit to 1 If you wish to select traffic on the basis of both the IP Precedence values and throughput bit we recommend defining 2 separate classifiers for the same service flow Packet Classifier Pass All Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Pass L3 Rules WA 1 Sk Destination MAC Address Mask ayer r Hexadec 3 c V User Pronty w Lamit r 453 Netspan Release 6 5 VLAN Scenarios The Table below shows basic VLAN scenarios for more scenarios can be set using the tables below BS TRx Subscriber BS TRx Custom SS Custom Config Requirement Station Config Requirement MultiTag MultiTag MultiTag MultiTag Pass Pass Untagged Untagged Single Tagged Single
40. changes SS processing changes Failed SS changes Percentage of synchronised SSs BS TRx Failed S W Upgrades SS Failed S W Upgrades BSDUs Failed S W Upgrades BSDU pending queue changes Online BSDU pending queue changes BSDU processing changes Failed BSDU changes Percentage of synchronised BSDUs Reports 419 Backup and Restore Backup Frequency It is recommended that the database is backed up daily more frequent backups may be prudent if many system elements are being added edited NOTE It s a good idea to move your backups onto a different physical machine or storage network Backup Detach Database from Server 1 Stop the SQL Server right click icon on menu bar and select MSSQLServer Stop Then restart the server right click icon on menu bar and select MSSQLServer Start this procedure will clear all client connections to the database MSSQLServer Pause Start 2 Detach database from server Open the Enterprise Manager point to Netspan database and right click mouse Select All Tasks and then Detach Database SQL Server Enterprise Manager Console Root Microsoft SOL Servers SOL Server Gra pe e Om XPOS Q vg Tree METSPAN 02 Conse Root 5 SA Servers 3 sac Server Gro LJ Oatabases Backup The Database 1 Stop SQL Server This will disconnect the server fro
41. defined E04000 Service constructor failed type and or URI are null E04001 Initialisation of remoting client failed not registered or exception E05001 Operation not allowed when applied to yourself E05002 Server SECURITY EXCEPTION The details of the exception have been logged Please contact server administrator E06000 The version s of server component s doesn t match the product version number 430 Appendix Assigned Internet Protocol Numbers HOPOPT IPv6 Hop by Hop Option ICMP Internet Control Message IGMP Internet Group Management CBT Exterior Gateway Protocol Any private interior gateway used by Cisco for their IGRP BBN RCC MON BBN RCC Monitoring NVP II Network Voice Protocol PUP PUP ARGUS ARGUS EMCON EMCON XNET Cross Net Debugger Subsystems IRTP Internet Reliable Transaction ISO TP4 ISO Transport Protocol Class 4 0 NETBLT Bulk Data Transfer Protocol 31 MFE NSP MFE Network Services Protocol 431 Netspan Release 6 5 32 MERIT INP MERIT Internodal Protocol 33 SEP Sequential Exchange Protocol 3PC Third Party Connect Protocol Inter Domain Policy Routing Protocol XTP XTP IDPR CMTP IDPR Control Message Transport Proto SDRP Source Demand Routing Protocol IPv6 Route Routing Header for IPv6 IPv6 Frag Fragment Header for IPv6 Inter Domain Routing Protocol RSVP Reservation Protocol GRE General Routing Encapsulation Protocol I NLSP Integrated Net La
42. o Service Product o Service Class o Packet Classifier o VLAN Configuration o SS Custom Configuration o SS Packet Counts Server o Discovery Parameters o Server Global Configuration o Trap Destinations o SS VLAN Port o Users BS TRx Profiles o Filters o Burst Profiles o Export o OFDM Channel o Import o 802 16 Protocol o Private Key Management o BS TRx Custom Configuration o SubChannelisation o VOIP Qos o Unlicensed Channel About About is shown by clicking on Netspan above the version number clicking on ASMAX where About is pointing takes you to Airspan com See System Information Context Sensitive Help Netspan has a context sensitive help system that guides the user to a relevant page to the screen in view Clicking on a takes the user to information on a specific panel clicking on a HELP button takes the user to help relevant to the whole screen Add Base Station 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profile Name MAC Messages General Settings DCD Interval DCD Transition UCD Interval UCD Transition Max MAP Pending DSx Request Retries 7 Click on for help on specific panel DSx Response Retries UL MAP Effectiveness Time Tproc 200 Numbered Timeout Settings T5 Uplink Channel Change Response 0 ms 7 DSx Response Timeout 1000 ms T8 DSA DSC ACK Timeout Registration Timeout T10 Wait for Transaction End TH TFTP f amnletinn Time
43. or WS Service Provisioners role Any user having the WS Administrators or WS 458 Appendix Service Provisioners role should be authorised to access any of the methods described in this document By default authentication is enabled If you wish to use the Internet Explorer test page with Netspan Web services then you need to disable authentication In this mode no credentials need to be supplied to access any of the Web Service methods Note that the IE test page can only be used as a way of testing a local Web Service testing of a remote Web Service is not supported Disabling Authentication The procedure to disable authentication is as follows e Locate the WebServices subdirectory of the Netspan Installation typically C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 WebServices e Edit the Web Config file in this directory using any standard text editor e Locate the line in subsection lt Sys Common Security gt add keyz authenticationenabled value true gt and change the value true to value false e Restart IIS so that the changes to the Web Config files take effect Reference SSProvisioning The interface can be viewed by browsing to http lt webserver gt wimaxws1 SSProvisioning asmx o Deprovision Remove any provisioning configuration that has been assigned to this SS in the NMS As a result of this change the system will asynchronously remove the configuration information related to Pro
44. 16 Present F Valid F Sequential Number a BS TRx Connection State On Line Interface Index MIB II 2 Last Changed At 12 07 2007 15 27 54 Channel Provisioning 1910 s p Aw Statist Source Type All Changes hn progress Queued aiat Faleu Auto Discovery 802 16 See Discovery Task o Present Ticked if present o Valid Ticked if valid o Sequential Number o Interface Index MIB II o BS TRx Connection State Connection state of BS TRx o Last Updated Time of last update Channel Provisioning o Provisioning State All Changes New Changes Changes in Progress Changes Awaiting Resp Changes Failed Current provisioning statuses Actions See Action Buttons 243 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Registered SS Fiter No Filter FST scorch LU Ensbied Service Product Configuration Protie mm Do AC BO 00 00 29 10020 41 Sanpie of Service Sample of SS Cust Sample of SS Chann Do ACBO 00 00 2A 100042 Im of Service Sample of SS Cust Sample of SS Crann DAC BD 0000 26 1000 43 of Service Sample of SS Cust Sampie of SS Chann Do AGB0 0090 2c 1000 44 Im I Sangle ot Service Sample of SS Cust of SS Erann _ e Bante or service Bangle of SS Cust Bangle of SS NT Total Database tems 10 Total Loaded 5 Eat Relead Export View Export All Pages 7 Szes wot
45. 2C P Read Community Public lp Write Community Prate F Timeout 5000 2 General Properties o Managed Tick click to enable drop list Set to yes or no o Description User defined o Region Select required region To add a new region see Add New Region O Site Select required site To add a new site see Add New Site Network profile Select NTP profile name from Drop list SNMP Properties o Allow edit Check this box to enable access to all other boxes in this section o IP Address IP address of Ethernet connection o Port Ethernet port number o SNMP Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o SNMPv2 Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o SNMPv2 Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o Timeout The number of milliseconds that the manager waits for a response Actions See Action Buttons 195 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management This window collects together all the information pertaining to a particular BS TRx The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific hardware are displayed in the window BS TRx Management Location E tj NMS lab Lat 0 000000 Long 0 000000 m ASOC 196 00ACOA 100558 Hardware Provisioning Commissioning State Actions Channels Registered 885 Home for 885 Software Inventory Alarms
46. 312 urged dcc E E E E A AT 315 BS TRX PEOfiles iio ecd tee a ede E a acne An peur AAO ee A IEE E 319 Software Managernernt 3 3 iiid Eder A ne Ad Ah ee ete 347 Software Upgrade seanoa CER 360 Fault Management leet iA Edid uc D dated ek o ERN Pel CoA E Tak E be ate yee 369 Performance Management oe perde ded pet De heen A duet Ad enu vt Aun Ad ener sets 385 SERVER EE 397 Netspan Release 6 5 DISCOVErY Parameters able Nel 397 Server Global Configuration tod er otis Atha nesta Ag ceux Y eth eet Ad eects 400 Trap Destinations ieu pce I e pen Dre Ixus eR kick nee cake dads deen eel rea ends Mia CEN ar E Rs 402 403 liccc EET 407 deja EE PE 412 onere 413 IP NetwOrk ioa dee doge aa Macaca t rese Ld enit e exu deese mese redes et ev ute 414 RE POMS iss EE 417 Backup and Restores xi fee ancl peo ede pe ended tae pet et e exec AE Aue A eet ety e ex eR awe 421 r E E A a a a a A Na a 423 ere 465 C Ccrla c 469 Introduction This manual covers the use of the Netspan Network Management System NMS The fields of each screen are described along with processes for setting up editing ASMAX BS TRx and SS equipment Note Some scre
47. 70 Configuration Management Getting Started The tabbed views show information on all the stations that have been selected BS TRxs shown BS TRx shown _ Multiple BS TRx Management 285 TRexs Selection BS TRx Name pn Adams Managed Mise Mie 9 pacing Discovered a NN TED Channels Software Inventory Alarms Events Statistics rae No Filter snr Layout ad Total Database tems 2 Total Loaded ems 2 Paged V Sire 0 Eotn New Window Sets up a new window that can be managed independently of the main window Set as Favourite Sets a favourite Software Management page o BSTRxSoftware Go to Favourite Goes to favourite o SS Software page o BSDU Logout Ends present session o Upgrade Categories My Account Opens account details o Images Search Searches the database F o Image Suites Fault Management o Subscriber Provisioning o Events o Subscriber Station o Active Alarms BS TRx o Historical Alarms o BSTRX Channel EI o Event Types o BSTRxInventory o Alarm Types SS inventory Performance Management o Shelf o BS TRx Ethernet Stats o BDSU RE o BS TRx Air Interface usage o Global SS Provisioning o BS TRx Air interface Counts Topology o SS Ethernet Stats o Regions o SS Air Interface Stats o Sites o SS Stats o Tree o SS Modulation Stats Service Profiles 71 Netspan Release 6 5
48. A R M DBBR P C NMSBkpData NetspanDB_02_11 BAK Restores and activates Netspan database from the backup file NetspanDB 02 11 BAK found in the directory C NMSBkpData Press Enter to exit the program Getting Started User Interface Easy access to the Netspan Management system is facilitated by the Web based approach Internet Explorer 6 0 or above is recommended however other upper level browsers can be used subject to limited functionality for example Netscape Navigator 7 System Warning This warning appears on all list and management pages as well as on the about page Current warnings are related to o Licence violation o Not enough memory Subscriber Stations Licence Violation Total number of 138 SS elements exceeds the hmi defined in the cence as 20 The auto discovery and the creation of new SS elements are disabled 2 rae sear J P Asus Regaiered ferccelrateed Serce Product Cinfprainn T octema Tan _ berazerest _ 20 Norma Trara Lecce Norma Trara Leinen icem sox Normal Tratt SOC Norma Tratt _ Dyramc aoe Auto Retesh 1 mente Hep Important Note Pop up windows should be enabled to allow Netspan to run in a separate window from the browser All navigation should be within the pop up window and not by using the back forward buttons in the browser
49. Address IP address of access point o MAC Address MAC address of access point Provisioning o Number of channels on which SS is misconfigured Count is the number of channels on which the SS is registered but not correctly configured o Re Provision Use this button to re provision the SS Statistics o BS TRx Name BS TRx that the SS is currently registered with o Channel BSID BSID of BS TRx Channel o BS TRx IP Address BS TRx IP address o All Changes New Changes In Progress Queued Awaiting Response Failed These list items show the status of changes to the SS Actions See Action Buttons 108 Configuration Management SS Management Actions Action Request Select Action Reset Subscriber Station Instruct SS to de register and change the channel See Note Instruct SS to de register and stop transmitting Below Instruct SS to de register and restrict transmission Instruct SS to re register Delete all SS Configuration Action Queue Source Type n Tota Database tere Total Loaded Items t The screen capture above is for a single managed SS The screen for Multiple SS management contains the same fields Note Not all actions are supported on the MicroMAX Action Request o Select Action from list e Reset Subscriber Station e Instruct SS to de register and change the channel e Instruct SS to de register and stop transmitting e Instruct SS to de register and restrict transmission e Instruct SS
50. Address Registered u Cal The list of selected 555 then displayed with option tabs to select State Actions Software Inventory Alarms Events Statistics 175 Netspan Release 6 5 Multiple SS Management State Multiple Subscriber Station Management 3 Subscriber Stations In Selection MAC Address Atesa Reystered Service Enabled vice Contkjuration Protle y Provisioning Error MAC Address Court 30 08 Hoo A0 0 co 3E 0c ACOA CH SE 94 Provisioning Statistics New MAC Agere Changes Ques Changes ILLI Provisioning State o Error Count Shows errors detected during provisioning o Re Provision Select SS to reprovision and use this button to re provision the SS Statistics o MAC Address SS MAC address o All Changes New Changes In Progress Queued Awaiting Response Failed These list items show the status of changes to the SS Actions See Action Buttons 176 Configuration Management SS Management Actions Action Request Select Action Reset Subscriber Station Instruct SS to de register and change the channel See Note Instruct SS to de register and stop transmitting Below Instruct SS to de register and restrict transmission Instruct SS to re register Delete all SS Configuration Action Queue Source Type n Tota Database
51. Broadcast SF Modulation Select modulation type Application o Authentication Select from Disabled Enabled o Data Encryption Mode Select from None CBC 56 bit DES o Use Broadcast Service Class Select No Yes o Sub channelisation Select Enable or Disable o GPS Synchronisation Select from Disabled Send Trap And Stop Send Trap And Continue Scheduler o Frame Synchronisation o Frame Mode Select from TDD FDD o Scheduling Policy e Strict Equal priorities FIFO e Weighted Fair Queueing Service shares for each priority are set using weightings set into the boxes Provides consistent response time to heavy and light network users alike without adding excessive bandwidth A flow based queuing algorithm that creates bit wise fairness by allowing each queue to be serviced fairly 337 Netspan Release 6 5 in terms of byte count For example if queue 1 has 100 byte packets and queue 2 has 50 byte packets the WFQ algorithm will take two packets from queue 2 for every one packet from queue 1 This makes service fair for each queue 100 bytes each time the queue is serviced Bridge o Ageing time for SS Ports Time to live for routing table o Flooding Allowed When an unknown packet arrives at BS TRx it is broadcast to all the SSs on that BS TRx if flooding allowed is set to yes If flooding allowed is set to no then the packet is discarded Actions See Action Buttons 338 BS TRx Profiles Sub Channelisation
52. By default a mask of 000000 000000 allows the SS to register with any BS TRx To restrict the BS TRxs that the SS can register on apply a mask examples are given below Example for defining a single base station with which the unit can communicate Assume that the operator wishes to limit the network entry of an EasyST ProST to a specific BS TRx with ID 20xAB5050123456 To enable this the following configuration must be performed BSID AB 50 50 12 34 56 BSID Mask FF FF FF FF FF FF this is limited to one 1 specific BS TRx Example for defining multiple base stations with which the unit can communicate The operator needs to set up a BSID plan in which it can identify for example three base stations together For example it can divide the coverage area into zones of four BS The zone number shall be 22 bits and the BS index within the zone shall be 2 bits If the operator wishes to limit the unit access to zone 30 then the configured parameters must be BSID AB 50 50 00 00 78 BSID Mask FF FF FF FF FF FC Example for defining an SS to work with a single Operator BS radios The operator may want to define the units EasyST ProST to work only with BS radios that belong to the specific operator but would not like to define to which specific BS radio to connect to To enable this the following must be performed To verify that the BS TRx radios have BSIDs with the correct operator ID To utilize the Web bas
53. Classifier Priority does NOT determine Traffic Priority it is the Service Flow Priority that does this Incoming packets are checked against each classifier rule in order of the rule priority range 0 255 low to high If the packet matches the rule it will enter the queue for the service class associated with the rule The Scheduler then processes each queue according to o Priority range O to 7 low to high o Scheduling type if Uplink o MIR CIR Latency etc 303 Netspan Release 6 5 Classifier 1 Classifier 2 Classifier 3 Rule Rule Priority 240 Priority 88 Pass VOIP Pass FTP This page lists all available Packet Classifier Rule Profiles Packet Classifier Rule Profiles List Fiter No Fitter 3897S ser Neme Priory 195 217 232 30 stination 195 217 232 26 stination 195 217 23217 on 195 217 232 18 195 217 232 32 0n 195 217 232 145 Be ose IER papes movment ote o Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters No Filter Having both L2 and L3 rules 304 Service Profiles Having only L2 rules Having only L3 rules a This button
54. Database teme 3 Totali Loaded tems 3 JF mage Reload Export View Export Pagod 2 Sue PrevNest 1 sors Close Reload Help Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters enma By OFDM Channel Profile By PKM Profile d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Ed Lists all criteria see Filters List For details of list headings see Add Edit BS TRx Channels Actions See Action Buttons 222 Configuration Management Multiple BS TRx Management Software Configure Software Download Hardware inet defined OS Application SCRT SecurityCertificates Category Image s not defined OS Application SCRT SecurityCertificates Current se BS TRx Specific Configuration Configuration 010000031049 7 FEipt0000031051 7 Specific Configuration Hardware Category Global Configuration Request Download idie Image File Suite 595 0 H2 003 Not Defined s set Schedule Time Start 11 28 Time 17 24 _ Time Span 600 hours minutes Date Start 07 06 2007
55. Description Product Category Image s iot defined OS Application SCRT SecuntyCertificates Currently Assigned File Configurations To Software Types Software Typs Software File Contig ration To Add Edit a software image file 1 Select the file by clicking on the software image file in the list and click edit 2 Inthe Edit Software Image File window select the software type to edit by clicking on the software type in the list and click edit Select the appropriate file from the drop list 4 Click Apply For buttons see Action Buttons 359 Netspan Release 6 5 Software Upgrade Software Download Upgrade Note When upgrading both Netspan and Hardware the Netspan upgrade should be done prior to doing a software upgrade to BS or SS Order of upgrade 1 BS TRxs 2 Subscriber Stations Process Overview On line software download is supported and operates while network traffic is running The BS TRx and SS can store the previous loaded software so that in the event of software corruption the last known good software can be recovered The progress of SW upgrade can be monitored individually on the Software tab of the BS TRx SS management page by clicking on reload Netspan does not currently support the software download feature to 3rd party CPE s Software upgrade is performed with help of Software Image Files and Software Image File Suites Software Image Files define the file the file server and ho
56. Disabled or Enabled Not an option on MicroMAX o Management On VLAN choose either Disabled or Enabled MacroMAX HiperMAX micro and HiperMAX BS TRxs require change of the management VLAN using local management WEB page Please refer to 605 0000 830 for instruction o Reserved VLANs These are the VLAN IDs used internally within the MicroMAX BS TRx They do not apply to any other BS TRx type See Add Edit BS TRx for VLAN options Port o Port Mode Set either Not Set Raw or VLAN o Acceptable Frame Types See VLAN Options below o Ingress Filtering Defines behaviour for port ingress o Backwards Compatibility VLAN Port Mode Tagging Behaviour and Ingress Filtering are for information only and cannot be set This mode is only supplied for backwards compatibility with certain versions of MacroMAX HiperMAX micro and HiperMAX BS TRx software Consider changing Frame Types to Tagged Only or Untagged Only Provider VLAN Bridge Q in Q Encapsulating IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tags within 802 1Q enables service providers to use a single VLAN to support customers who have multiple VLANs QinQ on the subinterface level preserves VLAN IDs and keeps traffic in different customer VLANs segregated o S Tag EtherType Select from 0x88A8 IEEE 802 1ad 0x9100 0x9200 0x9300 S Tag Configuration Mode Select Use SS Configuration or select Use BS Configuration For All SSs o Use C Tag Priority For S Tag Select Yes or No If
57. E01056 When the port mode is Raw the Frame Types must be set to both Tagged and Untagged E01057 When the port mode is VLAN and the Frame Types includes Untagged frames then the Port VLAN ID must be specified E01058 When the port mode is Vlan and the Port VLAN ID is untagged Ingress Filtering cannot be configured E01059 When the management traffic is using VLAN tagging a frame type of Untagged only is invalid E01060 When the management traffic is untagged a frame type of Tagged only is invalid E01061 The Untagged VLAN is not a valid selection for any of this BS TRx s Reserved VLANs Management VLAN Port VLAN ID or VLAN port membership entries E01062 On this BS TRx when the allowed frame type is all the Port VLAN must be set to the Untagged VLAN E01063 When the port mode is Raw there should be no entries on the port VLAN membership list E01064 When the frame type is Untagged only there should be no entries on the port VLAN membership list 426 Appendix E01065 The Port VLAN in the Server Global Configuration must be specified E01066 The Port VLAN ID matches one of the Reserved VLANs specified in the Server Global Configuration E01067 The Port VLAN ID matches the Management VLAN specified in the Server Global Configuration E01068 The Port VLAN ID matches one of the Reserved VLANs configured on one of the BS TRxs E01069 The Port VLAN ID matches the Management VLAN configured on one of the BS TRxs E0
58. Events SF Status Statistics em HEN sor wo Digi Provisioning Prowsioning Number ot Channel Name Channel BSD Present Stabs Changes Registered SSs Number in 85 BS TR Nam Channel 04004 100568 DOADOA 100558 OK D 2 T SOC 196 ET 2j Total Database tems Totsi Loaded hems LE fors Reload Epon View Expo Pages xj Close Re oad Help Location This displays where the BS TRx is located within the network and displays a graphic of the type of BS TRx deployed Tabs Provisioning Displays General Properties SNMP properties and Bridge properties Commissioning Configures BS TRx State Displays the Auto Discovered SNMP parameters for the BS TRx and the State of provisioning activity within the BS TRx Actions Allows requests for actions to be made to the BS TRx and queued for implementation Channels Lists BS TRx Channels Registered SSs Lists all registered SSs Home For SSs Lists all SSs that have services delivered only by this BS TRx Software Displays current software build and is used for downloading software to an individual BS TRx Inventory Displays Inventory for this BS TRx Alarms Displays Alarms for this BS TRx Events Displays Events for this BS TRx SF Status Displays SF Status for this BS TRx Statistics Displays Statistics for this BS TRx Actions See Action Buttons 196 Configuration Management BS TRx Management Provisioning Ef Edit Mod
59. Fs Tolerable Power Offset 000 dB Tolerable Frequency Offset 0 Hz Downlink Initial Burst Modulation 2 See Note Cyclic Prefix Ratio G fins Note The fields in the shaded area are not available to MicroMAX Name Name Length 2 to 64 characters Allowed characters 0 to 9 Ato Z a to z Downlink Tx gt Rx Transition Gap This sets the gaps between the uplink and downlink frames on TDD to allow the change in the direction of transmission at the SS This is calculated as 4 fs where fs 1 14 x the channel bandwidth 1 microsecond at 3 5mHz o Rx gt Tx Transition Gap RTG See Tx gt Rx Transition Gap TTG above o Frame Duration Select from available Values 2 5 4 5 8 10 12 5 and 20 ms The longer the frame duration the greater the latency Uplink o Contention based Reservation Timeout The number of UL MAPs to receive before contention based reservation is attempted again for the sane connection Unit number of UL MAPS Range 1 to 255 o Req Region Full Number of Subchannels The SSs requests bandwidth in the frame header Some SSs can only make requests on the full channel but some SSs are capable of making requests in a sub channel or group of sub channels Set this to govern how many sub channels are allocated in a bandwidth request Select From 1 2 4 8 and 16 subchannels 16 essentially represents full Req Region Full Number of Symbols Use
60. Items 0 Unimited Number of SS Items 0 Unkmited Click Apply to install Once installed the new license information is moved to the current licence panel and a status message notifies the user that the licence requires IIS to be restarted in order to be activated Services Security Database Version Licence Paste new licence below Current licence lax Numba of BS TR tams D Undinted i Numba Reboot the Server to run with the new licence 53 Netspan Release 6 5 Server Upgrade Netspan Standard Network Server Installation Upgrade Installation Process The Netspan Upgrade Installation Process allows you to upgrade Netspan components while keeping all data in your Netspan Database If Netspan is not yet installed on the server machine then follow the instructions for a Standard Network Server Installation described in Standard Network Server Installation Netspan Server Standard Network Server Installation Upgrade Process If there is currently a different Netspan Standard Network Server version already installed then the upgrade process is as follows 1 Stop SQL Server 2 Backup the current version of Netspan database Copy all files and the logs subdirectory located in C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 Database by default to another location The installation program will backup your database automatically as well 3 Uninstall the current versi
61. LAN Table Management to manipulate LAN table settings o LAN Table Entries to view add delete and modify LAN table MAC entries o Reset 2 Default to reset the device to the factory default settings o Clear Log to clear all Log entries 131 Netspan Release 6 5 o WiFi Control to reset WiFi parameters o Restart to restart the EasyST ProST 132 Configuration Management Upgrading a Device WiMAXWeb allows EasyST ProST software upgrade which can be performed only by authorized technicians EasyST ProST upgrade is performed by downloading a software version file to the EasyST ProST using File Transfer Protocol FTP To upgrade the device you need to define the FTP parameters and the name of the software version file that you want downloaded The downloaded file is initially downloaded to the device s standby software bank which is inactive To activate the downloaded file you need to transfer it swap to the device s active software bank and then reset the device f Note EasyST ProST upgrade can only be performed by authorized and qualified technicians To perform software download 1 Ensure that you have an FTP server program that is up and running and configured with the path to the folder in which the software version file is located on your PC 2 Access the Advanced page as described in Accessing the Advanced Page section In the Advanced page select Software Download and click Select The Software Download page
62. Last read from BS TRx Actions O See Action Buttons for other buttons 385 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Air Interface Usage Stats BS TRx Air Interface Usage Latest from each BS TRx List e These statistics are only partially available for MicroMAX BS TRxs Finer No Filter Channet Nome Layon OW Doering Frese Downink Frame Overheard Daa tPs BS TRx 313238323135 Channet313238 323135 16 h TRx313238323135 Channet323230 323135 18 h Eis 1 239 329135 333298323135 114 ho 10 Es tre siazcaa2s03 23258323134 TN E MS LE d Jl BSTRx31325832913 _ hennet333238329134 0 1 h7 m Total Database tems 123 Total Loaded 5 Reload Export View Export All Pagod 2 Size 5 Prev next 1 25 BS TRx Air Interface Usage Statistics Note Downlink Frame Data and 96 Uplink Frame Data columns are not available for MicroMAX BS TRxs Filter Filter by By Date Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week A list of current filters is displayed by clicking the list button See Filters BS TRx Name BS TRx name Channel Name Channel name These counters are reset when the BS TRx resets Those counters that are given as a percentage are calculated by the BS TRx as a running average over the most recent frames 386 9 o Downlink Frame Overhead The pro
63. Maximum Validity of MAP DSx Request Retries Number of timeout retries on DSA DSC DSD requests Default 3 e DSx Response Retries Number of timeout retries on DSA DSC DSD responses Default 3 UL MAP Effectiveness Time Tproc us Time provided between the last bit of a UL MAP at an SS and effectiveness of that MAP in us Numbered Timeout Settings Numbered Timeout Settings oo T5 Uplink Channel Change Response ms T7 DSx Response Timeout D ms T8 DSA DSC ACK Timeout 0 ms TY Registration Timeout 30000 ms T10 Wait for Transaction End D ms T13 TFTP Cornpletion Timeout 15 min T15 Watt for MCA RSP 20 ms T17 Authorisation and Key Exchange 5 min T22 Wait for ARQ Reset D ms T27 idle Max Time Between Unicast Grants 5000 ms T27 Active Max Time Between Unicast Grants 5000 ms e T5 Uplink Channel Change Response ms Wait for uplink channel change response Allowed Range 0 to 2000ms e T7 DSx Response Timeout ms Wait for DSA DSC DSD response timeout Allowed Range 0 to 1000ms e T8 DSA DSC ACK Timeout ms Wait for DSA DSC acknowledge timeout Allowed Range 0 to 300ms e T9 Registration Timeout ms The time allowed between the BS TRx sending a RNG RSP success to an SS and receiving a SBC REQ from the same SS Default 230000ms Allowed Range 300 to 65535ms e 710 Wait for Transaction End ms Wait for transaction end timeout Default Not Specified Allowed Range 0 to 3000ms e T13 TFTP Completion
64. Note See BS TRx release notes for details of statistics support The statistics history is stored in the Netspan database The database keeps detailed history for a short amount of time and less detailed history for a much longer period of time For each combination of BS TRx Channel and SS the history of purged as follows Statistics over 1 day old are purged so that only the 1st record in every hour remains Statistics over 1 week old are purged so that only the 1st record in every day remains Statistics over 12 weeks old are deleted The following BS TRx statistics are available HiperMAX HiperMAX micro Service Release BS TRx Ethernet Statistics BS TRx Air Interface Usage BS TRx Air Interface Counts SS Ethernet Statistics SS RF Statistics SS Packet Counts SS Modulation Statistics For details of statistics see Performance Management section BS TRx Ethernet Stats 229 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Air Interface Usage BS TRx Air Interface Counts SS Ethernet Stats SS Air Interface Stats SS RF Stats SS Modulation Stats SS Packet Counter Statistics 230 BS TRx Channels BS TRx Channels me NoFww sj cH Channel Name hannes BSD Sector 010000 031048 ctor 010600 031051 010000 031052 Sector 360000 380000 Configuration Management Provisioning Provisioning Number or pK Changes RegstoredSSs 7 List Total Database Rems 10
65. Number of Frames Between Shifts STC Min Shift symbols 335 Netspan Release 6 5 o Earliest STC Minimum Shift symbols o Minimum Reg To STC Gap symbols Application Application Allow insecure SS Yes X Encryption Mode None Traffic VLAN Mode Check And Tag Tdd Downlink Share 50 Uplink Overbooking Ratio 10 0 1 Downlink Overbooking Ratio 10 0 1 Uplink Radio Efficiency 50 Downlink Radio Efficiency 50 Unchecked Broadcast Service Class ets 555 Unchecked Broadcast SFID 0 o Allow Insecure SS Select Yes to enable o Encryption mode Select required encryption mode o Traffic Port VLAN Mode Select Check and Tag or Untagged See VLAN Scenarios o TDD Downlink Share Sets Percentage of frame used for the DL Does not include overheads and uplink o Downlink Uplink Overbooking Ratio The percentage CIR over booking allowed on the shelf Individual channel overbooking is controlled by the QOS o Downlink Uplink Radio Efficiency Sets percentage of link used for traffic This setting effects how much CIR can be committed CIR o Unchecked Broadcast Service Class Select Service class for Raw VLAN o Unchecked Broadcast SFID set by VLAN Bridge Max Number of Forwarding Entries per BS TRx 64000 Ageing Time seconds Flooding Allowed o Max Number of Forwarding Entries per BS TRx Maximum number of entries in routing table for the BS TRx o Ageing Time Time to live for routing table o Flooding Allowe
66. Onine BS 000000 000092 SNMP Authenticabon Fature BS 000000 000032 BS Connection State NoComms BS 112233332211 Lost Comms BsConnecticniState invaliloToBeld BS 000000 000000 BS Connection State hvelalpToBsidMao BS 0001 AA 00CB73 Lost Comms BsConnectioniState NoComms uuuuuumu Edit Ecknowiedag Filter 2 Total Detabase tems 103 Total Losded Items t Reload Export View Export All Paged Size 10 Prev Nest 1 zo Select the filter from the drop down list Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged Primary No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type Alarms Alarms in Netspan are raised and cleared by events Only events that indicate a change of fault status are used to raise or clear alarms The alarms have predefined severity as follows warning cyan minor A major critical The severity of an alarm may be set by editing the Alarm Types The operator can delete and acknowledge alarms either one at a time or perform a multiple select operation The operator can insert a comment for alarms this comment then becomes visible for all users Inserted comments are stored together with the alarm in the history log 371 Netspan Release 6 5 List e Alarm ID ID generated by Netspan
67. ProST and are displayed in this Detailed Log in greater detail The logged parameters are displayed in the Detailed Logs page To access the Detailed log 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page select Detailed Log and click Select The Detailed log page appears as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Detailed Log Time D H M S MS Severity Code Description 0 00 01 53 540 Informational 50331712 System restart via WEB 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 0 00 01 12 640 Informational 50331712 System restart via WEB 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 OP Mie 1 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 9 0 00 01 08 670 50331712 System restart via WEB 10 0 00 00 00 000 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 11 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 12 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 13 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 14 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 15 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0
68. Profile must be configured in the NMS E02018 Service Product does not exist E02019 Service Product already exists E02020 Cannot delete Service Product that is in use 428 Appendix E02021 Service Product is in use E02040 Packet Classifier Name provided is null or empty E02041 Vlan Name provided is null or empty E02042 SS Vlan Port Profile Name provided is null or empty E02043 Parameter provided is null or empty E03000 Server Event Log was either not configured or not installed The application will terminate immediately Please contact server administrator Database login failed for ASP NET account The application will terminate immediately Please contact server administrator ASP NET working process must be restarted when the login problem is fixed Server detected unexpected page event The details of the event have been logged Please contact server administrator if the problem persists Server detected unexpected application event The details of the event have been logged Please contact server administrator if the problem persists E03008 Loading user control s failed 429 Netspan Release 6 5 E03009 Loading data from database failed E03014 Indirection URL invalid or other HTML error See event log for details E03015 Updating page controls failed E03016 Updating page drop down list controls failed or selection faile E03022 L2 and L3 classifier rules are empty At least one should be
69. Provisioning 82 Getting Started Provisioning Process Provisioning Process Once the BS TRx is detected Netspan will provision the shelf with VLAN information and create database records for it During this process a Channel for RF configuration OFDM channel and 802 16 protocol settings is created The user is then required to provision the BS TRx and channel according to their requirements Once this is complete the BS TRx will accept registrations from SSs On registration completion the BS TRx sends a trap to Netspan which will check its database to see if the SS is known if it is found in the database then provisioning data service flows will be set from Netspan to the BS TRx If it is not known Netspan will apply the Default configuration to apply on SS Discovery under the Server Global Server Configuration screen Known or Unknown SS Powered in a Netspan Managed Sector SS Powers Up Initialises and scans for a BS SS synchronises with BS DL and requests service during a contention period Netspan receives Trap and searches for the MAC address in the database If found it sends the appropriate provisioning data to the BS If not found it sends the Global Default provisioning to the BS if any Known or Unknown SS Obtains flows and passes traffic if permitted 83 Main New Window New Window When new window is clicked the currently viewed screen is opened in
70. Registration Allowed Channels It is possible to restrict the BS TRx Channels on which an SS may register The list of allowed channels for registration is specified by applying a Channel BSID Mask to a Channel BSID The list of matching BS TRx Channels is displayed as Selected Channels Care must be taken when restricting the BS TRx Channels on which an SS may register If the SS is not within range of any of the allowed BS TRx Channels it will result in the SS becoming uncontactable and a site visit may be required to restore service to the SS o Allowed channels configuration Select enable to configure 103 Netspan Release 6 5 o Restrict allowed channels Check box to open restriction selection o Channel BSID Channel BSID o Channel BSID Mask See Add Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning o Selected Channels List of channels that are available to the SS after the mask is applies selected SNMP SNMP communication requires a manager and an agent SS SNMP provides the language and the rules that the manager and agent use to communicate The manager sends requests to an SS either to send information or to set a parameter and an SS provide the requested data or set the parameter SS s can also notify the manager independently through unsolicited trap messages which indicate that certain events have occurred Management Information Bases MIBs define what can be monitored and controlled within a device Check boxes to enable ac
71. Release 6 5 Management Alarms This tab shows the alarms Fiter No Filter Ar search Layat d Shelf A amp LITO 00 50 C2 44 1C 04 Sheit Connection State Onine Total Database tems Total Loaded tems 1 Fir Reese Reload Expon View Export Al szet xot e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters e Alarm Status in order of increasing severity Normal Indicates the alarm has cleared warning Minor Mirndeterminate e Alarm Type See Fault Management Alarms e Source ShelfID of the shelf e Alarm Information For alarm messages see Fault Management Alarms e Ack This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged e User Name of user e Last Received Time when alarm was last raised e Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised 226 Configuration Management
72. Rx Untagged Rx Untagged sabia Untagged Rx Untagged Rx Untagged Tagged Tagged Rx with Tag Rx Untagged Lucas Untagged Rx Untagged Rx Untagged pe Tagged Tagged Tagged Rx with Tag Rx with Tag pese Bree Untagged Rx Untagged Rx Untagged Tagged Tagged Ur Rx Untagged Rx with Tag Untagged Rx Untagged Rx Untagged 457 Netspan Release 6 5 Netspan Northbound Interface Introduction The Netspan northbound interface utilises industry standard Web Services technology The communication between the Web Service client or consumer and Web Service server or Provider hosted by Netspan is achieved via the exchange of SOAP messages over HTTP The services exposed by the Web Service are defined using WSDL Web Service Description Language files which specify the contract between the client and server There are a number of software toolkits to automatically generate the Web service client code from WSDL files thereby facilitating the easy development of Web service clients using most major programming languages operating systems WS Consumer Client HTTP SOAP20VE HTTP HTML WS Provider Server Netspan SUPPORT The Web Services northbound interface is enabled by default in Netspan Disabling the Interface The procedure to disable the interface is as follows e Locate the WebServices subdirectory of the Netspan Installation typically C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 WebServices
73. Scheduling Poll Period custom 400 ms Enable Not Requested Window Size 1024 blocks Block Lifetime 0 10 ps Sync Loss Timeout i 1 10 us Delivery Order Presevea Rx Purge Timeout 1000 10 ps Block Size fe Bytes m 1 e Name Length 2 to 64 characters Allowed characters 0 to 9 Ato Z a to 2 QOS Scheduling is for UPLINK traffic ONLY as defined in the 802 16 2004 standard e Best Effort BE e real Time Polling Service nrtPS e time Polling Service rtPS e Unsolicited Grant Service UGS All Downlink traffic is treated the same but is subject to Packet Classifier and Service Class Priority 299 Netspan Release 6 5 300 Further reading on this subject can be found on pages 138 to 142 of the 802 16 2004 Standard Scheduling Type A scheduling service is configurable for requesting and provisioning data transmission on the uplink This specifies the upstream scheduling service used for upstream service flow If the referenced parameter is not present in the corresponding 802 16 QOS Parameter Set of an upstream service flow the default value of this object is Best Effort Possible scheduling services are available e Best Effort Best Effort is a method of requesting uplink bandwidth for a service flow The bandwidth is requested by transmitting a bandwidth request from the ST to the BS TRx in a contended access bandwidth slot in the UL sub frame There exist
74. Sustained and Min Reserved this is a grant of 8000 Bytes per second If the Scheduling Poll Period is set to 100 ms this will allow a grant of 800 Bytes at each scheduled poll period So the Max Packet Size to pass at these settings would be 800 Bytes less various overheads If you test this with a ping l xxx you will find the result is about 601Bytes with headers this equates to 743 Bytes on the wire e Undefined custom Traffic Priority The value of this parameter specifies the priority assigned to a service flow For uplink service flows the BS TRx should use this parameter when determining precedence in request service and grant generation and the SS shall preferentially select contention Request opportunities for Priority Request CIDs based on this priority Range 0 to 7 0 lowest Priority 7 highest priority A secondary management channel automatically has priority 8 the primary management channel has 9 and the basic channel has 10 Request transmission Policy Defines extra properties of a Service Flow used to maximize the efficiency of the air interface The value of this parameter provides the capability to specify certain attributes for the associated service flow Select items by clicking with the mouse More than one item may be selected by clicking with the mouse with the Ctrl key pressed e Broadcast BW Req Note This should always be selected activated e Piggyback Req e Fragmentation e PHS e SDU Packing
75. TRxs e BS TRx Select specific slots e Channel Selects a specific channel Profile Types Selects BS TRx profiles types e Use when BS TRx profiles of a certain type e g Burst Profiles are to be exported Multiple types can be exported by selecting each type and clicking the add profiles button e All Exports all profile types The selected items list may be edited by deleting any unwanted profiles For example to select a single Burst profile select the burst profiles that are unwanted and delete from the selected item list Once the desired profiles list is built click Export and choose Save on the pop up message Save the xml file to disk Note that this will be saved on the client PC that is running the browser 412 Server Import Import This screen is used to allow the import of Service Profiles and BS TRxs profiles into Netspan When a profile is imported the list item contains a suffix appended to the list of I reference number Import Import File Selection Select File For import Browse Progress Information To Import a File o Navigate to Server gt Import o Browse and select the xml file that contains the profiles you want to import Note that this xml file to import must reside on the client PC which is running the browser wrest Ide Sede tae LJ Progress information impon processing completed withest o warnings
76. The following screens are for illustrational purposes only Each product type and revision will display its specific information Viewing System Information The EasyST ProST system information is displayed in the System page which is accessed from the System menu The System page displays a table containing read only system information as displayed below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced System Serial Number 304F62C0885A Product Type PST4980T WIFI Certificate Stored SIM Card System Up Time D H M S 0 00 00 17 122 Configuration Management The parameters of the System page are described in the table below SS NN Certificate Digital certificate x 509 indication either stored or not f Note Only SS with stored certificate will work in Authentication and Encryption modes SM Card Displays whether a SIM card is installed EasyST only System Up Time How long the system is running since the last reset in Days Hours D H M S Minutes and Seconds 123 Netspan Release 6 5 Viewing Signalling Parameters The Signal Parameters menu opens the Signal Parameters page see figure below which displays various signalling parameters This page displays the link status a table containing downlink parameters BS TRx to EasyST ProST and a table containing uplink parameters EasyST ProST to BS TRx WiMAX Modem Management EN da a du O
77. Type Select the image type The image types offered are dependant on the product selected OS Application SCRT A separate image file is needed for each image type Image File Server Protocol Type This is automatically assigned dependant on the image selected TFTP for BS TRx FTP for Subscriber Station Image File Server Type IP address type Ipv4 supported 357 Netspan Release 6 5 Image File Server Address Enter the network address of the server 10 0 25 40 Image File Name With Path The file name path of the Image file User Name User Name for FTP site Password Password to FTP site Software Version Expected in the Image file Software Version Enter in this field the software version that is contained in the image file Note It is important that this is correct if the s w version is wrong the download will continually re try and the user will never see it successfully completed For buttons see Action Buttons 358 Software Management Software Image File Suites e Menu Software Management Image File Suites The Image file Suite is a collection of image file definitions Software Image Suites Dascnphion Paged IV 5 20 This screen gathers together software images for a particular Software Product It defines what images that will be downloaded activated when an upgrade is made Add Edit Software Image File Add Software Image Suite General Properties Name
78. Uplink dBm Standard Deviation RSSI reported on uplink Mean CINR Downlink dB Mean CINR reported on downlink Mean RSSI Downlink dBm Mean RSSI reported on downlink Std Dev CINR Downlink dB Standard Deviation CINR reported on downlink Std Dev RSSI Downlink dB Standard Deviation RSSI reported on downlink Last Read From BS TRx Time stamp of the last time a value was read from BS TRx Last Change Detected Time stamp of the last time a value read from BS TRx changed from the previous read values Std Dev CINR Std Dev RSSI Both these are indicative of the fade margin required for the SS and in general the fade margin required is of the order of three times the standard deviation observed Actions e See Action Buttons for other buttons 391 Netspan Release 6 5 SS Modulation Stats SS Modulation amp Subchannelisation Statistics Latest from each BS TRx Fiter No Filter 7 E BS Karo 93 Karo 93 DO C1 50 ES na 193 Sector Tina 193 00 40 04 C0 2D 2 Im p p S Dave 207 Sector Dave 207 DIANIA C2 06 CB m p p BS Karol 93 93 0 105 7 p b 193 Sector Tina 193 DXAQOACIDe12 R b a gt j Total Detabase tems 19 Tota Loaded tems Reload Export View Export All Paged Steb 1 ors Help SS Modulation Statistics Note Not available on MicroMAX o Filter Filter by By Date Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Cha
79. Users Users Netspan incorporates built in security which is configurable Both form based user authentication and Role based authorisation can be used to limit and control access To edit user properties double click mouse on a user Actions See Action Buttons 403 Netspan Release 6 5 Add Edit Users Add Edit Users Add User identity UserName A User Full Name Admin User You must set the password for this new user eo New Password Confirm Password Profile eo Role not set n WS Administrators WS Service Provisioners Edit User Properties identity ES User Name mwindett Full Name malcolm You can change the password of this user 2 New Password Confim Password Canc Profile Administrators Favourte ListPage aspx for SS OK Cancel Validato Reload Netspan has UserName Password security access integrated This has 7 user Roles Everyone is implicit 6 are visible Passwords must be a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 24 All users can view the Network Status Identity User Name User name for login screen Full Name Full name of user Password Confirm Password Password for login screen Profile Role Select the user profile see Add Edit Users Administrators Access to all GUI screens Unrestricted access implicit Expert Users Access to All screens excluding User Creation modification Administrators
80. Yes selected then the Default C Tag Priority set in Port is used o S Tag If Use C Tag Priority is set to No then set S Tag Priority SNMP Properties o IP Address IP address of Ethernet connection 199 Netspan Release 6 5 o Port Ethernet port number o SNMP Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o SNMPv2 Read Context Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public o SNMPv2 Write Context Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public o Timeout Specifies the timeout value 5000 recommended for any requests sent to the agent by the manager Note The SNMP read and write community needs to match that configured in the BS TRx during its installation Actions o Edit The edit button opens the BS TRx Edit screen for details see Add Edit BS TRx See Action Buttons 200 Configuration Management BS TRx Management Commissioning Commissioning New Values Shelf Blade Properties Shelf ID Shelf Physical Slot Clock Synchronisation Role Primary Master Manage GPS Secondary Master Manage GPS Allow Eda Apply Validate Last updated 6 03 2007 14 27 08 Close Reload H Commissioning Note Configuration of BS TRx management port is not supported on the MacroMAX and HiperMAX micro Shelf Blade Properties For HiperMAX ATCA shelves the following blade information is reported Shelf ID Reported by the blade Shelf Physical Slot Reported by the blade C
81. a request has been initiated It summarize the request and progress of the download o Update From Equipment Gets software status information from equipment immediately 113 Netspan Release 6 5 Subscriber Station Inventory As soon as a subscriber station is discovered by Netspan an entry is made in the subscriber station table and the relevant inventory entries are automatically made in the inventory table An overview of the active network inventory is shown as part of the Navigation menu SS Management Inventory iter No Filter 1979 taot Mac Address Product Code f Multiple SS Management Inventory The screen shot below shows the inventory for two selected SSs Multiple Subscriber Station Management 2 Subscriber Stations In Selection eo Registered Service Enabled Service Product Coritiguration A State Actons Software 2 Inventory Alarms Events Statistics NoFiter 9 Layout Ud Paged 7 5 20 e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary Secondary By Product Pro
82. allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Lists all criteria see Filters For definitions of list headers see Add Edit Packet Classifier Templates Actions See Action Buttons 305 Netspan Release 6 5 Add Edit Packet Classifier Rule Profiles The Packet Classifier sets the rules used to classify the packets based on their associated scheduling and QoS rules defined in the Service Flow In other words the classification decides what service flow will be used to transmit the classified packet For example VoIP packets can be given a higher priority QoS than web traffic through the detection of a specific destination I P address Note In this template a tick box M is used to set a rule If the tick box is not checked the values cannot be changed and rule will not be set Edit Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Destination 195 217 232 30 Priority 100 Action Forward L3 Rules y L2 Rules v Payload Header Suppressior VLAN Tagging xj Valde j Recad Packet Classifier Rule Profile e Length 2 to 64 characters Allowed characters 0 to 9 Ato Z a to z e Priority The value specifies the priority for the Classifier which is used for determining the order of the Classifier A higher value indicates higher priority Classifiers may have priorities in the range to 255 e Action Sele
83. are 408 Item Type first Column Name second drop down drop down list list Active Alarm By Alarm Type Raised in Last Day Raised in Last Hour A Raised in Last 5 Minutes Not Acknowledged Alarm Acknowledged By Site Name Not Managed Managed and Online Managed By Hardware Type By Shelf ID By Management Vlan ID By Region Name By Site Name Not Managed Provision Failure Server Managed and Online Managed BS TRx Air Interface Changed in Last Week Counts Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Day By Date BS TRx Air Interface Changed in Last Week Usage Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Day By Date BS TRx Channel By Region Name By Site Name Provision Failure By Burst Profiles Package By PKM Profile By Protocol Config Profile By OFDM Channel Profile By Custom Config Profile By SubChannelisation Profile By Voip Qos Profile BS TRx Ethernet Stats Changed in Last Week Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Day By Date BS TRx Inventory By Description Software By Product Code BS TRx Software By Hardware Category Event Last 5 Minutes Last Hour Last Day By Event Type Exclude SS Events Filter By Sharable Filter By System Filter By Filter Type By Filter Name By Filter Creator By Not Sharable Filter By Not System Filter Historical Alarm By Alarm Type Raised in Last Day Raised in Last Hour Raised in Last 5 Minutes Packet Classifier Having Both L2 And L3 Rules Having only L3 Rules Havin
84. be installed such as SQL server the user will either be told via the installation instructions to ensure that the software is installed or prompted to insert the correct disk so it can be installed automatically A This process is for a clean install of Netspan Netspan Server Clean Installation Process Before installation please ensure that all the system prerequisites as detailed in Installation Overview have been met Install the Windows Server operating system Install the Windows Server operating system with IIS enabled and the latest service packs applied 1 Install the Windows Server operating system using the installation instructions provided with the software 2 For Netspan the Windows Server operating system should be updated with the latest service packs available run Windows Update just after the Windows Server installation 3 Update internet explorer to version 6 0 or later the download can be found on the Microsoft web site http www microsoft com windows ie downloads 17 Netspan Release 6 5 Installing IIS Install Internet Information Services IIS 1 Go to the control panel Add or Remove Programs Administrator 2 Choose Add Remove Windows Components 3 Tick the Application Server Check Box Windows Components You can add ot remove components of windows 4 Click on the Details Button to check the Application Server details 18 Installation 5 Tick all t
85. e Alarm Type See Alarm Types e Source The BSID as set in the shelfcfg txt file on the BS TRx e Alarm Information Description of alarm e Ack This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged e User Name of user e Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised e Last Raised Event Time when alarm was last raised Edit The edit button allows the user to view alarm detail information and add a comment if desired See Alarm Details Acknowledge Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Release Release of an alarm indicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all Actions See Action Buttons for other buttons Alarms defined 372 Go to Alarm Types on Netspan to see a list all the defined alarm types Fault Management Historical Alarms The Historical Alarms list shows all alarms inclu
86. in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week A list of current filters is displayed by clicking the list button See Filters e BS TRx Name BS TRx name e Channel Name Channel name These counters are reset when the BS TRx resets 388 e Uplink Mgmt Sdu Count Uplink Management SDU counts e Downlink Mgmt Sdu Count Downlink Management SDU counts e Uplink Traffic Sdu Count Uplink Traffic SDU counts e Downlink Traffic Sdu Count Downlink Traffic SDU counts e Broadcast Sdu Count Broadcast SDU counts e Uplink Mgmt Octet Count Uplink Management Octet counts e Downlink Mgmt Octet Count Downlink Management Octet counts e Uplink Traffic Octet Count Uplink Traffic Octet counts e Downlink Traffic Octet Count Downlink Traffic Octet counts e Broadcast Octet Count Broadcast Octet counts e Read From BS TRx Last read from BS TRx Actions e See Action Buttons for other buttons Performance Management SS Ethernet Statistics SS Ethernet Statistics Latest from each BS TRx Fiter No Filter zm Layot EA id 85 TR SS Mac Address LL Pits in Diecerds in oes d Total Detabese 0 Tota Loaded Rems Reload Export View Export Paged 7 52 2 Prev Next Zora SS Ethernet Statistics o Filter Filter by By Date Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week Registered A list of current filters is displaye
87. in the NMS Returns null if no SS VLAN Port Profiles are found o SSVlanPortProfileUpdate Updates an existing SS VLAN Port Profile in the NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the SS VLAN Port Profile already exist in the NMS it is updated otherwise an error is returned Inventory The interface can be viewed by browsing to http lt webserver gt wimaxws1 Inventory asmx BSSectorList Produces list of names of BS TRx Channels configured in the NMS Returns a null if no BS TRx Channels are found Fault Management The interface can be viewed by browsing to http localhost wimaxws1 FaultManagement asmx o AlarmAcknowledge Acknowledges an existing active Alarm with AlarmID that exist in the NMS Returns an error if the AlarmID does not already exist o AlarmDelete Deletes an existing active Alarm with AlarmID that exist in the NMS Returns an error if the AlarmID does not already exist o AlarmDetailsCommentAppend Appends a comment on an existing active Alarm with AlarmID that exist in the NMS Returns an error if the AlarmID does not already exist o AlarmDetailsCommentSet Sets comment on an existing active Alarm with AlarmID that exist in the NMS Returns an error if the AlarmID does not already exist o AlarmDetailsGet Gets detail information on an active Alarm with AlarmID that exist in the NMS Returns an error if the AlarmID doe
88. increment size It based according to standard definition or BS TRx capability USA WiMAX HUMAN Europe WiMAX HUMAN 802 16 _ 8 5 o Allowed Channels A BS TRx can be restricted to any set of channels that it can use by typing the allowed channels Type ranges and or single channels separated by commas similar to the Word interface for printing pages of a document Netspan helps the user by translating the channel numbers into frequencies The BS TRx will not use any channel that is not in the allowed channels list AND in the channel scheme o Power Threshold Defines the BS TRx antenna gain for determining the correct detection threshold o Tx Power Configuration enable disable o Tx Max Power Tx power allowed This value should include the antenna gain and transmission bandwidth The values to be configured depend on the standard and operation frequency o Bandwidth Share for Measurement The time that the BS TRx will use for radar detection Tx o Minimum Number of Pulses for Detection The minimum number of pulses per burst should be taken for detection In that way a false alarm is minimized o Minimum Number of Bursts for Detection The last step in decision is that more then a predefined number of burst where detected o Radar Detection Sensitivity Radar detection minimum likelihood define the ratio of radar signal to the total detected signal Clearest Channel Choice In order for the BS TRx to cope with interferenc
89. it into the primary bank before activating The SS is set to run with this image set defined in the selected profile The SS will be rebooted and then the requested s w will run on the SS That is in the standby bank of the image defined in the profile is activated e Download and Activate performs download and activate as above e Assign to primary will try to ensure that the requested version is the primary bank provided it is already in either the standby or primary banks Software version specified in the image suite is only swapped to primary if it is in the Standby bank If already in the Primary bank it will consider the operation as successful If in neither bank the operation will fail If successful when the user next starts reboots the SS the SS starts using the new software Software Management Image file suite Select from list Schedule If in allow edit mode a request is made other than idle then a schedule box appears If the box is checked new controls appear to selects the date and time for download to start and to finish and the period in hours minutes and days for download If the schedule box is unchecked the request will be acted upon immediately Start Date Scheduled start date of download End Date Scheduled end date of download Start Time Scheduled start Time of download End Time Scheduled end time of download Software Upgrade Summary Report Counts The counts show the progres
90. minutes and days for download If the schedule box is unchecked the request will be acted upon immediately Click OK to initiate the download To check progress of the download reopen the edit products window and observe the Statistics display After this process has completed the process needs to be repeated to Activate Assign to Primary the software download Option 2 Individual Station Upgrade Open the Software Management Upgrade Categories Select the category that is relevant and set to or leave as Idle 365 Netspan Release 6 5 Edit Upgrade Category Identity Hardware Category Image Type s HiperMAX micro OS Application SCRT Description BS with OS Applicationand SCRT images Type Nodes Of This Type In Network Software Upgrade All Nodes Of This Hardware Category Except Where Individually Overridden Request Download Image File Suite 584 cert 4_ 035 SCRT only Schedule iv Time Start 00 00 Time End Time Span 00 00 hours minutes DateEnd 0508 Date Span f days 2 Goto the Configuration management screen Select BS TRx or Subscriber Station and select the hardware to be upgraded form the list More than one may be selected from the list using the Cntrl and Shift keys Click Edit select the Software tab One can follow the global configuration setup in the previous step or override with a specific action and profile as shown below Configure Software Downloa
91. more than one channel from the BS TRxs channel list Then click the manage button The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific hardware are displayed in the window Multiple Base Station Sector Management State Actions Alarms Events Statistics Provisioning State Provisioning State t 0 006033 Sector Karol 93 yp 10000 060193 d BSO Name Provisioning Statistics New Awaiting evr Progress gt hs e Changes Response Tabs State Displays the auto discovered SNMP parameters for the BS and the state of provisioning activity within the Channel Actions Actions Alarms Alarms Events Events Statistics Statistics 252 Configuration Management State Use this page to provision multiple channels Provisioning State Provisicning of es TRx and this channel only State Neve A 57 InProgest Queusd n Feied Changes AM Changes Response Provisioning State o BSID BS TRx ID o Channel Name o Provisioning State Shows errors detected during provisioning o Re Provision Select channels to re provision and use this button to re provision the chosen channels Statistics o BSID BS TRx ID o All Changes New Changes In Progress Queued Awaiting Response Failed These list items show the status of changes to the SS Actions See Action Buttons 253 Netspan Rele
92. number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary Secondary By Description Software Description Software By Product Code Product Code 211 Netspan Release 6 5 Management Alarms This tab shows the alarms Fiter No Filter Ar search Layat d Shelf A amp LITO 00 50 C2 44 1C 04 Sheit Connection State Onine Total Database tems Total Loaded tems 1 Reese Reload Expot View Export All Pee szet mot e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters e Alarm Status in order of increasing severity Normal Indicat
93. on which there has been a failure to provision this SS e Description 1 5 User defined e Discovered Checked if SS has been discovered by a BS TRx e Discovered Status Changed At Displays the last time the discovery logged a change of status Actions See Action Buttons 209 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Software This screen reports software status and is also used when upgrading software to the BS TRx if a software upgrade is made to all BS TRxs then use Software Management Products Configure Software Download Hardware Category Image Type s Request image File Suite Schedule Time Start Date Start W Allow Edit Apply MacroMAXOS Application Securty Certificates New Values Old Values v Specific Configuration F Specific EAM Use Hardware Category Global Configuration Download And Activate Download And Activate idie ps 1 MacroMAX BS Application and OS 7 6 01 003 E SR6 1 MacroMAX BS Application and 081 4 not set Time End Time Span 06 00 hours minutes 06 06 2007 v 06 08 2007 Date End Date Span 1 days Latest Request NMS State Schedued Stat Oate pooo hao Update From Equipment Last Updated From Equipment 10 57 51 7601 003 muJu2613 7601 003 psoncor pao heokson peoos Thu 2613 paos bao Certi 1 00 001 Tue Aug 15 0 1 00001 gt Total Dat
94. or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Release Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Release of an alarm indicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all Other Actions See Action Buttons 249 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Events Fiter No Filter j 7g Lid Evert Type Source Evert info R BS TRx Added ps TRx 313238 303032 User Netviee Discovery Service 1200772 BE n Total Database hems 1 Total Loaded ems Reload Export View Export All Paged V Sze 20 Prev Next 1 sors Close Reload Help Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined
95. package is defined for the specific target hardware category The BS TRx Channels of different categories will not be able to have wrong profile assigned The exception is category not defined which is maintained for backwards compatibility purposes with older versions of Netspan databases Profiles of not defined category cannot be used for MicroMAX BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profiles 4 Frame Duration Contention Reg Region Full Raq Region Fis ms Reservation Subchannels Symbolin List For definitions of list headings see Add Edit BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profile below Actions See Action Buttons Add Edit BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profile 323 Netspan Release 6 5 324 Add BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profile Name Target Hardware Category inet defined Downlink Tx gt Rx Transition Gap TTG 1340 Rx gt Tx Transition RTG 255 2i Frame Duration 10 Tj ms Contention based Reservation Timeout Req Region Full Number of Subchannels Req Region Full Number of Symbols 40 J ck Subchannelisation Focused Contention Code See Note Bandwidth Req Opportunity Size a Ranging Req Opportunity Size General Parameters Min Reg Region Full Tx Opportunities 200 per sec Min Focused Contention Tx Opportunities 0 See Note Max Supported Roundtrip Delay 4096 ps 613974 9 Tolerable Timing Offset per
96. running SR6 offers the support for both legacy and 802 1Q based configuration auto detection of the support Netspan has new set of warning messages reflecting the changes in the configuration system and depending on the support available in a given BS TRx o Protocol VLANs e Classifier based VLAN tagging e VoiceMAX dynamic service flow VLAN tagging MicroMAX o M Bridging section in custom configuration platform dependent e Ageing time all platforms e LAN table size per BS TRx MacroMAX HiperMAX and HiperMAX micro Flooding control MacroMAX HiperMAX and HiperMAX micro The use of custom configuration profile for some bridging properties will help customers in turning new bridging generic properties on for the entire population of the BS TRxs The basic bridge and port configuration remains on the BS TRx edit page and is not covered by the multi configuration The future releases will see all the BS TRx bridge and port configuration transferred to a new BS TRx bridging profile for more flexibility o DHCP option 82 for each VLAN for all BS TRx platforms New binary mode o Support for default priority used for frames tagged with Port VLAN ID Support for MicroMAX In addition to statistics VLAN support changes and SS management support the following new features are available in SR6 0 o Dynamic Frequency Switching Netspan Release 6 5 e Configuration with new BS TRx Channel profile Unlicensed Channel Profile
97. symbols mum Reg To STC Gap 5 symbols Fast Power Control Set on to enable Fast Power Control This allows the BS TRx to adjust the power levels of multiple subscribers simultaneously Timing Source Options are GPS Suppress GPS No Suppress or Internal This sets the response of the BS TRx to loss of synchronisation from the GPS GPS Suppress will disable the BS TRx from running without synchronisation GPS No Suppress allows the BS TRx to continue to run on its own internal timing source Internal forces the BS TRx to run on its own internal timing source Duplex Select FDD or TDD Reuse Group When two adjacent sectors share the same channel different reuse groups are set for each sector SSs that can see both sectors will only sign on to one sector Select a different group for each sector Min Frequency Offset Not Implemented Max Frequency Offset Not implemented Max Min Timing Offset During ranging the timing is adjusted by the BS TRx These fields set the maximum minimum offset limits that the BS TRx is permitted to use The range is 5 to 15 Recommended min 4 max 6 SNR Change For UI Burst Profile Sets the change in SNR required to initiate evaluation of uplink modulation Typically 0 5dB Min Subchannel Req Region Full Tx Opp Rate of subchannel bandwidth opportunities 1 s Not supported Channel Bandwidth Select the required channel bandwidth Carrier Sense Threshold dBm Carrier Sense Backoff Frames STC
98. that the corresponding channel will be scanned for viable communication with the ASMAX BS TRx f Note The table below is an example of the 5 MHz Channel Table display 139 Netspan Release 6 5 9 MHz Channel Table Uplink Downlink Status Channel Frequency Frequency MHz MHz 0 3302 500 3302 500 6 3332500 3332 500 3342500 3342500 9 3547500 3347 500 9 Clear un check the Channel IDs not to be scanned 140 Configuration Management WiMAX Modem Management 1 dv New parameters have been stored effective after restart 10 To apply the new frequency channel settings to the unit you need to restart the unit Click Back to return to the Advanced page and then follow the restart instructions in Restarting the Unit f Note In the event the product type is an EasyST with a SIM card the SIM content will override the configured values 141 Netspan Release 6 5 Defining Associated Base Stations For the EasyST ProST to communicate with a base station the specific BS TRx must be defined at the EasyST ProST The base station is defined by a BS TRx ID BSID value and a BS TRx Mask value The BS TRx ID value is the ID of the base station to which the EasyST ProST is registered authorized to communicate with Multiple BS TRx can be defined for communication with the unit This is typically relevant in roaming scenarios T
99. the SHIFT key held MAC Address 00 A0 0A C0 01 3D 00 A0 0A C0 01 47 00 A0 0A C0 01 4B 00 A0 0A C0 01 4D 00 A0 0A CO 0D 73 00 A0 0A CO0 08 D9 00 A0 0A C0 08 CF List in Ascending Order List in Descending Order Re ordering List Headings Many lists have more columns than can fit on the screen and although columns can be viewed using the scroll bar columns can be re ordered by clicking and dragging the column to a new position in the list Red placement arrows shoe point of insertion Traffic duling Traffic Schedulinipriority eriod Priority Re sizing Columns Minimum Bandwidth In Use 1 45 ITM Sixteenth i Click and drag border between column headings Saving Layouts Layouts can be saved by clicking the layout a icon and the current layout is then retained on subsequent access Click the icon to return to the default layout Layout information saved contains order of columns sort direction for columns columns width pager configuration enable page length The layout is stored in the database for each list type and each user independently Note Entering Data If when adding fields a list of fields out of range is generated indicating the range of values that are legitimate 69 Netspan Release 6 5 Property Page A property page is used to add and edit profiles for BS TRxs Channels and Subscriber Stations Add BS TRx General Properties First Channel BSID 10000
100. type of BS TRx deployed Tabs Provisioning Displays General Description Service and VLAN Properties State Displays the Auto Discovered SNMP parameters for the SS and the State of provisioning activity within the SS Actions Allows requests for actions to be made to the Subscriber Station and queued for implementation Recently on BS TRxs Lists BSs on which the SS has recently registered Software Shows software loaded on SS Inventory Lists inventory information Alarms Lists Alarms for this subscriber Events Lists Events for this subscriber SF Status Service Flow Status Statistics Displays Statistics Remote Management Allows remote configuration of the SS Actions See Action Buttons 105 Netspan Release 6 5 Subscriber Station Management Provisioning Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning MAC Address 00 0 0 0 2 28 Service Serica Product SGoPwsAL CCS Custom Config Profle NewRFCOyamc El list Pot VLAN Profle PonMode VLAN PVIO 60 FrameType Untagif0 i Senice Enabled Yes Senice Allowed Channel ay Registered Channel Registration Allowed Channels Allow configuration to be set on SS ves Restrict allowed channels r Channel BSID 000000 000000 a Channel BSID Mask 1000000 000000 Sector Colin 91 Selected Channels Pas iade SNMP Properties Allow edit IP Address 10 0 3
101. value of this parameter specifies the maximum latency between the reception of a packet by the BS TRx or SS on its network interface and the forwarding of the packet to its RF Interface SDU Length Indicator The Service Data Unit SDU is the payload of the packet The value of this parameter specifies whether the SDUs on the service flow are variable length or fixed length The parameter is used only if packing is on for the service flow The default value is variable length SDUs e Variable length e Fixed length SDU Size Byte The value of this parameter specifies the length of the SDU for a fixed length SDU service flow This parameter is used only if packing is on and the service flow is indicated as carrying fixed length SDUs It specifies the SDU size in bytes The default value is 49 bytes i e VC switched ATM cells with PHS The parameter is relevant for both ATM and Packet Convergence Sublayers Scheduling Poll Period custom Sets the polling period for RTP nRTP and UGS A message lists hardware that does not support ARQ Enable ARQ enabling is requested for the connection e Not Requested e Requested Window Size Byte Indicates the maximum number of unacknowledged fragments at any time Range 0 to 1024 Default Not Specified Block Lifetime 10 us The maximum time interval an ARQ fragment will be managed by the transmitter ARQ machine once initial transmission of the fragment has occurred If transmission or r
102. 0 List e Name See Add Edit Burst Profiles Packages below Actions See Action Buttons Add Edit Burst Profiles Note The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific hardware are displayed in the window Adding a Burst Profile The easiest way to add a new burst profile is to either clone See BS TRx Burst Profiles Packages the Default ASMAX profile or a profile similar to one already created and then edit the profile to the required values 319 Netspan Release 6 5 Add BS TRx Burst Profiles Package pax ce ta PF IPSK CC 2 lg bese scones va 24 z Uplink CINR Protection Fade Margin 900 e8 00 Update Thresholds Urwa Cnt Jav Power Boot 681 Name e Name Length 2 to 64 characters Allowed characters 0 to 9 Ato Z a to 2 e Target Hardware Category Select the applicable hardware Downlink e DIUC The Downlink Interval Usage Code indicates the downlink burst profile in the DCD message and is used along with Index to identify an entry in the DCD Burst Profile Table e In Use Tick to make modulation type available on this profile 320 BS TRx Profiles e FEC Code Type This sets the modulation type for the DIUC and should be set for each DIUC When the FEC type field is clicked a dropdown menu allows the correct modulation to be selected Th
103. 0 000000000000 000000000000 O 0000000000 Uccsed B J r o e Packet Classifier Destination IP 195 217 232 30 Appendix 439 Netspan Release 6 5 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Prey Action Forward x L3 Rules TOS Low Limit TOS High Limit IP Address Type Source IP Addr Source P Addr Mask Destination IP Adde Destination IP Addr Mask Source Pon Start Source Pod End Destinabon Port Start Destination Port End Proy 01 Ade Fees L3 Rules TOS Low Limit TOS High Limit TOS Mask r IP Protocol Number IP Address Type Source IP Addr Source IP Addi Mask Destination Addr Destination IP Addr Mask Name Destination 195 217 232 30 195 217 232 30 255 255 26 255 TE 0 0 0 pooo 195 247 232 34 255 255 255 255 oo Packet Classifier Destination 195 217 232 32 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Destination 195 217 232 32 oe Source Port Start Source Port End Destination Port Start Destmation Port End Source MAC Address Source MAC Address Mask Destination MAC Address Destination MAC Address Mask Layor 3 Protocol Type Layer 3 Protocol ID VLAN ID VLAN User Pnonty Low Lima VLAN User Pnonty High Limit po 00 06 00 06 00 Ezhenypo SNaP Multiple Uplink Service Flows Best Effort Both P2 Service Classifiers Service Class Product
104. 0 Last Updated From Equipment a Last Loaded From Database amp 14 2000 Close Reload Configure Software Download e Hardware Category Image Types Product Name e Use Specific Configuration Current Specification for this BSDU e Use Product Global Configuration Specification for all products See Products e Allow Edit To enter new values for a specific configuration click Allow Edit box This opens a new values script e Request Enter new action for Software e If setto idle the software will not be downloaded until the request is set e If download then the download attempts to download the specified version to the standby bank if the specified version does not exist in either the standby or primary banks software is downloaded into the Standby bank based on the image set defined in the Selected profile e If activate then the NMS attempts to activate the specified version provided it exists in either the standby or primary banks If in the standby bank and not the primary bank it will first swap it into the primary bank before activating The BSDU is set to run with this image set defined in the selected profile The BSDU will be rebooted and then the requested s w will run on the BSDU That is in the standby bank of the image defined in the profile is activated e Download and activate will perform both the steps of download and activate as outlined above e Image File Suite Image File Suite used See Imag
105. 0 40 0 0 3 0 E hos 55 Authorzebon F ature ES 07 0 0 0 30 8 amp Edit fne Reese _Reloed ExpotView o Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type Not Acknowledged Raised in Last 5 Minutes Raised in Last Day Raised in Last Hour d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited EJ Lists all criteria see Creating Filters o Alarm Status increasing severity Normal Alarm has cleared D warning 181 Netspan Release 6 5 182 A minor major critical indeterminate o Alarm ID Alarm ID o Alarm Type See Fault Management Alarms o Source SS MAC Address o Alarm Information For alarm messages see Fault Management Alarms o Ack This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged o User Name of user acknowledging the alarm o Last Acknowledged Time when alarm was last acknowledged by a user o Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised o Last Raise Event Time when alarm was la
106. 00 Iv Create First Channel Name Description Region Auto Discovery Region Site Auto Discovery Site F Managed Ok Cancel Valitse Reload Management Page A tabbed management page groups together attributes for managing BS TRxs Channels and Subscriber Stations Single Station Management Page If a single station is selected from a BS TRxs Channels or Subscriber Station list and the Manage button clicked the station management screen shows a mini tree view at the tops showing where the station sits in the network hierarchy The mini tree can be used for easy navigation between tree nodes management Location Tree View At the top of each management page is tree view showing where the managed item sits in the hierarchy of the network For information on using the tree see the section Topology Tree The tabbed views show information on the single station that has been selected BS TRx shown BS TRx Management 4 Location Auto Discovery Region tj Auto Discovery Site Lat 0 000000 Lone 0 000000 E 500 1951004004 100558 Hardware General Properties First Channel BSID Name SOC 196 Description Region Site Multiple Station Management page If a multiple stations are selected from a BS TRx Channel or Subscriber Station list and the Manage button clicked the station management screen shows all the stations that have been selected
107. 0000000 Destination MAC Address Mask 000000000000 Layer 3 Protocol ID Type Uccses 3 Layer 3 Protocol ID Packet Classifier Destination 195 217 232 30 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile 100 f Action Forward x L3 Rules TOS Low Lir TOS High Limit TOS Mask M JIr 600 fas 21723230 1255 055255255255 255 255 sss 1 r Packet Classifier Destination 195 217 232 32 442 Appendix Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Naene Destination 195 217 232 32 Promty 101 Action Forward x L3 Rules TOS Low Limit TOS High Limit l o TOS Mask P Protocol Number p 5 IP Address Type Source IP Addr k Source iP Addr Mask Destination Addr 195 217 232 34 Destination IP Adde Mask 255 255 255 255 Source Port Start D Source Port End Destination Port Stat D Destination Port End Packet Classifier ARP Source MAC Address po 03 00 00 QC Source MAC Address Mask poya Destination MAC Address poo Destination MAC Address Mask 0 0002 0000 Layer 3 Protocol Type Ezhenypo SnaP Layer 3 Protocol ID VLAN ID r User Priority Low Lima D VLAN User Pronty High Limit C Uncheck all L2 and L3 rules except Layer3 protocol ID Type Multiple Uplink Downlink Service Flows Best Effort Service Service Class Classifiers Product Priority Priority Pass All 7 Destinatio
108. 01 195 217 232 32 Typically this would be used for VOIP calls to Destination 195 217 232 32 U L Best 2 Pass All Effort 600K Service Product Exage Multiple SF Best Efect and aPS i Sample of Packet Classer P best Cort MIR bakbort EMert 2 ActvePocket 862 9 Ethernet Senate Gortan s 2 PP APE minor 195 217 252 10100 27 Bast Effort MIR 200i Pevanation 196 237 292 28300 Service Class P7 Best Effort MIR 200k Edit Service Class Name P7 Best Eft Schedving Type Trafic Priority Request ransens sion Max Sustained Rate Max Traffic Burst Min Resereed Rate Min Tolerable Rate Toleratod Jitter Max Latency SOU Length indicator SDU Size i Scheduling Period custom Service Class 7 rtPS MIR 200k 446 Packet Classifier Pass All Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Pass Ad Pnomy 1 Acton Forward E 000000000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000000000 Uccsed z Packet Classifier Destination IP 195 217 232 32 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Destination 195 217 232 32 00 Acton Forward L3 Rules Packet Classifier Destination 195 217 232 28 Appendix 447 Netspan Release 6 5 Edit Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Destination 195 217 232 28 100 TOS
109. 1070 The Port VLAN ID matches a VLAN membership entry defined on this BS TRx E01071 The Port VLAN ID matches a VLAN membership entry defined in this SS VLAN Port profile E01072 One of the SS Port VLAN Profile Membership entries matches one of the Reserved VLANs specified in the Server Global Configuration E01073 One of the SS Port VLAN Profile Membership entries matches the Management VLAN specified in the Server Global Configuration E01074 One of the VLAN Membership entries matches one of the Reserved VLANs configured on a BS TRx E01075 One of the Membership entries matches one of the Management VLANs configured on a BS TRx E01076 Insufficient object info E01077 Unable to create children E01078 A problem occurred in parsing the database transaction E01079 A problem occurred committing the database transaction or in the post commit processing E01080 Unable to queue a configuration change request for the equipment in the database E01081 Object must be loaded from Database to initialise its properties before updating E01082 This service is not available E01083 A problem occurred whilst trying to update information on the equipment E01084 A problem occurred building the Snmp Request equipment in the database 427 Netspan Release 6 5 E01090 Use existing VLAN id E01091 Incorrect xml format for SsPortVLAN E01092 One of the SS Port VLAN Profile Membership entries matches the Port VLAN specified in the Serv
110. 169 0 5 16 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 17 0 00 03 51 833 Informational 50331712 System restart via WEB 18 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 19 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 20 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 21 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 148 Configuration Management The fields of the Detailed Log table are described in the table below Trap identification number Time in Days Hours Minutes Seconds and Milliseconds since power up when the particular event was generated Severity Severity level of trap o Informational o Warning o Fatal Code Unique event code Brief description of trap or event Bis Click Back to return to the Advanced page 149 Netspan Release 6 5 Display Connections The Connection list page allows you to display information about your current connections To access the Connections List 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page select Connections List and click Select The Connections list page appears as shown below WiMAX Modem Management Addresses Advanced System Signal Parameters Log Connections List Direction Bidirectional 00000000 00000000 Initial Ranging DOOOFFFF 00000000 Broadcast OOOOFFFD 00000000 Fragmentable Broadc
111. 4093 Add Subscriber Station VLAN Port Profile Name Descnption Port VLAN Configuration Port Mode VLAN E Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Acceptable Frame Types Tagged and Untagged X Tagging Behaviour flagged i Port VLAN ID VLAN 104093 defaut Port Vian 10 Ingress Filtering 4 Default C Tag Priority Port VLAN Lists Member Set VLAN 104090 default reserved 1 1024090 VLAN 102 MU 1D72 VLAN 104091 default reserved2 D 74091 E VAN 04092 default reserved3 10 4082 VLAN 104093 default Port Vian ID 074093 VLAN 104094 default mgmt 1074094 d Port Mode VLAN Frame Types Tagged and Untagged PVID not supported untagged Provisioning error when this SS registers on MicroMAX BS 316 Service Profiles This configuration is for backwards compatibility with MacroMAX HiperMAX micro and HiperMAX Version SR5 or older Add Subscriber Station VLAN Port Profile Name Descnption 1 Port VLAN Configuration Port Mode VLAN gt Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Acceptable Frame Types Tagged and Untagged Tagging Behaviour Faga id Port VLAN ID ViANuntagged Ingress Filtering Enabled E Tag Prowty Port VLAN Lists Member Set Excluded Set VLAN ID1S 1 VLAN 104090 default reserved ID 4090 VLAN 102 2 VLAN 104091 default reserved2 1074091 ES VAN 104082 default 00 4092 VLAN 104093 default Port Vian ID D
112. 4093 VLAN 104094 default mgmt ID 4094 e Port Mode VLAN Frame Types Untagged Only PVID 1 lt PVID lt 4094 e g PVID 4093 Add Subscriber Station VLAN Port Profile Name Description L Port VLAN Configuration Port Mode VLAN Acceptable Frame Types Untagged Only x Tagging Behaviour Port VLAN ID 104090 default 1 Ingress Filtering Enabled 5 Default C Tag Proty f Port Mode VLAN Frame Type Untagged Only not supported untagged Provisioning error when this SS registers on MicroMAX BS This configuration is for backwards compatibility with MacroMAX HiperMAX micro and HiperMAX Version SR5 or older Add Subscriber Station VLAN Port Profile Name Description Port VLAN Configuration Port Mode VLAN z Acceptable Frame Types Untagged Only x Port VLAN ID untagged E Ingress Filtenng Enabied z Default C Tag Priority 1 317 Netspan Release 6 5 Port VLAN Q in Q Provider VLAN Q in Q Tag Port VLAN f Use C Tag Pronty For S Tag Yes X S Tag Priority Gas Field Descriptions Port VLAN Configuration Add Subscriber Station VLAN Port Profile o Name User defined o Description User defined Port VLAN Configuration o Port Mode Set either Raw or VLAN o Acceptable Frame Types See VLAN Options below o Port VLAN ID VLAN ID used for tagging of untagged frames when Acc
113. 461 Netspan Release 6 5 462 o SSVLANPortProfileVLANsAdd Adds an existing VLAN to an existing SS VLAN Port Profile in NMS If either the VLAN or the SS VLAN Port Profile name is not found an error is returned o SSVLANPortProfileVLANsClear Cleares all VLANs from an existing SS VLAN Port Profile in the NMS Return an error if SS VLAN Port Profile name is not found o SSVLANPortProfileVLANsList Produces a list of names of VLANs in an existing SS VLAN Port Profile in the NMS Returns null if no VLANs are found o SSVLANPortProfileVLANsRemove Removes an existing VLAN from an existing SS VLAN Port Profile in the NMS If either the VLAN or the SS VLAN Port Profile name is not found an error is returned o SSVlanPortProfileCreate Creates a new SSVlanPortProfile in NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the SS VLAN Port Profile name does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise an error is returned o SSVIlanPortProfileDelete Deletes an existing SS VLAN Port Profile in the NMS Return an error if SS VLAN Port Profile name is not found o SSVIlanPortProfileGet Gets the configuration parameters as defined in 802 16f for the specified SS VLAN Port Profile name that exist in NMS Return an error if the SS VLAN Port Profile name does not already exist o SSVlanPortProfileList Produces a list of names of SS VLAN Port Profiles configured
114. 5 ABS 2021112233 445555 1 VY AChannet 202 1 12233 445566 APAGLAB 350000 390000 WV A Channet 380000 380000 260000 320000 E Bl Shelf Not Implernented Nat Implemented W Channel 010000 0310521c 10000 03106 test BSDU t main site Lat 0 000000 Long 0 000000 E d SyslabiLat 51 320000 Long 0 29000 amp ABS 193 000000 006063 931000 100 0060931 emmm The Tree view represents the discovered BS TRx system The view can be expanded to reveal further down the hierarchy by clicking the E or collapsed by clicking the El icon Clicking on any item in the tree takes the user to the management page for that item Symbol Representation Topology Region HiperMAX BS TRx Blade HiperMAX micro BS TRx MicroMAX 3 pepe pue p L MEN MacroMAX BS TRx Unknown BS TRx Channel E ZG 288 Topology Alarms NEN cleared a wm _ a fe a w _ amp m Em Indeterminate D 1 Tree collapsed Clicking the icon expands the tree Tree expanded Clicking the icon collapses the tree Search The Tree may be searched by typing a search string in the box and clicking the search button 289 Service Profiles Creating Service Profiles When creating an SS properties of that SS are assigned through o Service Products A service product consists of one or more service profiles o Custom Configuration This defines the subscriber statio
115. 6 151 Pon ser Version Read Community public Write Community private SERERE Timeout 5000 Description o Description 1 5 User defined Service o Service Product Select from those available on drop list See Service Products o Custom Config Profile Select from those available on drop list o Port VLAN Profile Select from those available on drop list o Service Enabled Select from those available on drop list o Service Allowed Channel Use to select the service channel for this SS Any set for nomadic use Registration Allowed Channels It is possible to restrict the BS TRx Channels on which an SS may register The list of allowed channels for registration is specified by applying a Channel BSID Mask to a Channel BSID The list of matching BS TRx Channels is displayed as Selected Channels Care must be taken when restricting the BS TRx Channels on which an SS may register If the SS is not within range of any of the allowed BS TRx Channels it will result in the SS becoming uncontactable and a site visit may be required to restore service to the SS o Allowed channels configuration Select yes to configure o Restrict allowed channels Check box to open restriction selection 106 Configuration Management Channel BSID Channel BSID Channel BSID Mask See Add Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning Selected Channels List of channels that are available to the SS after the mask is applies selected S
116. 7 BS TRx 313238 303037 Port 8 connected 10 MicroMAX 8 Bs TRx 313238 303038 SNMP Properties Allow edit iv IP Address 10 10 35 78 Pon 161 Version SNMPY2c Read Community Public Write Community Private Timeout General Properties o Name User defined o MAC Address MAC address o Region Select required region To add a new region see Add New Region O Site Select required site To add a new site see Add New Site o Managed Tick click to enable Port Assignments Allows user to assign a MicroMAX BS TRx per BSDU Port as physically connected SNMP Properties o Allow edit Check this box to enable access to all other boxes in this section o IP Address IP address of SNMP port o Port SMNP port number o SNMP Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o SNMP Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o SNMP Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o Timeout The number of milliseconds that the NMS waits for a response 273 Netspan Release 6 5 e Actions e Action Buttons 274 Configuration Management Manage BSDU BSDU Management BSDU Management Location Auto Discovery Region t Auto Discovery Site Lat 0 000000 Long 0 000000 2 u BDSU Hardware not defined Provisioning IP Address Connection State Comms failure Last Changed At Provisioning
117. 78 e BS TRx Mask FF FF FF FF FF o Example for defining an SS to work with a single Operator BS radios The operator may want to define the units EasyST ProST to work only with BS radios that belong to the specific operator but would not like to define to which specific BS radio to connect to To enable this the following must be performed e verify that the BS TRx radios have BS TRx IDs with the correct operator ID e utilize the Web based management for EasyST ProST in order to define e The BS TRx ID e Mask of FF FF FF 00 00 00 Explanation As defined by iEEE802 16 the BS TRx Id is a 48 bit long programmable user definedO field identifying the BS TRx The most significant 24 bits are used as the operator ID e F hex 111 binary e 0 hex 0000 binary To define the base station 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page select Base Station ID Settings and click Select The Base Station ID Settings page appears as shown below 142 Configuration Management WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Base Station ID Settings Base Station ID foo o Base Station Mask foo po foo foo Submit Back 3 In the Base Station ID field enter the identification number of the base station to which the unit must communicate 4 In the Base Station Mask field enter the mask to identify whi
118. AX interconnection stack PMP Point to multipoint radio systems architecture PPPoE Point to point protocol over Ethernet Q QoS Quality of service which is used to specify level of data throughput R REC Radio equipment controller RTP Real time polling allows a service flow to request uplink bandwidth at regular intervals Rx Receiver S SDMA Space division multiple access is a technique which makes it possible to increase the capacity of a cellular mobile radio system by taking advantage of spatial separation between users SDR Software defined radio SF Service flow Definition Unidirectional flow of MAC SDUs SFID SF Identifier Definition Unique 32 bit unsigned integer SME Small to medium sized enterprise SNMP Simple network management protocol 470 Glossary SNR Signal to noise SOFDMA Scalable orthogonal frequency division multiplexing SoHo Small office home office SS Subscriber Station interchangeable with CPE or ST Definition Generic name of subscriber logical entity as defined in the 802 16 2004 standard ST Subscriber terminal interchangeable with CPE or SS Definition Alternative generic name of subscriber logical entity STC Space time coding T T1 North American standard 1 56Mb s pulse code modulated transmission link TDD Time division duplex TDM Time division multiplexing Tx Transmitter U UCD Uplink channel descriptor UGS Unsolicited grant service used to provide
119. DF Netspan_Log LDF are both ticked Click OK to Re attach If attaching database to a different new Netspan server 422 When the database is to be attached to Netspan running on a different machine then the target machine needs to run the same Operating System and Netspan versions as the donor machine Furthermore the database would need to be attached using the Database import feature of the NMS Server Manager tool See NMS Server Manager Appendix Netspan Error Messages E00014 Database unknown error Possible exception ask administrator to check event log E00015 Invalid mac address E00016 An entry with this mac address already exists E00017 Get next SFID failed when creating SS service flows E00018 Get next classifier index failed when creating SS service flows 423 Netspan Release 6 5 E00035 Invalid Table Name E00041 Unable to delete the BS TRx as one of its Channel has been specified as the Home Channel for at least one SS E00042 Unable to delete the BS TRx as it has recently been registered with by at least one SS E00043 Unable to delete the BS TRx as it still marked as being managed by this NMS Please mark this BS TRx as Unmanaged first E00044 One of the ranges defined for SFID generation has been exhausted E00045 Update of the Mac Address is not permitted E00046 In use and cannot be updated E00047 Unable to set the BS TRx to Unmanaged as one of its Channels is being used as the H
120. E l Excluded Set 90 148 0 90 AndyL Mac FF testing 1D 234 Default As Max 101 SU ID 1 Default As Max 102 MU 10 2 Default As Max ID3 MU 0 3 Malcolm 0 4 VLAN 20 10 20 VLAN 200 ID 200 b Bridge Mode VLAN Port Mode VLAN Frame Types Untagged Only PVID untagged Allow Edit e Bn ge Mode vaN a Management On Traffic Port Fm of Management On VLAN Enabied x Management VLAN ID mami sf Port Mode Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Acceptable Frame Types Untagged Ony Tayging Behaviour Port VLAN ID Default As Max untagged sy Ingress Filtering ps3 Priorty lt a Actions See Action Buttons 194 Multi Edit BS TRx Provisioning Configuration Management Using this feature it is possible to provision properties for more than one BS TRx To enter this page select more than one BS TRx on the BS TRx list and click edit Multi Edit BS TRx Provisioning 2 BS TRxs In Selection ee BS TRx 0001AA Q0AF3C TAA OQAFSC BS TRx 00A00A 100568 00A 100566 TotaiDatabase Rems2 Total Loaded General Properties Managed Yes bd a Description m Region Auto Discovery Region Site Auto Discovery Site Ie Network Profile NIP Pro le EE OAAA SNMP Properties ee Pon 8013 E SNMP Version Versson
121. Failure to do this may result in changes not being written into the database All work areas are accessed using the Left Side Menu Selections from the menu usually open a list of items related to the menu selection New items can be added and existing items can be edited cloned or managed using option buttons at the bottom of the window This will open a new work area to view enter information on a selected list item When the changes are made the action buttons manage those changes 67 Netspan Release 6 5 Fault Management Version D Edit Packet Classifier Rule Profile Selected Work Number Airspan Name Destination 192 85 4 3 Area DET Priority 120 Tw Action Forward x OpeniClose DES Menu u w TOS Low Limit Service 106 Hoh Umt Ir Make Editable uox Service Product TOS Mask Navigation esce rere e jr Menu onfiguraton IP Address Type Pvt z N Edit bl 8 Custom Configuraton Bounce P Ade m e SS VLAN Port t r i Hyperlink 8S Tie Pis Source IP Addr Mask pooo 3 191058 rey to further Destination IP Addr 19285 43 info Destination IP Addr Mask 55 255 255 Editable Fields Source Port Start E Wh ite Performance Management Source Port End Z Server Destination Port Start SS Ir sus Destination Port End za J Open Close Action Buttons _ Sub Sections LL Yi Lage 8 x E t
122. Gain Chan A Custom arbitrary units Rx Gain Chan B Custom arbitrary units Allow Edit Arbitrary Units Last Updated 230772007 154335 LN Downlink Channel o TX Diversity Custom Used when using two TX antenna Option to select STC1 or STC2 as defined in 8 3 5 1 of 802 16E 005 o Licensed Band Select Band Licensed Unlicensed 240 Configuration Management o Frequency If licensed a frequency is required o Channel Number If unlicensed a channel number is required o EIRP Effective isotropic radiated power o Transmitter State Custom Enabled Disabled o Transmitter Power Custom Allows TX power at the output of the shelf to be set Uplink Channel Note Not all the items may appear on the screen as the items displayed are only those supported by the BS TRx product o Diversity Custom MRC option used when using two TX antenna o Frequency Uplink Channel Frequency o Initial Ranging Max EIRxP Defined in 802 16 2004 6 3 9 5 1 Usage of this parameter is ambiguous in the standard it is recommended this value be set to Rx Level Set Point minus BS TRx antenna gain where BS TRx antenna gain is reduced to account for antenna feeder loss o Rx Level Set Point Custom This is the level in dBm that with uplink power control fully converged a full bandwidth uplink transmission should be received at the BS TRx antenna port o Periodic Ranging Set Point Spread Custom This is the spread in dB around the
123. ILITY SS negotiates with the BS TRx regarding the basic capabilities that will be used on the link between them such as supported modulations and coding schemes NETWORK ENTRY AUTHORIZATION SS and BS TRx perform authentication and authorization using X 509 digital certificate transferred to the BS by the SS NETWORK ENTRY REGISTRATION SS and BS TRx negotiate capabilities concerning mainly management options for the SS e OPERATIONAL SS has completed network entry and is capable of transferring data BS Identifier BS TRx ID number that the SS is presently connected to Downlink Frequency used for downlink transmission in MHz Frequency Channel Bandwidth Received Received signal strength at EasyST ProST in dBm Signal e IP CONNECTIVITY SS obtains IP address through DHCP Downlink Downlink frequency bandwidth in MHz SNR Signal to noise ratio in dB Strength Modulation Modulation scheme available to the SS e g 16 QAM 1 2 Uplink Frequency used for uplink transmission in MHz Frequency 125 Netspan Release 6 5 Uplink Uplink frequency bandwidth in MHz Channel Bandwidth Transmit power of EasyST ProST in dBm Modulation Reports on which modulation of the last data stream 126 Configuration Management Viewing Addresses The Addresses menu opens the Addresses page see figure below displaying various IP addresses as well as MAC addresses learned listed in the MAC Table WiMAX
124. ITH ADVANCED SERVICES These license terns are an agreexent between Microsoft Corporation or based on where you live one of its affiliates and you Please read then apply to the software naned above which includes the nedia on which you received it if any The terns also apply to any Microsoft updates supplenents Internet based services and SOF Microsoft SOL Server 2 2005 Setup 7 LEESON Installing Prerequisites Installs softwere components required prior to instalimg SQL Server tu Server Component Update wil instal the folowing components equited for SQL Server Setup Microsoft SCC Native Clent Microsoft SCC Server 2005 Setup Support Fles Instal to continue Click Install 37 Netspan Release 6 5 Microsoft SOL Server 2005 Setup Inatalis software componerts required prior to installing SOL Click Next osott SOL Server 2005 Setup 38 o Microsoft SOL Server 2005 Setup Welcome to the Microsoft SQL Server Installation Wizard Click Next System Configuration Check Wat whie the system checked for potential installation Delai Installation Path Permission Explorer Requremert COM Plus Catalog Requirement ASP Net Version Registialion Require Mirimum MDAC Version Requirement Edition Change Check Click Next Installation 39 Netspan Release 6 5 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Set
125. Image s EasyST Application Current Ter Configuration a cr on Current Profile not defined not detined Specific Configuration Hardware Category Global Configuration Request Download z Idie Image File Suite not set Schedule ie Time Start 11 14 Time End 11 14 Time Span 000 hours minutes Date Start 0706 2007 Date End 07082007 Date Span _ days F Allow Edt Apply Current Software 518105 Hardware Use Upgrade Category Calagory Contig Mec Address Latest Request NMS State 10 035 143 boon _ 10035142 dan Last Loaded From Database 11 16 45 This screen is used when downloading software to a selected number of SSs Once the SS have been selected see Multiple Subscriber Station Management the process is the same as for downloading to a single SS see Software The current software status shows the progress of the downloads If subscribers of different hardware category and images are selected the Hardware Category Image s drop down list will show the types selected When applying config it must be borne in mind that each item in the drop down must be selected and config applied in order for ALL the selected items to be configured The current configuration list shows only the items applicable to the current selection in the drop down list The Current Software Status list shows ALL the items that were selected
126. Low Limit TOS High Limit b 117 TOS Mask p IP Protocol Number n Jin IP Address P z Source IP Addr j 0 Source IP Addr Mask TER Destination IP Addr 195 217 232 28 Destination IP Addr Mask 255 265 255 255 Source Port Start Source Port End Z 635 Destination Port Start Destmation Port End f Multiple Uplink Downlink Service Flows Best Effort amp UGS Service Service Class Classifiers Product Priority Priority 7 Destination 195 217 232 30 Service Product 448 QN Service Class P2 Best Effort MIR 600k Edit Service Class Name 22 Best Efon MIR 600k n Service Class P7 UGS MIR 200k Appendix 449 Netspan Release 6 5 Packet Classifier Pass All Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Pass AR ft Action Forward E L2 Rules Packet Classifier Destination IP 195 217 232 30 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name ion 195 217 232 30 Ponty 100 Action Forward x L3 Rules TOS Low Lima TOS High Limit TOS Mask 295 217 232 30 2 55 255 255 255 Packet Classifier Destination 195 217 232 28 450 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Oestmation 195 217 232 26 Prionty 100 3 Acton Forward L3 Rules TOS Low TOS High Limit TOS Mask IP Protocol Number 99 Address Source P Addr Source P Addr Mask Destination IP A
127. Mary No Filter By Region Name d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e Ed Lists all criteria see Filters e Search Check box to open a search box Enter search string into box and key return e MAC Address MAC address e Name User defined e IP Address IP address of BSDU e Management Mode Box checked if managed e Connection State Current connection state of the BSDU e Discovered Node discovered site allocated to the BSDU e Db Cache Changed At Time stamp of when database Cache was written to database e Site Name Site where BSDU is located e Region Name Region where BSDU is located e Hardware Type Hardware Type e Provisioning State Current Provision state of the BSDU 271 Netspan Release 6 5 Actions See Action Buttons 272 Configuration Management Add Edit BSDU Add BSDU General Properties Name Address LDOAOBDODADOB Region Auto Discovery Region 4 Site Auto Discuery H Managed Port Assignments Port 1 connected to MicroMAX 1 BSTRx31x8e6 35 Port 2 connected to MicroMAX 2 BsTm 313 208 320909 x Port 3 connected to MicroMAX 3 85 10236003 e Port 4 connected to MicroMAX 4 85 312380909 x Port 5 connected to MicroMAX 5 85 31038 X 335059 sg 6 connected to MicroMAX 5 85 TRx 313238 303036 z Port 7 connected to MicroMAX
128. MicroMAX platform only e New event trap reporting DFS changes and failures New associated alarm see full list of new events at the end of this document DFS feature is not available on all MicroMAX BS TRx Only BS TRx with DFS feature supported and enabled will process the configuration done with Unlicensed Channel Profile Other BS TRxs will ignore the sets o Custom Configuration Profile New BS TRx Custom Configuration Profile properties for MicroMAX platform e Midamble Repetition Interval e New bandwidth 2 75 MHz e Bridge Ageing Time o Ofdm Channel Profile Existing BS TRx Ofdm Channel Profile properties with extended support in MicroMAX e Frame durations e Cyclic Prefix o Service Class Existing Service Class properties with extended support in MicroMAX e Scheduling Type rtPC UGS o VoiceMAX Support for VoiceMAX in MicroMAX via BS TRx VoIP QoS Profile Support for MacroMAX HiperMAX and HiperMAX micro MacroMAX HiperMAX and HiperMAX micro support for new features as described in other sections Statistics o VLAN support changes SS management support SS new features o Changes to SS Custom Configuration Profile e New downlink adaptive modulation configuration averaging factors SNR margins e New limit to maximum number of network hosts o New event trap indicating the change of any of identification parameters addresses versions as described above o Itis possible to restrict the list of BS TRx Cha
129. Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Addresses DHCP Server IP Address MAC Table Index MAC Address Status 00 40 04 20 08 30 Learned 002 00 0C F1 16 18 4D 00 19 D1 59 81 6A 127 Netspan Release 6 5 The parameters of the Addresses table are described in the table below MAC Address 1 Ethernet media access control MAC address of the device i e EasyST ProST MAC Address 2 Ethernet media access control MAC address of the 2nd device for future release LAN Port Default IP IP address of device s LAN port default value is 10 0 0 1 Address Default Subnet Default subnet mask address Mask IP Address via Device s IP address assigned by Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP DHCP when set to DHCP see IP Mode Settings IP Mask via DHCP Subnet mask address assigned by DHCP when set to DHCP see IP Mode Settings Default GW via Default gateway address assigned by DHCP when set to DHCP see IP DHCP Mode Settings DHCP Server IP IP address of DHCP server when set to DHCP see IP Mode Settings Address IP Address static Device s IP address set manually see IP Mode Settings IP Mask static Subnet mask address see IP Mode Settings Default GW static Default gateway address see IP Mode Settings DHCP Server IP N A in Static mode Address The fields of the MAC Table are described in the table below Index place identifier MAC Ethernet media
130. Multiple shelves claim same Shelf ID or BS TRxs do not report Shelf IDs properly Indicates that the BS TRx is shut down and out of service Indicates that the BS TRx has cards that are close to over heating Check the connections with the GPS module If this condition persists check the GPS module The BS TRx may cease to transmit when in this state When the interference is detected it may prevent reliable operation of the BS TRx If this occurs continuously investigation to locate the source of the interferer is required If this condition persists check the OBSAI cables between the SDR and SCRT If this condition persists check the OBSAI cables between the SDR and SCRT See the alarm information for details of the fault See the alarm information for details of the fault BS TRx Lost GPS The BS TRx has lost GPS Check the connections with Synchronisation synchronisation the GPS module DFS Failure Radar detected or unable to transmit for other reason Raised by DFS system when algorithm cannot find suitable channel to transmit for various reasons BSDU BS TRx Port Connection The BSDU cannot detect BS Check the connections with Fault TRx connection on port the BS TRx BSDU BS TRx Port Power The BSDU cannot detect Check the power Failure power on port Actions See Action Buttons for other buttons 380 Fault Management 381 Netspan Release 6 5 Alarm details The alarm details are reached
131. NMP Properties If Allow Edit is checked then the fields can be edited when the Edit button is clicked Users should not change the values o IP Address IP address of Ethernet connection o Port Ethernet port number o Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public o Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public o Timeout Specifies the timeout value for any requests sent to the agent by the manager Actions See Action Buttons 107 Netspan Release 6 5 Subscriber Station Management State Auto Discovery 802 16 Integrated Wi Fi Access Point Integrated Easy Voice Access Point IP Address 10 0 35 80 IP Address 255 255 255 255 IP Address 255 255 255 255 Node Discovered Mac Address not available Mac Address not available Registered F Provisioning Number of Channels on which this SS ts misconfigured Statistics Bs TRE P New mI Awang nos Ag Changes 5 nprogess Queued Response DOAO0A00568 10025196 OOADQA 100542 10025197 Channel 850 Fated Total Database tems 2 Total Loeded bems 2 Auto Discovery 802 16 o Node Discovered Checked for Discovered SS o Registered Checked for Registered SS o IP Address IP address of SS Integrated Wi Fi Access Point o IP Address IP address of access point o MAC Address MAC address of access point Integrated EasyVoice Access Point o IP
132. P Servers NTP Server 11 Address 0 0 0 0 NIP Sener 21 Address 0 0 0 0 NTP Server 31 Address 0 0 0 0 NTP Server 4 IP Address 0000 Add Edit IP Network Profile o Name User Defined NTP Servers o NTP Server 1 IP Address IP Address of server 1 o NTP Server 2 IP Address IP Address of server 2 o NTP Server 3 IP Address IP Address of server 3 o NTP Server4 IP Address IP Address of server 4 Actions See Action Buttons 415 Reports Reports are displayed in the bottom left corner of the Netspan page The role of the report is to provide overall counts of static and dynamic entities managed by Netspan Note Some reports display the row titles as html links that target the corresponding web page Press R button to refresh the data There is NO auto refresh facility Information is collected in the background every 20 seconds Use the gt to cycle through the reports Network Report Network 12 09 43 R Services 8 8 Alarms 0 0 BS TRxs 41 41 Channels 123 123 SSs 2210 2210 BSDUs 1 0 Total Number of Running Non Running Services Services Services Total Number of Cleared Alarms Non cleared Alarms Services BS TRxs Total Number of BS On Line BS Off Line BS TRxs TRxs TRxs o0o0o000 Total Number of Present Absent Channels Channels Channels Total Number of SSs Registered SSs Unregistered SSs Total Number of BSDUs Off Line Alarms Report Alarms 12 10 42 Critical 0 0 0 M
133. Priority Priority 440 Appendix Effort 600k Best Effort 200K Destination IP 195 217 232 30 Best 2 Destination 101 Effort 195 217 232 32 600K Note The ARP Classifier needs to be set so that ARP packets can pass over the uplink In this traffic uplink packets will only pass to IP 195 217 232 30 and Destination 195 217 232 32 Service Product Working Example 7 Desbnabso 195 237 297 92203 LN i ONE uum 2 Effort VIR 200 Best Effort Service Class P2 Best Effort MIR 600k Edit Service Class Name P2 Best Effort MIR 600k Scheduling Type Traffic Prority Request ransmission Policy Max Sustained Rate Max Traffic Burst Min Reserved Rate Min Tolerable Rate Tolerated Jitter Max Latency SDU Length Indicator SDU Size B Bytes Scheduling Poll Period custom 00 ms Service Class P2 Best Effort MIR 200k 441 Netspan Release 6 5 Edit Service Ciass Name 22 Best Effort MIR 200k Scheduling Type Traffic Priority RequestAransmission Policy Max Sustained Rate Max Traffic Burst Min Reserved Rate Min Tolerable Rate Tolerated Jater Max Latency SOU Length indicator SOU Size Scheduling Poll Period custom Packet Classifier Pass All Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Passan Pnomy 1 Action Forward X 100 00 00 00 00 00 Source Address Mask 000000000000 Destination MAC Address 00000
134. Properties Name Shelf AUTO 00 50 C2 4A 1C 04 MAC Address 00 50 2441004 Shelf ID AuTOO0SDC24A1CO04 O Region Auto Discovery Region a Site Auto Discovery Site r Managed SNMP Properties Allow edit Address Port 161 Version SNMPY2c Read Community public Write Community public Timeout Shelf Properties o Name User Defined o MAC Address MAC address of shelf manager o Shelf ID Shelf ID o Region Select required region To add a new region see Add New Region O Site Select required site To add a new site see Add New Site o Managed Check this box to set to managed A Shelf cannot be deleted unless this box is un checked SNMP Properties o Allow edit Check this box to enable access to all other boxes in this section o IP Address IP address of Ethernet connection o Port Ethernet port number o Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o Timeout The number of milliseconds that the manager waits for a response Actions See Action Buttons 265 Netspan Release 6 5 Slots This page displays a HiperMAX ATCA shelf opened from the shelf list 14 Slot Shelf Set Boaru 2 Board IP Geoard Type Board Name Present
135. Raised in Last Hour d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited EJ Lists all criteria see Creating Filters o Alarm Status increasing severity Normal Alarm has cleared D warning 115 Netspan Release 6 5 116 A minor major critical A indeterminate o Alarm ID Alarm ID o Alarm Type See Fault Management Alarms o Source SS MAC Address o Alarm Information For alarm messages see Fault Management Alarms o Ack This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged o User Name of user acknowledging the alarm o Last Acknowledged Time when alarm was last acknowledged by a user o Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised o Last Raise Event Time when alarm was last raised Edit This gives additional alarm details including a history of that particular alarm See Alarm Details Acknowledge Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Release Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Release of an alarm i
136. Rx level set point in which a received uplink signal is considered converged from the point of view of uplink power control No uplink power control operations will be performed while an SS uplink signal falls within this spread Note that the spread applies equally around the set point so for example a 2dB spread corresponds to upper and lower limits of Rx level set point 2dB o Initial Ranging Set Point Spread Custom This parameter relates to the polled phase of initial ranging the purpose of which is to adjust the SS transmitter power and timing This parameter is the spread in dB around the Rx level set point in which a received uplink RNG REQ signal will successfully terminate the polled phase of initial ranging The other event that will successfully terminate the polled initial ranging phase are reception of a RNG REQ with TLV Ranging Anamolies set to SS already at max power Due to the potentially large amount of time it might take in a dynamic channel for a received SS signal to converge within this spread it is recommended that this spread be made of the order 10dB Note that the spread applies equally around the set point so for example a 5dB spread corresponds to upper and lower limits of Rx level set point 5dB o Rx Gain RF Custom This level is reported by the BS TRx and is not configurable MicroMAX Duplex Mode Indication custom FDD Downlink Channel N Frequency n kHz Tx Power custom 0 25 dBm Supported R
137. S TRx Management Actions Actions Action Request Clear trap destinations Add trap destinations Action Queue Source Type Use this screen to perform management tasks on the BS TRx Action Request 1 Select required action e Select Action e None Home button no action e Reset BS TRx Channel Resets the BS TRx channel Not available in this release 2 Click Queue Action to initiate 3 A confirmation message is displayed to warn of the consequences of the action Click Yes to add to the queue or No to abort the action 4 When the action is successfully added a message is displayed and the action appears in the queue 220 Configuration Management Action Request Reset BS TRx device Clear trap destinations Add trap destinations reated Time 2000712007 06 42 50 Action Queue Displays all outstanding actions associated with the BS TRx Actions For other buttons see Action Buttons 221 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Channels Channels 2 030 Did 1 Provisioning Provisioning Number of Cranne Name Changes Registered 552 in BS BS Name 1 narret 313238302001 113238 303031 m b 2 1 BS TRx 315238203031 28 harnet 323238 303031 23238300031 Im F b 5 2 BS 7 amp c313238 303031 28 Pnannet 333238 303091 833238 300031 Vv b 3 n BS T amp c313238 203031 28 la A E Total
138. SS Cust Sample of SS Chann Do ACBO 00 00 2A 100042 Im of Service Sample of SS Cust Sample of SS Crann DAC BD 0000 26 1000 43 of Service Sample of SS Cust Sampie of SS Chann Do AGB0 0090 2c 1000 44 Im I Sangle ot Service Sample of SS Cust of SS Erann _ e Bante or service Bangle of SS Cust Bangle of SS NT Total Database tems 10 Total Loaded 5 Eat Relead Export View Export All Pages 7 Szes wot Close Reload Hep This window shows the SSs registered on the BS TRx Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter By Home Channel By Last Seen on Channel By Service Product By Custom Config Profile e Edit This button allows user defined criteria to be edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e List Lists all criteria see Creating Filters List e Alarm Status increasing severity normai Alarm has cleared warning P Minor A major 206 Configuration Management A critical Mirndeterminate e Hardware Type Hardware T
139. SSe BSOUs Asems 102 BS TRxs 10 Charnes 10 6 1 ssa OK Cancel Validate Reload Hep Netspan uses three different page types o List Page o Property Page o Management Page List Page A list page provides a list of items that can be filtered to provide different views of the list Edit Filter Definition Restore Defaults 1006091 3000033 1000202 30000183 10060207 Tots Database toms 10 Losded t ree ues se Auto Page Setup Refresh Filtering Lists To optimize the efficiency of searches filters are used Filters allow the user to narrow the search Default options are listed as well as any user defined filter that may have been created for this list The Primary Filter is selected from the Filter drop lists The criteria can be set by clicking the edit button or new filters can be defined and added See Filters 68 Getting Started Edit Filter Definition List of Filters B ABy Management Vian ID 1006091 By Region sy Sharin MM 10080 202 m 10080 193 IF 10060207 Not Managed Prowsion Failure dite Reload Export View Export Sorting Lists Clicking on a List heading sets the list to be ordered either ascending or descending Further clicks toggle the list between ascending and descending A secondary sort is implemented by clicking the heading with
140. Service o Software Manager Service o Provisioning Service o Statistics Service ASMAX Management ASMAX products are managed by Netspan A shelf is managed using an IP based protocol for connection over a network using an Ethernet interface Configuration of Netspan is through the management system as are alarms performance and statistics Netspan has the capability of simultaneously managing up to 5000 BS TRxs and 200 000 subscribers Database The Netspan database is the master for provisioning data whereas ASMAX equipment contains the master database for status and statistics The SQL database stores the following items o Alarms o Events o Topology information o Provisioning data o Statistics data o Inventory data SNMP Support o Netspan integrates the SNMP libraries and provide internal access interfaces o Netspan sends trap for each alarm of each type defined for the AS MAX system o Netspan allows traps to enable disable traps for each alarm type independently o Itis NOT be possible to enable disable different alarm types for different shelves but database format should allow this extension in the future Alarms All of the systems alarms are sent to and acknowledged by the management system The management system allows visibility of all alarms and provides navigation and support to identify the cause of the alarm The management system also provides logging of alarms in the database Statistics System statistics and
141. Service Class name does not already exist o ServiceClassList Produces a list of names of Service Classes configured in the NMS Returns a null if no Service Classes are found o ServiceClassUpdate Updates an existing Service Classes in the NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the Service Classes name already exist in the NMS it is updated otherwise an error is returned ServiceProduct The interface can be viewed by browsing to http lt webserver gt wimaxws1 ServiceProduct asmx o ServiceFlowTemplateClassifiersAdd Adds an existing Service Flow Template Classifiers to an existing Service Flow Template Name in a Service Product in the NMS If any of the Service Flow Template Classifiers or Service Flow Template or the Service Product are not found an error is returned o ServiceFlowTemplateClassifiersClear Clears all existing Service Flow Template Classifiers in an existing Service Flow Template in a Service Product in the NMS Return an error if either the Service Flow Template or the Service Product is not found o ServiceFlowTemplateClassifiersList Produces a list of names of Service Flow Template Classifiers in an existing Service Flow Template in Service Product in the NMS Returns a null if no Service Flow Template Classifiers are found or Returns an error if either the Service Flow Template or the Service Product name is not found o
142. ServiceFlowTemplateClassifiersRemove Removes an existing Service Flow Template Classifier in an existing Service Flow Template in a Service Product in the NMS If any of the Service Flow Template Classifiers or Service Flow Template or the Service Product are not found an error is returned o ServiceFlowTemplateCreate Creates new Service Flow Template in NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional Appendix proprietary custom quantities If the Service Flow Template name does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise an error is returned ServiceFlowTemplateDelete Deletes an existing Service Flow Template in the existing Service Product in the NMS Return an error if either Service Flow Template or Service Product names are not found ServiceFlowTemplateGet Gets the configuration parameters as defined in 802 16f for the Service Flow Template in a Service Product in the NMS Return an error if either the Service Flow Template or the Service Product names are not found ServiceFlowTemplateList Produces a list of names of Service Flow Template in an existing Service Product in the NMS Returns a null if no Service Product are found ServiceFlowTemplateUpdate Updates an existing Service Flow Template in the NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the Service Flow Template already e
143. T Description BS with OS Application bad SCRT images Type IBS TR Nodes Of This Type In Network b Software Upgrade All Nodes Of This Hardware Category Except Where Individually Overridden Request Download Image File Suite 584 cert 4_ 035 SCRT only Schedule iv Time Stat 00 00 Time End 10000 Time Span 00 00 hours minutes Date Start 06 08 2007 DateEnd 0508 2007 Date Span fi days erac Software Upgrade Summary Report For Nodes Of This Hardware Category amp Images Description Catagory Soecific etet Initiate Upgrade 354 Software Upgrade to all nodes except where individually overridden When the complete installed base is to be upgraded then a request is made to action a software upgrade o Request e If setto idle the software will not be downloaded until the request is set e If download then the download attempts to download the specified version to the standby bank if the specified version does not exist in either the standby or primary banks software is downloaded into the SS Standby bank based on the image set defined in the Selected profile e If activate then the NMS attempts to activate the specified version provided it exists in either the standby or primary banks If in the standby bank and not the primary bank it will first swap
144. TT A PL CATO el System Signal Parameters Addresses Advanced Signal Parameters Link Status OPERATIONAL Downlink Parameter Yalue Uplink Parameter Yalue Uplink Frequency 3302 500 MHz Uplink Channel Bandwidth 1 75 MHz 124 Configuration Management The parameters of the Signal Parameters are described in the table below Link Actual WiMAX Initialization Phases either Status Link States e IDLE no link established e NETWORK ENTRY Scanning SS is scanning through a preconfigured list of frequencies and bandwidths in search of a BS TRx transmission Once a BS is detected the channel is scored according to the signal strength The best channel is then used for the network entry process NETWORK ENTRY DL SYNC SS is synchronizing to the DL channel During that phase the SS identifies the correct cyclic prefix DL synchronization is obtained in case the SS periodically receives the DL broadcast messages DL MAP and DCD transmitted by the BS TRx NETWORK ENTRY UL_SYNC SS tries to obtain uplink messages required to access the air interface UL synchronization is obtained in case the SS periodically receives UL broadcast messages UL MAP and UCD transmitted by the BS TRx NETWORK ENTRY RANGING SS performs ranging with the preferred BS in order to adjust its transmission parameters including Tx power timing and frequency offset NETWORK ENTRY BASIC CAPAB
145. Tag Discard Untagged Single Tagged Single Tagged Pass Pass Untagged Untagged Single Tagged Untagged Pass Pass Untagged Untagged Note SS has no VLAN membership 454 Appendix Packet Flow Tables SS Provisioned with VLAN ID sending either Tagged or untagged packets TX Packet BS TRx SS Rx Packet State Custom Custom Config Config BS TRx to SS SS to BS TRx Tagged l ed Rx Untagged Rx Untagged m ne Untagged Rx Untagged E Tagged Tagged Rx with Tag Rx Untagged Untagged No Pkt Rec Tagged Tagged Tagged Rx with Tag Rx with Tag No Pkt Rec Lan No Pkt Rec m Tagged 1 Rx Untagged Rx with Tag No Pkt Rec Ell Rx with Tae These results will be No Packet Rx if the BS TRx is a member of more than one VLAN 455 Netspan Release 6 5 456 SS Provisioned with VLAN ID 4096 untagged sending either Tagged or untagged packets Row TX Packet BS TRx SS Rx Packet State Custom Custom Config nu BS TRx to SS SS to BS TRx Unt Untagg No Pkt Rec No Pkt Rec Rx Untagged Rx Untagged ss No Pkt Rec a Rx Untagged Rx Untagged Tagged No Pkt Rec No Pkt Rec a Rx Untagged Rx Untagged os Tagged l No Pkt Rec No Pkt Rec Eng Rx Untagged Rx Untagged Appendix SS Provisioned with both VLAN ID and 4096 untagged sending either Tagged or untagged packets Row TX Packet BS TRx SS Custom Custom Config BS TRx to SS SS to BS TRx Tagged t
146. Timeout min The time allowed for an SS following receipt of a REG RSP message to send a TFTP CPLT message to the BS TRx in min Default 15min Allowed Range 15 to 65535 min e T15 Wait for MCA RSP ms Wait for MCA RSP in ms Default 20ms Allowed Range 20 to 65535 ms e 717 Authorisation and Key Exchange min Time allowed for SS to complete SS Authorization and Key Exchange in minutes Default 5min Allowed Range 5 to 65535 min e T22 Wait for ARQ Reset ms Wait for ARQ Reset ms Default Not Specified Allowed Range 0 to 500 ms e T27 Idle Max Time Between Unicast Grants ms Maximum time between unicast grants to SS when BS TRx believes SS uplink transmission quality is good enough Default 5000ms Allowed Range 10 to 2147483647 ms 327 Netspan Release 6 5 e T27 Active Max Time Between Unicast Grants ms Maximum time between unicast grants to SS when BS TRx believes SS uplink transmission quality is not good enough Default 5000ms Allowed Range 10 to 2147483647 ms Ranging Settings Ranging Settings Initial Ranging Interval Ranging Resp Proc Time Ineted Ranging Retnes e Initial Ranging Interval ms Time between initial ranging regions assigned by the BS TRx Default 5 Allowed Range 0 to 2000 ms e Ranging Resp Proc Time us Time allowed following the receipt of a ranging response before it is expected to reply to an invited ranging request Default 30000 Allowed Ran
147. Total Loaded tems 10 3 Prevnetji Auto Refresh 1 minute 7 Help This list summarises the BS TRx channel parameters and a channel parameters can be edited managed from this screen e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters e Alarm Status A norma Previous alarm has been cleared warning cyan Minor A major 231 Netspan Release 6 5 A critical e Miinaeterminate magenta e Channel Name User Defined See Add Edit BS TRx Channel e Channel BSID User Defined See Add Edit BS TRx Channel e Present Checked if present e Valid Checked if valid e Provisioning State Current status of the channel e Provisioning Changes Changes made e Number in BS TRx This is a channel number So in a single channel BS TRx it s typically 1 in a BS TRx with 2 channels there would be entries with values 1 and 2 e BS TRx Name BS TRx to which the channel is attached e Site Name Site to which the channel
148. Type Appication O Image File Protocol Tye 9 Image File Serer Type ba 1m1H Image File Server Address 10 0 35 248 Image File Name With Path User Name anonymous Password Software Version Expected In The Image File 2284 OK Veidwe Reload Cm Subscriber Station files are stored on a FTP server When the Subscriber Station downloads software it does it direct from the FTP server and Netspan needs to inform the Subscriber station of the file name and location The list displays the file and the server where the file can be found Add Edit Software Image files Add Software Image Configuration File Information Name Create An image File Suita File Information Product Category image s MacroMAX OS Application Image os Image File Servar Protocol Type TF TP Image File Server Type Ipod Image File Server Address Image File Name Wath Path Software Version Expected In The Image File oov File Information Name Name of image file Create An Image File Suite Check box to create an image file suite File Information When a new image file is placed on the server a new software image file has to be created so that all the relevant access can be relayed to the BS TRx or SS Product Category image s Select hardware that the image is intended for OS Application SCRT Images etc Image
149. Types Product Name Use Specific Configuration Current Specification for this BSDU Use Product Global Configuration Specification for all products See Products Allow Edit To enter new values for a specific configuration click Allow Edit box This opens a new values script Request Enter new action for Software e If setto idle the software will not be downloaded until the request is set e If download then the download attempts to download the specified version to the standby bank if the specified version does not exist in either the standby or primary banks software is downloaded into the Standby bank based on the image set defined in the Selected profile e If activate then the NMS attempts to activate the specified version provided it exists in either the standby or primary banks If in the standby bank and not the primary bank it will first swap it into the primary bank before activating The BSDU is set to run with this image set defined in the selected profile The BSDU will be rebooted and then the requested s w will run on the BSDU That is in the standby bank of the image defined in the profile is activated e Download and activate will perform both the steps of download and activate as outlined above Image File Suite Image File Suite used See Image File Suites Schedule If in allow edit mode a request is made other than idle then a schedule box appears Schedule for Selects the date and time for download If the sche
150. Untag Port VLAN ID VLAN 0093 default Port Vian E Ingress Filtering Enabled z Default Priority p e Bridge Mode VLAN Port Mode VLAN Acceptable Frame Types Untagged Only e g PVID 1 PVID 4094 e g 4093 Allow Edit V Bndge Mode VLAN Reserved VLAN 1 104090 default reserved Management On VLAN fen abled z Reserved VLAN2 VLAN 104091 default reserved2 Management VLAN ID VLAN 104094 default mgmt Reserved VLAN3 VLAN 104092 default reserved3 Port Mode sg Port Mac Address 00 01 AA 00 00 0C Acceptable Frame Types Untagged Ony x Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Check And Untag Port VLAN ID VLAN 1D4083 default Pont Vian ID Tagging Behaviour Untagged 1 Ingress Filtering Default Priorty bp J Backward Compatible VLAN Configuration Options for MacroMAX HiperMAX and HiperMAX micro These configurations are for backwards compatibility with MacroMAX HiperMAX and HiperMAX micro SR5 0 or older a Bridge Mode VLAN Port Mode VLAN Frame Types Tagged and Untagged PVID No PVID 193 Netspan Release 6 5 Allow Eda Bridge Mode ww Management On Traffic Port Eas _ Management On VLAN Enabled x Management VLAN ID MANDIO of Pont Mode x Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Acceptable Frame Types Tagged and Untagged Tagging Behaviour Tagged ingress Filtering ns 3M Default Priority
151. a Browse Service Properties Usemame LocalSysem Password F Start Services at the end of the inntallation 2 Cor igue Services for Automatic Startup Close lt lt Previous Next gt gt In the Installation Properties panel select the SQL Database to be used there may be several database servers on the machine in the Database Server dropdown list You can either leave the Application Path and Data amp Log Paths to their default values or change them to any path on a local drive Server components dlls windows services and Web Applications will be deployed to the Application Path whereas the Netspan database will be installed at the Data amp Log Path Check the Start Services at the end of installation box if you want the installer to start them when the installation has successfully completed Check the Configure Services for Automatic Startup box if you want the installer to configure the services so that they automatically start up after each server reboot Click the Next button After confirmation a Standard Windows Installer will start installing Netspan Once the installation has completed the NMS Server Manager cf below whose icon appears in the system tray can be used to re configure the Services start up properties change Netspan s admin password as well as import a different Netspan database Server Manager TETE Server AIRO04759 Services AINMS Services Refresh Se
152. a domain controller is not supported Please install Netspan on a non domain controller installation of Windows Server For general use the following host machine is recommended for the server application o Server Operating System e Windows 2003 server with the latest service packs The installation pack comes with the set of service packs installers as per availability at the date when the project was built The user is responsible for checking the Microsoft web site for later service packs and hot fixes o IIS e Internet Information Services 5 0 lt IIS version lt 6 0 o SQL Server e SQL Server 2000 SP4 or later 8 00 2039 lt SQL 2000 version lt 9 0 e SQL Server 2005 SP1 or later 9 00 2047 lt SQL 2005 version lt 10 0 e SQL Server 2005 Express Edition 9 00 2047 lt SQL 2005 Express version lt 10 0 o Net Framework 2 0 version in pre install directory e 2 0 50727 lt Net Framework version lt 2 1 For small network trials where backup and redundancy capability within the host machine is not required the following specification can be used for the Netspan Server o Server Operating System e Windows 2003 server with the latest service packs The installation pack comes with the set of service packs installers as per availability at the date when the project was built The user is responsible for checking the Microsoft web site for later service packs and hot fixes e Although we recommend the use of Window
153. a new window Both windows may the be navigated independent of each other 85 Netspan Release 6 5 Favorites Favorites allow the user to easily navigate to a page of their choice for example the most frequently used page Set as Favorite Clicking this menu item sets the current page as a favorite page Go to Favorite Clicking this menu item opens the page set as a favorite page see above 86 Main Logout Logout Clicking logout ends the session for the user and returns to the login screen 87 Netspan Release 6 5 My Account My Account Identity User Name Full Name Adm inistrator Profile Identity e User Name User name for login screen e Full Name Full name of user e Password Password for login screen Actions e Change Opens change password screen Enter Passwords Minimum 8 characters Maximum24 characters Click OK to add My Account Identity User Name admin Full Name Administrator You can change your own password Current Password New Password Confirm Password Profile __ Clear Profiles rr en rect Profile For list of profiles see Add Edit Users e Favourite Displays name of a page in the Netspan if the user has set using the Set as Favorite page e Clear Favourite Clears the favourite e Clear Profile Clears the Profile f Notet Existing Netspan users of version 8 00 xxx are automatically assigned Administrators
154. abase heme 3 Total Loaded 3 Last Loaded From Database 10 58 50 Close Reload Configure Software Download Hardware Category Image Type Each Hardware type uses a number of software images this field displays the image types that will be downloaded BS TRx Specific Configuration Current Specification for this BS TRx Hardware Category Global Configuration Specification for all hardware categories See Hardware Category Request Enter new action for Software e If setto idle the software will not be downloaded until the request is set e If download then the software is downloaded into the BS TRx based on the image set defined in the selected profile e If activate is set then the BS TRx is set to run with this image set defined in the selected profile The BS TRx will be rebooted and then the requested software that is downloaded into the standby bank will run on the BS TRx Image File Suite Image File Suite used Enter new profiles See Image File Suite Schedule If in allow edit mode a request is made other than idle then a schedule box appears If the box is checked new controls appear to selects the date and time for download to start and to finish and the period in hours minutes and days for download If the schedule box is unchecked the request will be acted upon immediately Allow Edit Check this box to enter new values for a specific configuration Apply Click Apply to i
155. access control MAC address of the devices connect via LAN Address Learned dynamic or static for example dynamically learned MAC on static this MAC address was assigned as a Static entity in the MAC table 128 Configuration Management Viewing Logged Parameters WiMAXWeb logs traps and events generated by and received from the EasyST ProST The information logged parameters are displayed in the Log page via the Log menu as displayed below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Log 1 0 00 01 53 540 Informational 50331712 System restart via WEB 2 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 3 D 00 01 12 640 Informational 50331712 System restart via WEB 4 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 5 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 6 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 7 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 ra 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 162 0 0 9 0 00 01 08 670 Informational 50331712 System restart via WEB 10 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 11 0 00 00 00 000 Informational 50331968 Current version 0 169 0 5 PA ERE Enanin n The fields of the Log are described the table below Parameter Description No Trap identif
156. actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters No Filter m By Event Type m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters Events Events may be raised by e SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan e Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event tab shows the events stored in the database for the selected BS TRx e Event Name See Fault Management Event Types e Source The BS ID as set in the shelfcfg txt file on the BS TRx e Event Information For event messages see Fault Management Events e Received Time Time when event was last raised 228 Configuration Management Statistics BS TRx Statistics BS TRx Ethernet Statistics 99 Fiter No Filter 3 aE Loot EN id BS Mame Octets in UcestPkisin Discerds in Errors in Ocfeis Ou UcsstPiis Out Cescards Out rorz Out Read From BS EEES TR313237 303031 Miss Thx 313237 303031 ps The 313237 303031 ps TR 313237 303031 SUBS Thee 313237 302031 BS TR 313237 303031 SMBS TRoc 313237 303031 BS TR 313237 303031 Reload Export View Export Ah tee
157. ad Export View Export All Paged V Sze 20 Prev Next 1 sors Close Reload Help Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters No Filter m By Event Type m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters Events Events may be raised by e SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan e Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event tab shows the events stored in the database for the selected BS TRx e Event Name See Fault Management Event Types e Source The BS ID as set in the shelfcfg txt file on the BS TRx e Event Information For event messages see Fault Management Events e Received Time Time when event was last raised 257 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Channel Management Statistics Note See BS TRx release notes for details of statistics support The following BS TRx statistics are available from the channel management statistics tab HiperMAX HiperMAX micro Service Release
158. aded Items Prev Nextt ofi File Configuration hiper os 011 Ao Canes Note In a new profile there is no software file configuration specified It is necessary to select the number of the software type then select EDIT A pulldown menu will be available under Software File Configuration allowing for one of the images defined in the previous step to be chosen Repeat 2 above for the other images to be grouped into the image file suite The screen capture below shows a completed image file suite 363 Netspan Release 6 5 Software Image Suites Layot El Name Dascnphon Software Server Server 2 Narn n Typ ile Info Name Image Type Version Type Address 84 00 011 TFTP 00 011 rere Paged T 20 Upgrade Categories Note the download will only be to the BS TRx or SS hardware type which it is set to 1 Configure Software Management Product for global actions to be performed for the BS TRx shelf There are entries for the SS and different types of BS TRx Upgrade Categories Option 1 System Wide Upgrade 1 Select the category and click edit Once selected the product will have the following options under Request o If set to idle the software will not be downloaded until the request is set If download then the software is downloaded then the Image File Suite options are displayed Select the Image File Suite to be downloaded into the BS TRx SS o If activa
159. affects the scope of re provisioning This can either be to simply re provision the BS TRxs and all its Channels or to re provision all the SSs on the BS TRx as well Select desired action and click re provision 4 Note Re provisioning the BS TRx will cause an outage to all subscriber stations that are connected to this BS TRx For other buttons see Action Buttons 202 Configuration Management BS TRx Management Actions Actions Action Request Clear trap destinations Add trap destinations Action Queue Source Type Use this screen to perform management tasks on the BS TRx Action Request 1 Select required action e Select Action e None Home button no action e Reset BS TRx Channel Resets the BS TRx channel Not available in this release 2 Click Queue Action to initiate 3 A confirmation message is displayed to warn of the consequences of the action Click Yes to add to the queue or No to abort the action 4 When the action is successfully added a message is displayed and the action appears in the queue 203 Netspan Release 6 5 Action Request Action Queue Source Type Acton reated Time psm __ Perdre Action Queue Displays all outstanding actions associated with the BS TRx Actions For other buttons see Action Buttons 204 Configuration Management BS TRx Management Channels Channels 2 030 EA 1 Provisi
160. age 154 Configuration Management Setting Maximum TX Power WiMAXWeb allows you to set maximum TX power You can define the maximum TX power transmission required Different territories have various regulation definitions for the maximum TX power transmission permitted by an RF product Maximum TX Power Setting enables configuration flexibility for any of the regulation domains Note In the event the product type is an EasyST with a SIM card the SIM content will override the configured values To set Maximum TX Power 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page select Maximum TX Power Setting and click Select The Maximum TX Power page appears as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Maximum TX power Setting Maximum TX Power Submit Define the maximum TX power setting 4 Click Submit A confirmation window appears confirming that the new parameters have been stored 5 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without setting the Maximum TX power WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced New maximum TX power has been stored effective after restart 6 To apply the settings to the unit you need to restart the unit Click Back to return to the Advanced page and then follow the restart instructions in Restarting the Unit 155 Netspan Releas
161. ajor Minor WarningO O 0 Total OF 0 0 Total Number of Cleared Critical Alarms Non Cleared Critical Critical Alarms Alarms Total Number of Cleared Major Alarms Non Cleared Major Major Alarms Alarms Total Number of Cleared Minor Alarms Non Cleared Minor Minor Alarms Alarms Total Number of Cleared Warning Alarms Non Cleared Warning Warning Alarms Alarms Total Number of Total Number of Cleared Total Number of Non Alarms Alarms Cleared Alarms Software reports 417 Netspan Release 6 5 Software 12 10 46 R 85 0 0 0 0 SSs 0000 BSDUs 0 0 0 0 BS TRx Pending S W Upgrades SS Pending S W Upgrades BSDUs Pending S W Upgrades Provisioning Provisioning 16 34 47 R Total 60 202 2 4 Online 0 ProcessingO 0 0 Errored 0 0 InSync 60 60 97 BS TRx pending queue changes Online BS TRx pending queue changes BS TRx processing changes Processing In Sync Percentage of synchronised BS TRxs Failed BS TRx changes 418 BS TRx In Progress S W Upgrades SS Pending S W Upgrades BSDUS Pending S W Upgrades Channel pending queue changes Online channel pending queue changes Channel processing changes Failed channel changes Percentage of synchronised channels BS TRx Completed S W Upgrades SS Completed S W Upgrades BSDUs Completed S W Upgrades SS pending queue changes Online SS pending queue
162. alled on are Windows 2003 and Windows XP Pro The installation program in SR5 0 enforces this requirement and stops installation if an unsupported OS is detected Older versions of Netspan were less strict and allowed installation on other OS platforms such as Windows 2000 Server The upgrade of OS from Windows 2000 to Windows 2003 to satisfy the Netspan installation program may lead to some security issues and is not recommended We recommend only new installations of Windows 2003 and Windows XP Pro and not upgrades from older systems Netspan installation configurations o Standard Netspan server installation This is default installation configuration designed to offer best performance for any size of the network up to 5000 BS TRxs and 200 000 SSs o Small network Netspan installation This is the installation for small networks trials training and demonstration It allows lower specification hardware and the software with more favorable license terms It is recommended for networks with less than 20 BS TRxs 13 Netspan Release 6 5 Hardware Requirements Netspan server should be installed on dedicated server machine The configuration where Netspan shares hardware with other server application e g web sites is not supported In normal operation a separate server and client PC is required although both can run on the same PC if necessary The server and client may be located remotely from the equipment being managed Host Require
163. amcemx b eramen paoaactsaze m H 85 TRx Name Channel Name S Mac Adares o Statistics Type Select type to be displayed and click update from BS TRx For details of statistics see Performance Management section SS Ethernet Stats SS Air Interface Stats SS RF Stats SS Modulation Stats SS Packet Counter Statistics 119 Netspan Release 6 5 Remote Management Getting Started Accessing the WiMAX Web Server The EasyST ProST has a pre configured default IP address 10 0 0 1 subnet mask 255 255 255 240 that is used to access to and communicate with the embedded WiMAX Web server To access the embedded WiMAX Web server 1 Select the requires SS from the list of SSs and click the manage button 2 Click the remote management tab 3 The home page of the WiMAX Web tool opens as displayed below WiMAX Modem slic System Signal Parameters Addresses Lo Advanced System Serial Number 304F62C0885A Certificate Stored SIM Card None System Up Time D H M S 0 00 00 17 120 Configuration Management Navigating your Web Server The WBM provides a user friendly graphical user interface GUI that allows you to easily access commands to configure and view your EasyST ProST configuration parameters Menu Bar The menu bar at the top of the page provides links menus to various configuration categories This menu bar is displayed throughout the WBM pages to allow eas
164. anagement To enter the BS TRx Management screen open the BS TRx Channel screen Select a BS TRx channel and click the manage button The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific hardware are displayed in the window BS TRx Channel Management Location Auto Discovery Region P Auto Discovery SitejLst 0 009000 Long 0 000000 General Properties BS Sequential Number isd Channel BSIO 31323803131 Name Channel 313238303131 Description Profiles Burst Profiles Package Ofdm Channel Protocol Configuration Private Key Voip Gos Profile Unlicensed Channel Location This displays where the channel is located within the network and displays a graphic of the type of channel deployed Clicking the BS TRx label alongside the icon opens the BS TRx management screen Tabs Provisioning Displays general properties and SNMP properties Commissioning Displays downlink and uplink parameters State Displays the auto discovered SNMP parameters for the BS TRx and the state of provisioning activity within the BS TRx Registered SS Lists all registered SS s Home For SSs Lists all SS s registered on the channel Alarms Alarms Events Events Statistics Statistics Actions See Action Buttons 237 Netspan Release 6 5 Provisioning The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific hardware are d
165. andatory Exit Threshold dB not supported on MicroMAX UIUC mandatory exit threshold 0 63dB CINR at or below where this UIUC can no longer be used and where this change to a more robust UIUC is required recommended thresholds are tabulated below e Minimum Entry Threshold dB not supported on MicroMAX UIUC minimum entry threshold 0 63dB The minimum CINR required to start using this DIUC when changing from a more robust UIUC is required recommended thresholds are tabulated below 321 Netspan Release 6 5 When threshold values are not synchronised with CINR protection and hysteresis values the following message is displayed Click the update thresholds to synchronise them Repet e Some of the uplink threshold values are nct synchronised with CINR protection and hyatereste Press Update Thresholds button if you want to synchronise them If the update thresholds are not synchronised then the following message is displayed when the OK button is clicked Confirmation Request e Some of the uplink threshold values ave not synchronised with CINR protection and hysteresis Do you want to conbnue Yes No Select No and update thresholds or select Yes to set Note If Yes is selected system functionality may be impaired e Focused Contention Power Boost dB Not supported Actions See Action Buttons 322 BS TRx Profiles BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profiles BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profiles
166. ange 0 25 100 25 dBm L Transmitter State custom Enabled X Uplink Channel 99 Frequency 1 kHz Initial Ranging Max EIRxP 1 dtm Rx Level Set Point custom 70 00 dBm Downlink Channel o Frequency If licensed a frequency is required o Tx Power Custom Allows TX power at the output of the shelf to be set o Transmitter State Custom Enabled Disabled Uplink Channel 241 Netspan Release 6 5 Note Not all the items may appear on the screen as the items displayed are only those supported by the BS TRx product o Frequency Uplink Channel Frequency o Initial Ranging Max EIRxP Defined in 802 16 2004 6 3 9 5 1 Usage of this parameter is ambiguous in the standard it is recommended this value be set to Rx Level Set Point minus BS TRx antenna gain where BS TRx antenna gain is reduced to account for antenna feeder loss o Rx Level Set Point Custom This is the level in dBm that with uplink power control fully converged a full bandwidth uplink transmission should be received at the BS TRx antenna port Last Updated Time of last update Allow Edit Check this box to enable the configuration edit When the edit is enabled a clone of the original values is displayed alongside Values can be changed and entered into the database using the apply button Actions Apply Changes the value of these properties on the BS TRx Validate Checks for validity 242 Configuration Management State Auto Discovery 802
167. arrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters By Site Name By Region Name d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Ed Lists all criteria see Filters o Shelf ID Shelf ID o Name User Defined o Site Name Name of site containing the shelf o Region Name Name of region containing the site o IP Address IP address o MAC Address MAC address o Managed Ticked if shelf is managed o Connection State Displays status of connection and if any conflicts with name and shelf ID have been recognised o Discovered Ticked if shelf is discovered o Main Supported Mibs Main Mibs supported by this shelf o DB Cache Changed At Time cache changed Actions See Action Buttons Note It is not possible to select multiple shelves for management 261 Netspan Release 6 5 Ad d Edit Shelf Add Shelf Shelf Properties Name User MAC Address 00 00 10 Shelf ID Region Auto Discovery Regon Ss Un Site Auto Discovery Ste O Managed F SNMP Properties Allow ed IP Address 10 0 25 92 Port 161 Version SNMPy2e Read Community Pubic Write Community Private Timeout 1000 General Properties e Name User Defined e MAC Address MAC address of Shelf Manager e Shelf ID Shelf ID e Region Select required regio
168. as a secure means of segmenting a network The traffic between VLAN s is restricted thereby providing secure boundaries and limiting the propagation of broadcast and multicast traffic This means that any equipment supporting VLAN tagging will be able to connect to the ST and present each VLAN id on a separate Ethernet segment for connection into the appropriate network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN support provides security isolation between corporate customers by creating corporate virtual private networking and allows independent LAN traffic to be carried over a single physical interface 802 1Q VLAN adds an identifier to each Ethernet packet to identify which VLAN it belongs to VLAN security is used together to provide total security isolation of grouped Ethernets f Note Only one untagged VLAN is allowed which uses a special VLAN id of 4096 Add VLAN Identity Name VLAN Id Tagged Traffic Description Add This Vian To All Existing BS TRxs DHCP DHCP Relay Agent Mode or gt Custom Properties Single User Vv MAC Forced Forwarding MAC Forced Forwarding IP Address 0000 Broadcast Service Class 256k Normal Prionty l 162 Identity o Name User Defined o VLAN ID Note A VLAN ID of 4096 untagged VLAN ID o Tagged Traffic Checked if true o Description User Defined o Add This VLAN to all existing BS TRx Check if required o DHCP Relay Agent Information Opt 82 The DHCP relay agent i
169. ase 6 5 Actions Use this screen to reset the BS TRx channel Action Request NA Select Acton NEREEENE oo co Action Request o Select Action e None Available this release Actions For other buttons see Action Buttons 254 Configuration Management Management Alarms This tab shows the alarms Fiter No Filter Ar search Layat d Shelf A amp LITO 00 50 C2 44 1C 04 Sheit Connection State Onine Total Database tems Total Loaded tems 1 Reese Reload Export View Export Al Pee szet mot e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters e Alarm Status in order of increasing severity Normal Indicates the alarm has cleared warning Minor Mirndeterminate e Alarm Type See Fault Management Alarms e Source ShelfID of the shelf e Alarm Information For alarm messages see Fault Managemen
170. ast OOOOFFFE 00000000 Padding Bidirectional ononrerr 00000000 Back The fields displayed on the Connections List table are described in the table below Parameter Description Displays the transmission direction either UL uplink DL downlink Bidirectional both uplink and downlink peur e pne _ Displays the connection identifier ID Displays the Service Flow identifier ID Type Displays the connection type State Displays the current connection status 3 Click Back to return to the Advanced page 150 Configuration Management Changing Your User Name Using WiMAXWeb tool you can change your User Name for access to Advanced page as necessary To change your User Name 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page click Change User Name and click Select The Change User Name page appears as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Change User Name Old User Name New User Name Confirm New User Name 3 Enter your Password 4 Enter your old User Name 5 Enter your new User Name 6 Re enter your new User Name to Confirm Click Submit A confirmation message is displayed to confirm the requested change as shown elow Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without changing your User Name Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Are you sure you want to change your use
171. ategory Select Hardware type from the list General Settings o Default Authorisation Key Lifetime s Unit Seconds See table below o Default Traffic Encryption Key Lifetime s Unit Seconds See table below o Default Trust for Manufacturing Certificates e Trusted Not Trusted o Checking Certificates Validity Periods Select e Checked e Checked Timers Custom Custom Timers are not supported on MicroMAX o Authorisation Grace Time Unit Seconds See table below o Traffic Encryption Key Grace Time Unit Seconds See table below o Authorise Wait Timeout Unit Seconds See table below o Reauthorise Wait Timeout Unit Seconds See table below o Operational Wait Timeout Unit Seconds See table below o Rekey Wait Timeout Unit Seconds See table below o Authorisation Reject Wait Timeout Unit Seconds See table below Authorisation Key Lifetime Lifetime in seconds BS TRx assigns to new AK 604 800s 7days 6 048 000s 70 days Traffic Encryption Key Lifetime Authorise Wait Timeout Reauthorise Wait Timeout Authorisation Grace Time Operational Wait Timeout Rekey Wait Timeout Lifetime in seconds BS TRx assigns to new AK Auth Req retransmission interval from authorised wait state Auth Req retransmission interval from Re authorised wait state Time prior to authorisation expiration SS begins re authorisation Key Req transmission interval from Op Wait State Key Req transmission i
172. automatically made in the BS TRx inventory table An overview of the active network inventory is shown as part of the Navigation menu The screen capture above shows the inventory for a number of MicroMAX BS TRxs e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary Secondary By Description Software Description Software By Product Code Product Code 259 Netspan Release 6 5 SS Inventory Subscriber Station Inventory Subscriber Station Inventory List Mac Address Product Cade EST350F ExT EST350F EXT EST350F EXT DIADOACOOFB EST3SOF EXT PST35OF 1TV 1 Product Description EasyST 3 502 FOO without Antenna T 3 5GHz FOO without Antenna EasyST 3 50Hz without Antenna EasyST 350Hz FOO without Antenna Prost 3 SGHz FDD 1748 Vert excluding SDA Tota Detabase hems 1004 Total Loaded tems 5 Paged V Size 5 Prev Nest t ot 201 As soon as a subscriber station is discovered by Netspan an entry is made in the subscriber station table and the relevant inventory entries are automatically made in the inventory table An overview of the active network i
173. ber Station SS acquires a downlink channel The last operational parameters are stored in the SS and it first tries to reacquire this downlink channel If this fails it begins to continuously scan the possible channels of the downlink frequency band of operation until it finds a valid downlink signal Note this channel scan is a useful tool used with other tools for e 55 Auto Provisioning where the operator is not asked to set the SS specific parameters such as the frequency channel e Support for Nomadic Applications where the SS is turned off and then turned on in another channel which may use a different frequency channel e Support for BS TRx Redundancy Applications where the SS loses connectivity with a BS TRx radio and may need to work with a BS TRx radio which may use a different frequency channel Subscriber Selection Subscriber Provisioning Subscriber Selection MAC Address f L My Subscribers Fiter No Filter Search 7 P Address Regetered Service Enabled Service C 00 40 80 00 00 03 10003 bo ac BO 00 00 04 hooga bo a0 B0 00 00 05 10005 0 0 80 00 00 09 10003 00 40 80 00020 1000 10 gt Total Database tems 1004 Totei Loaded teme 5 Reload Export View Export Paged fV Size 5 Prevesti eof 201 e MAC Address To configure a new SS input the MAC address of SS to be added Click the configure button to open the configuration screen e To re configure an exist
174. bled or Enabled o Management on VLAN ID This is displayed if Management On VLAN is enabled Select VLAN ID from list of available IDs Port edit mode o Port Mode Set either Not Set Transparent or VLAN o Acceptable Frame Types Choices are Tagged and Untagged Untagged Only and Tagged Only Filtering o Port VLAN ID VLAN ID used for tagging of untagged frames when Acceptable Frame Types is either Tagged and untagged or untagged only o Ingress Filtering Defines behaviour for port ingress o Default C Tag priority Priority used when frame is tagged with Port VLAN ID Backwards Compatible o Info Panel Backwards compatible VLAN Port Mode Tagging Behaviour are for information only and cannot be set Port VLAN Lists o Select and use lt lt and gt gt to include and exclude VLAN in the port member set Port VLAN Lists Member Set Excluded Set 32 4 36 126 0 6 7 25 ID 7 127 D 8 09 29 ID 9 33 D211 140 00 12 9 13 Provider VLAN Bridge Q in Q The IEEE 802 1Q in Q VLAN Tag is purpose to expand the VLAN space by tagging the tagged packets thus producing a double tagged frame The expanded VLAN space allows the provision certain services such as Internet access on specific VLANs for specific customers and yet still allows the service provider to provide other types of services for their other customers on other VLANs o S Tag EtherType Q in Q encapsulation
175. c needed if using SNMP V2c o SNMP Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o Timeout The number of milliseconds that the NMS waits for a response Actions e Action Buttons 276 Configuration Management State IP Address 10 0 36 28 Connection State Comms failure Last Changed At not available Provisioning swe OK EE Statistics Source Tyne Al Changes 5 New in progress Queved Awatho Changez Response State e IP Address IP address of BSDU e Connection State Connection state e Last Changed at Time of last update Channel Provisioning e Provisioning State All Changes New Changes Changes in Progress Changes Awaiting Resp Changes Failed Current provisioning statuses Actions See Action Buttons 277 Netspan Release 6 5 Software Configure Software Download Hardware Category Image Type s defined No Images New Values Old Values F Specific Configuration F Specific Configuration Request j Image File Suite 101 set F Allow Edit Current Software Status Hordwore c Latest Request NMS State Scheduled Start Dete Date Start Tee Ene Time Total Database tems0 Total Loaded items 0 Last Updated From Equipment a Last Loaded From Database amp 14 2000 Close Reload Configure Software Download Hardware Category Image
176. cated by the display of periods WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Downloading Software Checking server connectivity Successfull Erasing Done Opening FTP connection Done Downloading software version When the SW file download completes the Download complete message is displayed as shown below 134 Configuration Management WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Downloading Software Checking server connectivity Successfull Download complete Effective after swap bank followed by restart Back 10 Swap between the active and standby SW version file from the device s standby software bank to its active software bank by performing the following a Click Back to return to the Software Download page b Click Swap Bank The Confirmation message box appears as shown below 4 Note Failure to confirm click OK will result in the ST rebooting to the old software Microsoft Internet Explorer E x Q Are you sure you want to swap software banks ee C Click OK to confirm software transfer between standby and active banks The downloaded SW version file is transferred to the device s active bank and the previously active SW file in the active bank is transferred to the standby bank WiMAXWeb displays a message indicating that the swap bank has been completed and the bank to wh
177. cess to each field this section o Port Agent port number for the subscriber o SNMP Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public Default is public o Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public Default is private o Timeout The number of milliseconds that the manager waits for a response When OK is clicked the changes are applied to the SSs listed 104 Configuration Management Subscriber Station Management This window collects together all the information pertaining to a particular subscriber station To manage multiple SSs see Multiple Subscriber Station Management Subscriber Station Management Location Auto Discovery Region t Auto Discovery Site Lst 000090 Long 0 000000 OB BS TRx 313238 303031 313239 303031 Hardware MicroMAX E Channel 323238 303031323238 3030311 2 0D AD BD OO 00 01 Hardware ProST WiFi Provisioning State Actions Recently on BS TR 1 Software inventory Alarms Events SF Status Statistics Remote Management i MAC Address 00 40 80 00 00 01 Service Product Sample of Semice Product Custom Config Profile Sample of SS Custom Configuration Port VLAN Profile Service Enabled Registration Allowed Channels 2 Allow configuration to be set SS no z Location This displays where the BS TRx is located within the network and displays a graphic of the
178. ch bits of the Base Station ID require a match to enable the EasyST ProST to associate with the BS TRx 5 Click Submit A page is displayed informing you that the new values have been saved as shown below 6 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without defining Base Station settings WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced New parameters have been stored effective after restart Back 7 To apply the settings to the unit you need to restart the unit Perform the following a Click Back to return to the Base Station ID Settings page b Click Back to return to the Advanced page and then follow the restart instructions in Restarting the Unit 7f Note In the event the product type is an EasyST with a SIM card the SIM content will override the configured values 143 Netspan Release 6 5 System information Settings WiMAXWeb allows viewing the System Information settings and modifying the System information This is general information such as System s description name location and contact information To access the System Info Settings 1 Access the Advanced page as described in Accessing the Advanced Page section 2 Inthe Advanced page select System Info Settings and click Select The System Info Settings page appears as shown below 4 Note Initially the fields are blank and should be defined as required Default The SSs are able to connect to all Base Statio
179. cheme USA WIMAX Human Power Threshold 53 dBm Tx Max Power Configuration Ead x Tx Max Power dBm Bandwidth Share for Measurement 0 Minimum Number of Pulses for Detection n 1 Minimum Number of Bursts for Detection 2 Radar Detection Sensitimty lo J Clearest Channel Choice N Clearest Channel Choice Enabled amp Power Threshold Allowed Channels 99 Allowed Channels 0 199 5000 5995 MHz o Name User Defined o DFS Enabled The 5 GHz unlicensed spectrum is sometimes used by of radar systems also operating in this spectrum In some countries it is compulsory to avoid interference with such radar systems DFS allows wireless devices operating in this spectrum to detect radar and quickly vacate any channels currently used by the radar systems Using DFS operation is switched from the radar channel to the new channel This channel switching technique minimizes disruption to users during a radar event Enable if required in the country of operation 344 BS TRx Profiles Dynamic Frequency Switching o Availability Check Required before start transmission on the selected channel in order to verify that no radars are present o InService Check Required during operation in the channel o Standard Channel The standard that defined the radar type detection threshold ETSI FCC o List Scheme This parameter defines the channel central frequency and or step
180. ckly rescans because it has a limited scan table and signs back on 376 Fault Management 377 Netspan Release 6 5 Alarm Types This list displays the alarm types Alarm Types Alarms Alarms in Netspan are raised and cleared by events Only events that indicate a change of fault status are used to raise or clear alarms The alarms have predefined severity as follows warning cyan Minor To edit the alarm properties click the line item and then click the Edit button Edit Alarm Type Name Semice Stopped j Properties Severity Raise Descnption OK j Reload Properties Severity The severity of the alarm may be set to Critical Major Minor or Warning ITU event Type Not editable Source Type Not editable 378 Fault Management Raise Defines whether the alarm should be raised or not This can be used to disable the alarm type Auto Delete Cleared Time This setting is used to automatically delete alarms that have been cleared for longer that this period 0 means never User Description This field is provided for user notes regarding the alarm type Descriptions Probable Cause Most likely cause of the event Description Gives most probable fix User Description Field for additional notes Alarm Name Description Link Down One of the network or radio interfaces is not operational SNMP Authenticatio
181. client runs on a Windows PC with Internet Explorer Client PCs are connected to the server over an IP link Netspan is a client server application with always on server components implemented as windows services and with a front end web intranet application Netspan uses SNMP over Ethernet to communicate with ASMAX equipment Key features o Fault management with comprehensive event active alarm and historical alarms system o Configuration management with provisioning configuration status tracking and reporting software upgrade and inventory management for BS TRxs Subscriber Stations and other associated network elements o Performance management with collection of wide range of historical statistical data o Security management with NMS authentication and authorisation as well as with secure SNMP communication to equipment Characteristics of Netspan for ASMAX o Support for both nomadic and fixed SS o 802 16d 802 16 2004 standard SS is configured for service on the network Does not have to be tied to a fixed BS TRx although can be o SQL database engine for Netspan database o Indirect management of SS MIB model o Template class based provisioning o Asynchronous configuration for provisioning data Synchronous configuration for commissioning data o Asynchronous status and statistics collection o Full off line provisioning capabilities o Database is a master for provisioning data o
182. communication hardware communication an automatic reset is performed 3 Select Enable in the Keep Alive section to automatically reset the WiFi device when there is no response 4 Alternatively select Disable to so as to reset the WiFi device automatically default disabled Off 5 Click Submit A confirmation message is displayed to confirm the requested change as shown below 6 Select Reset to perform a system reset on the WiFi device 7 Select Reset To Factory Default to reset the device to the factory default settings and replace the user defined settings if required 8 Click Submit A confirmation message is displayed to confirm the requested change as shown below 171 Netspan Release 6 5 9 Click OK to accept the Reset A page is displayed informing you that the WiFi device is being reset as shown below WIMAX Modem Management WiFi Resetting Reset of the WiFi device 1s being performed After approximately 1 5 minutes the WiFi restart is completed successfully 172 Configuration Management Restarting the Unit A reset of the EasyST ProST unit is required to activate certain configuration changes These configuration settings include upgrading the unit defining frequency channels defining a base station modifying the IP settings and modifying TX power settings To restart the unit 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page The Advanced page opens as show
183. ct to forward the packet or discard the packet L3 Rules L3 Rules TOS Low Limit h TOS High Limit r TOS Mask IP Protocol Number n IP Address Type bd Source IP Addr Source IP Addr Mask Destination IP Addr 195 217 232 30 Destination IP Addr Mask 255 265 255 255 Source Port Start Source Port End 55 Destination Port Start Destination Port End e TOS Low Limit Specifies the lower limit of a ToS range used where a mask cannot be applied for example when the lower limit is 5 101 to which a QoS rule will apply Range 0 to 255 e TOS High Limit Specifies the higher limit of a ToS range to which a QoS rule will apply Range 0 to 255 e TOS Mask Specifies a range of a ToS bits to which a QoS rule will apply The mask value is used to check range checking of TosLow and TosHigh Range 0 to 255 The TOS Mask is only defined for IP TCP and UDP rules The TOS Mask can be used to compare specific bits 306 Service Profiles Precedence Type of Service from the TOS field in the IP header of a packet against the TOS value entered for this rule e IP Protocol Number Allows UDP TCP ICMP protocols to be relatively prioritised This object indicates the value of the IP Protocol field required for IP packets to match this rule See IP Protocol Numbers e IP Address Type IP Specifies whether IPv4 or IPv6 will be used to create rules elsewhere MicroMAX and SS do not support IPv6 based classif
184. d o User Defined 198 Configuration Management o Description User Defined o Region When a BS TRx is first discovered it is assigned automatically to the Auto Discovery Region To assign it to another region select the site from the drop down list o Site When a BS TRx is first discovered it is assigned automatically to the Auto Discovery Site To assign it to another site select the region from the drop down list o Managed Check this box to set to managed A BS TRx cannot be deleted unless this box is un checked Network profile o Select NTP profile name from Drop list Bridge Netspan release SR5 0 introduced completely new user interfaces for VLAN configuration The data in existing databases are translated automatically to the new configuration design and the BS TRxs and SSs already in the database will work without interruption However the default configuration changed for newly discovered BS TRxs In Netspan SR5 0 the newly discovered BS TRx doesn t have any VLANs associated with its network port but BS TRx can pass traffic to SS Because BS TRx has default VLAN port mode setting of transparent when it is discovered by EMS server In contrast the SR3 0 Netspan behaviour was that the newly discovered BS TRxs had its network port configured with all available VLANs in the Netspan database o Bridge Mode Choose either VLAN Provider VLAN Q in Q or Not Set o Management On Traffic Port Choose either
185. d Hardware Category Image Type s croMAX OS Application Securty Certificates New Values Old Values Iv Specific Configuration sas ond Use Hardware Category Global Configuration Request Download And Activate idie image File Suite m MacroMAX BS Application and OS 7 6 01 003 x SR61 771 not not set Schedule Time Stat 00 00 Time End 05 00 Time Span 06 00 hours minutes Date Stat 06 08 2007 End 06 08 2007 Date Span 1 days VV Allow Edit Current Software Status Losi Request NMS State 5 Start Date Stat Tine Wi Last Updated From Equipment Q 10 57 51 Last Loaded From Database Q 10 58 50 3 Window with heading of Current Software Status will be populated after changes have been made 366 Software Management 4 Schedule If in allow mode a request is made other than idle then a schedule box appears If the box is checked new controls appear to selects the date and time for download to start and to finish and the period in hours minutes and days for download If the schedule box is unchecked the request will be acted upon immediately 5 To check progress of the install refresh the screen by clicking reload The stages observed are TFTP FTP installing Bytes DL and Installed After the Application shows a status of Installed the software can be activated Use Configure Software tab and set the request to Activate or Assign to Pri
186. d When an unknown packet arrives at BS TRx it is broadcast to all the SSs on that BS TRx if flooding allowed is set to yes If flooding allowed is set to no then the packet is discarded MicroMAX Add Edit Custom Configuration 336 The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific hardware are displayed in the window BS TRx Profiles Add BS TRx Custom Configuration Profile Name Target Hardware Category Protocol eo Midamble Repetition Interval Disabled OFDM Channel Channel Bandwidth 3 5 vj MHz Broadcast SF Modulation Bpsk1 2 Application Authentication Disabled Data Encryption Use Broadcast Service Class No Sub channelisation Disabled Scheduler Frame Synchronisation Send Trap And Continue j Frame Mode FDD Reuse Group Disabled x Scheduling Policy Weighted Fair Queuing Priority Level 0 Level 7 Weightings 0310 1 20 2 30 3 40 4 50 560 670 7 80 Bridge Ageing Time for SS Ports seconds Flooding Allowed Yes RE o User defined Text o Target Hardware Category Select MicroMAX from list Protocol o Midamble Reception Interval Sets the number of symbols as the interval for reading packet header information OFDM Channel o Channel Bandwidth Select the required channel bandwidth from 1 75 2 5 2 75 3 3 5 5 7 or 10 MHz o
187. d by clicking the list icon See Filters o BSTRx Name BS TRx Name o SS Mac Address SS MAC address o Registered Indicates whether the SS is registered on the specified BS TRx Channel Octets In The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters o Ucast Pkts In The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher layer which were not addressed to a multicaster broadcast address at this sub layer o In The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Octets Out The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters o Ucast Pkts Out The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent o Discards Out The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space o Last Read From BS Textile stamp of the last time a value was read from BS TRx o Last Changed Time stamp of the last time a value read from BS TRx changed from t
188. d tems 0 Eat Msnsge Reload Export View Export AN Peged V Sze20 prevnet voto Close Reload Hep Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary N e m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e c Lists all criteria see Filters List e Hardware Type Hardware Type e MAC Address MAC Address of ST e Address IP address assigned to the ST e Registered Checked Registered e Service Enabled Checked Enabled e Service Product See Service Products e Configuration Profile Modulation Used e Port VLAN profile Port VLAN Profile 208 Configuration Management e Service Home Channel Channel selected as a home channel See Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning e Last Seen On Channel Last channel to have established a link with the SS e Provisioning Error Count Netspan will provision the SS on every BS TRx it is deemed to have been recently seen on unless constrained by the specification of a home BS TRx for that SS The Provisioning Error Count is the number of BS TRxs from this set
189. d to govern how many symbols are allocated in a bandwidth request The table below shows the number of symbols that must be set to ensure that a bandwdith request can be sent Req Region Req Region Min Subchannel Channelisation Full Number Full Number Req Region Full of of Symbols Tx Opp BS TRx Profiles Important Unless the required number of symbols made available as above the SS will not be able to send a bandwidth request and will be unable to operate Sub channelisation Focused Contention Code Not Supported o Bandwidth Req Opportunity Size Size in units of PS of PHY payload that SS may use to format and transmit a bandwidth request message in a contention request opportunity The value includes all PHY overhead as well as allowance for the MAC data the message may hold 68PS symbol rounded down to the nearest symbol Not Supported o Ranging Req Opportunity Size Size in units of PS of PHY payload that SS may use to format and transmit a RNG REQ message in a contention request opportunity The value includes all PHY overhead as well as allowance for the MAC data the message may hold and the maximum SS BS TRx round trip propagation delay Not Supported General Parameters o Min Req Region Full Tx Opportunities The number of bandwidth requests per sec o Min Focused Contention Tx Opportunities Not Supported o Max Supported Roundtrip Delay ps Recommended value 4096 The grey box to the right of
190. ddr Destination IP Adde Mask 1 217 23228 _ 1 256 256 255 255 1 Appendix Source Port Stat fo Source Pot End 65535 Destination Port Start Destination Port End 5 ToS 6 Service Product Service Class Classifiers Priority Lud This example shows the managing of a work flow using the TOS flag in the Header Service Product Priority Sample of Packet Clasaier best Port MIR 100 fbect Effort 7 ToS amp MEW1 122 id 2 best on ea Et ActivePacket 802 5 Ethernet ToS NEw1 125 451 Netspan Release 6 5 Service Class P2 Best Effort MIR 600k Edit Service Class Service Class P7 Best Effort MIR 200k Edit Service Class Name P7 Best MIR200k _ E Packet Classifier TOS 6 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Pnemy 123 Acton Forward L3 Rules Setting The TOS Byte 452 Appendix In the IP TOS byte model defined in RFC 1349 the TOS byte consists of the 3 bit IP Precedece field bits 5 6 and 7 and the 4 bit IP TOS value bits 1 2 3 and 4 The defined IP precedence values are shown in the table below Precedence Bits Priority Level TOS 4 2 1 value 1 Critic ECP Internetwork Control Network Control Decimal Value 32 The IP TOS value fields consists of 4 independent bit fields the most commonly used of which is the throughput bit
191. ding those that are active and those that have been deleted Active alarms will show an icon in the first column of the grid representing the current severity whereas deleted alarms will show no icon as they do not have a current severity Edit allows the details to be viewed for an Historical Alarm including its properties and history of changes to the alarm state Historical Alarms List Fiter No Filter GE search Last Changed TRx Timing Frame Lock BS 000111 003838 55 0040 04 0 08 30 SNMP Authentication Faire 000000 006093 5 05 2006 14 50 20 Lost Comms 000111 003836 10 05 2006 19 13 48 Lost Comms 112233 332211 03 2007 095227 Lost Comms BS 000111 003836 0005 2006 19 13 49 Lost Comme BS 000000 000000 032007 095227 Lost Comme BS 000000006091 4 05 2006 15 13 48 Lost Comme BS 0001 AA 0DCB73 03 2007 08 52 27 Lost Comms BBs 000000 006083 121502 Tota Database koms 171 Total Loaded tems 10 re Ese sd Filter Select the filter from the drop down list Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged Primary No Filter By Alarm Type Raised in Last 5 Minutes Raised in Last Day Raised in Last Hour To filter an alarm by time select the duration from the filter list To filter an ala
192. does not appear in edit o Name User defined o Description User defined o Region Select required region To add a new region see Add New Region o Site Select required site To add a new site see Add New Site o Managed Tick click to enable 190 Configuration Management Network Profile o Select NTP profile name from drop list Bridge edit mode See Alternative VLAN Options below for details of available option by product Netspan SR5 0 and above introduced completely new user interfaces for VLAN configuration The data in existing databases are translated automatically to the new configuration design and the BS TRxs and SSs already in the database will work without interruption However the default configuration changed for newly discovered BS TRxs In Netspan SR5 0 and above the newly discovered BS TRx doesn t have any VLANs associated with its network port but BS TRx can pass traffic to SS Because BS TRx has default VLAN port mode setting of transparent when it is discovered by EMS server In contrast the SR3 0 Netspan behaviour was that the newly discovered BS TRxs had its network port configured with all available VLANs in the Netspan database o Allow Edit Check this box to enable all controls in this section o Bridge Mode choose either VLAN Provider VLAN Q in Q or Not Set o Management On Traffic Port Choose either Disabled or Enabled Not an option on MicroMAX o Management On VLAN choose either Disa
193. dows 2003 and Windows XP Pro The installation program in SR6 0 enforces this requirement and stops installation if not supported an unsupported OS is detected Older versions of Netspan were less strict and allowed installation on other OS platforms such as Windows 2000 Server The upgrade of OS from Windows 2000 to Windows 2003 to satisfy the Netspan installation program may lead to some security issues and is not recommended We recommend only new installations of Windows 2003 and Windows XP Pro and not upgrades from older systems Northbound Interface The Netspan northbound interface supports communication between the Web Service client or consumer and Web Service server or Provider hosted by Netspan and is achieved via the exchange of SOAP Simple Object Access Protocol messages over HTTP The services exposed by the Web Service are defined using WSDL Web Service Description Language files which specify the contract between the client and server facilitating the easy development of Web service clients using most major programming languages operating systems The initial release of the Netspan Northbound interface concentrated on SS Provisioning This service allows the provisioning of SSs and also the execution of a number of other standard operations related to SS Provisioning e g Enabling or Disabling service on an SS This release provides o New WEB services for definition of service profiles This extension is exclusively offered t
194. duct Code Code 114 Configuration Management SS Management Alarms Subscriber Station Management Alarms Fiter E No Filter Search 7 Layout Alarm into D Alarm Ty SS Provinicring Error 5S 00 A0 04 CO CF 97 aled Change Nul Jm Totel Database kem 1 TotalLos Edit vckmowiedg Ei Release 1 Delete Reload Export View Export All Pagod V Size 20 PrevNex 1 Multiple Subscriber Station Management Alarms Multiple Subscriber Station Management i State Actions Software Inventory Alarms Events Statistics Fiter No Filter 18 Seerch 7 E S Provisioring Error SS 00 A0 04 C0 3E 0C Fe ES Authorization Fature ES 00A0 0A C1 582 i 107 ES Authorization Fature ES 00 A0 04 C0 3E 94 Authonzeton Fature ES 00 40 0 0 3 0 E A hos 55 Authorzabon F ature ES 00 A0 04 C0 30 C5 amp Edit fne Reese _Reloed ExpotView o Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type Not Acknowledged Raised in Last 5 Minutes Raised in Last Day
195. dule box id unchecked the request will be acted upon immediately Apply Click Apply to initiate action Current Software Status Content in this list is only displayed once a request has been initiated It summarize the request and progress of the download 278 Configuration Management e Update From Equipment Gets software status information from equipment immediately 279 Netspan Release 6 5 Inventory Layout a id Board Hard temMumber Product Code Cescnptian pon Serid Number j E Tota Database 0 Total Loaded tems Est Relead Export View Export All Paged 2 Size 20 PrevNext Close Reload 280 Item Number Item Number Product Code Product Code Description Description Board Number Board Number Board Revision Board Revision Serial Number Serial Number Hardware Id Hardware Id Software Product Number Software Product Number Description Software Description of Software Software Version Software Version Assembly Number Assembly Number Assembly Revision Assembly Revision Clei Code Registration of item number with Telcordia not implemented for this revision Description Manufacturing Description Manufacturing Date Date of manufacture Hardware Mac Address MAC address Configuration Management Management Alarms This tab shows the alarms raer NoFit 9 sr Did Alarm Souros Alarm imo Ac
196. e In the Password field enter your password 4 Click Enter The Advanced page opens as shown below 130 Configuration Management WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Advanced Software Download C Channel Table Settings C Base Station ID Settings C System Info Settings C Code Banks List C Detailed Log C Connections List C Change User Name C Change Password C Maximum TX Power Setting C P mode Settings C Performance Monitor C LAN Table Management C LAN Table Entries C Reset2Default C Clear Log C WiFi Control C Restart Select The Advanced page displays the following parameters select the parameter and click Select to navigate o Software Download to download software o Channel Table Settings to define frequency channels scan o Base Station ID Settings to define the BS TRx to which the EasyST ProST is enabled to connect to o System Info Settings to view and define general System information such as name location and contact information o Code Banks List to view the Code Banks list o Detailed Log to view detailed logs o Connections List to display information on current connections o Change User Name to change the User Name o Change Password to change the Password o Maximum TX Power Setting to set the maximum TX power o IP mode Settings to define IP mode settings o Performance Monitor to display link information and performance charts o
197. e To edit click Edit button to enable editable fields Allow edit check boxes should be checked for individual section edits Provisioning This screen shot is an example of a provisioning window The Bridge and Network Port displays will differ dependant on bridge mode and VLAN options chosen 197 Netspan Release 6 5 Edit BS TRx Provisioning General mege First Channel BSID Name Description g Auto Discovery Region z Auto Discovery Site Network Profile NTP Profile Name sw Lab Allow Edit Bridge Mode Proader VLAN Q in Q Management On Traffic Port Enabled Management On VLAN Enabled Management VLAN ID VLAN 104094 defauit mgmt Port Mode Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode CETT Acceptable Frame Types E Tagging Behaviour Ingress Filtering Enavied Port VLAN Lists Member Set Excluded Set VLAN 604 41 ID 60 90 148 10 90 Andyt Mac FF testing 10 234 zz Defaut As Max ID1 SU 0 1 Default As Max 102 MU 102 Defautt 03 MU 10 3 22 Malcolm 10 4 VLAN 100 10 100 VLAN 101 ID 101 Provider VLAN Bridge Q in Q S Tag EtherType 09100 x S Tag Configuration Mode Use BS Configuration For All SSs E S Tag Port VLAN lo Use C Tag Prionty For S Tag No Tag Priority 0 SNMP Properties I 160 195 General Properties o First Channel BSID User Define
198. e 6 5 IP Mode Settings WiMAXWeb allows you to define IP mode settings The IP address can be assigned dynamically via the DHCP server or you can assign a static IP address To access IP Mode Settings 1 Access the Advanced page as described in Accessing the Advanced Page section 2 Inthe Advanced page select IP Mode Settings and click Select The IP Mode Settings page appears as shown below WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced IP Mode Settings Dynamic C Static Static IP Address 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 3 Select Dynamic setting to provide IP address via the DHCP server this is the default value 4 Click Submit if a change was performed A confirmation window appears confirming that the new parameters have been stored as shown below 156 Configuration Management WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Sites Advanced New parameters have been stored effective after restart 5 To apply the settings to the unit you need to restart the unit Click Back to return to the Advanced page and then follow the restart instructions in Restarting the Unit 6 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without setting the IP mode 7 Alternatively select Static setting to assign the IP address manually WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Paramete
199. e CRC Max Sustained Rate bps The peak information rate associated with a Service Flow The minimum rate will be around 32kbps with the maximum only limited by the capacity of the radio channel The granularity associated with the maximum sustainable rate will depend on the packet size This parameter defines the peak information rate of the service The rate is expressed in bits per second and pertains to the SDUs at the input to the system ARQ Service Profiles Max Traffic Burst Byte The maximum burst size that must be accommodated within a Service Flow The minimum and maximum can be any number which the operator must implement to ensure a subscriber does not overtly utilize system capacity whilst maintaining a reasonable user experience This parameter defines the maximum burst size that must be accommodated for the service Min Reserved Rate bps The committed information rate that is guaranteed but which can be overbooked The minimum rate is zero bps with the maximum limited by the capacity of the radio channel The granularity associated with the maximum sustainable rate will depend on the packet size This parameter specifies the minimum rate reserved for this service flow Min Tolerable Rate bps The minimum committed information rate that is required below this level service will not be offered The minimum rate is zero bps with the maximum limited by the capacity of the radio channel The granularity associated with the max
200. e File Suites e Schedule If in allow edit mode a request is made other than idle then a schedule box appears e Schedule for Selects the date and time for download If the schedule box id unchecked the request will be acted upon immediately e Apply Click Apply to initiate action Current Software Status Content in this list is only displayed once a request has been initiated It summarize the request and progress of the download 351 Netspan Release 6 5 e Update From Equipment Gets software status information from equipment immediately 352 Software Management Upgrade Categories 4 Menu Software Management gt Upgrade Categories Upgrade Categories Upgrade Categories Hardware Category Upgrade Categories define what image types Application OS etc and how many are required for a given type When a BS TRx SS is discovered a type is assigned in accordance with what has been discovered to see what type has been discovered open the BS TRx Management Software in Netspan and the type is displayed Add Edit Software Categories Select the Software Upgrade Categories from the list and click edit Identity Software Upgrade Categories are predefined by Netspan and the identity cannot be changed other than to add a description to identify the category with a user friendly name 353 Netspan Release 6 5 Edit Upgrade Category Identity Hardware Category Image Type s HiperMAX micro OS Application SCR
201. e House Oxford Road Uxbridge Middlesex UB8 1UN Int Tel 44 0 1895 467 467 Int Fax 44 0 1895 467 472 E mail Support Airspan com 465 Netspan Release 6 5 Copyright Information 466 1 2 A 10 Airspan Networks Inc 2007 The information in this document is proprietary to Airspan Networks Inc This document may not in whole or in part be copied reproduced or reduced to any medium without prior consent in writing from Airspan Networks Incorporated This manual is subject to revision All rights reserved Right of modification reserved This manual is supplied without liability for errors or omissions No part of this manual may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission This equipment is conditioned by the requirement that no modifications are made to the equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Airspan Prerequisite skills Personnel installing commissioning and maintaining the Airspan products must have a basic knowledge of telephony and radio communications and have experience in installing commissioning and maintaining telecommunications products Airspan provides a range of comprehensive training courses specifically aimed at providing operators users of Airspan products with the prerequisite skills to install commission and or maintain the product The courses are tailored to provide the level of train
202. e class to the required class see Service Classes Set direction to Uplink Initial State set as required Active Admitted Provisioned 6 Convergence Sublayer Type Packet 802 3 Ethernet o Service Flow template configuration for Uplink 1 Select associated Packet Filter classifier rule or Filters if more than one rule is required per QoS profile Classifiers are listed in the drop menu Select the required rule and click Add Once selected the rule is added to the Service Flow Template Classifier Configuration list and removed from the choices offered in the drop list Each rule has a priority assigned to it so that the highest priority takes precedent over rules of a low priority in order to avoid a conflict of rules See Packet Classifier Rules Service Profiles 2 Click OK to add the service flow to the service product Beware you will then need to press ok on the service product page to save the complete configuration o Open the Service Products list expand the tree and it should look similar to this Service Products LI ice pe For descriptions of fields see Service Products Actions See Action Buttons 297 Netspan Release 6 5 Service Classes Service Classes List Fiter No Filter GU snr Scheduling Request 1 Period fine Priority Polcy Code Nave Scheduling Type Fulfiste P7 List o Filter Filters are used to limit the numbe
203. e environment is and what is the level of multipath Note For additional information contact Tech Support The Statistic Values table displayed are described below Average SNR Displays the Effective SNR Displays the SNR Mode Displays the 6 Select Real Time Statistics to display the WiMAX radio interface statistics The Real Time Statistics display is updated every 10 seconds After the display reaches 100 seconds 10 X 10 updates the cycle repeats 7 Click Select Real Time Statistics are displayed as shown below 8 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without viewing the statistics 161 Netspan Release 6 5 WiMAX Modem Management 162 System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced SNR SHR dB 35 2 2 19 15 7 3 4 5 Time sec 90 50 100 150 200 258 2300 250 400 450 500 650 600 66 0 70 0 750 560 850 90 0 950 100 0 RSSI RSSI dBm saesobthbhb khs Time sec 90 50 100 150 290 250 30 350 400 450 500 559 600 6 0 700 750 800 850 300 2950 100 0 9 Select Scanning Results to display the current status 10 Click Select Scanning Results are displayed as shown below 11 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without viewing the statistics Configuration Management event Modem Managemen SSES Channel RSSI 3532 750 MHz 67 2 dBm List of Base Station Identifiers Base Station ID SNR 000000000000 33 6 dB
204. e list button See Filters e BS TRx Name BS TRx name These counters are reset when the BS TRx resets Octets In The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters e Ucast Pkts In The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher layer which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub layer e Discards In The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space e Errors In The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Octets Out The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters e Ucast Pkts Out The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent e Discards Out The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space e Errors Out The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors e Read From BS TRx
205. e of the same version as the local NMS server Both methods require all Netspan services to be shutdown and restarted Restoring Netspan using Attach method 1 The NMS SQL database restore files must be renamed to Netspan Data MDF and Netspan Log LDF and placed in folder C NMSBkpData for this operation to be successful Open the DOS command window and change the directory to that of the server change tool The default installation location of this is C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 Setup Setup ServerChange At the command prompt type the following line gt setup serverchange exe A R M ATTA P C NMSBkpData This will output the following lines NMS ServerChange utility v255 8 60 001 This executable is going to RestoreAndActivate the NMS Database on the Local Machine NMSServerName Do you want to continue Y N 5 Pressing Y will output the following lines 62 Creating Log File NMS Services Stopped IIS Stopped ReStarted SQL Server NMSServerName SQL2005 successfully Previous NMS Database successfully detached Existing database files backedup successfully to C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc Backup Files Existing NMS database files deleted from target location successfully Database files successfully attached to NMSServerName SQL2005 Database ver 255 8 60 001 matched with Netspan ver 255 8 60 001 IIS SQL Server Login created NMS Database Installation settings updated IIS res
206. e options are listed below Note BTC and CTC codes are not available for MicroMAX BPSK CC 1 2 16 QAM 16 QAM QPSK CTC 16 QAM RS CC CC 3 4 BTC 3 5 1 2 CTC 3 4 QPSK RS CC CC 64 QAM BTC 5 6 16 QAM QPSK CTC 64 QAM BTC 4 5 3 4 CTC 2 3 QPSK RS CC CC QPSK BTC 1 2 16 QAM QPSK CTC 64 QAM 1 2 BTC 2 3 2 3 CTC 3 4 16 QAM QPSK BTC 3 4 or 16 QAM 16 QAM RS CC CC 1 2 2 3 BTC 5 6 CTC 1 2 e TCS Enable Indicates whether Transmission Convergence Sublayer is enabled or disabled Uplink e CINR Protection Fade margin increases the SNR required to enter a specific modulation This is useful if the uplink needs to be made more robust to packet errors due for example to fast fading e CINR Hysteresis Overlap decreases the SNR required to exit a specific modulation This parameter reduces the probability of exiting to less spectrally efficient modulation in the event of a fade at the expense of increased risk of packet error It is recommended this parameter be kept at 1dB List e UIUC The Uplink Interval Usage Code indicates the uplink burst profile in the UCD message and is used along with Index to identify an entry in the Burst Profile Table e In Use Tick to make modulation type available on this profile e FEC Code Type This sets the modulation type for the UIUC and should be set for each UIUC When the FEC type field is clicked a dropdown menu allows the correct modulation to be selected e M
207. e text file in Notepad and copy and paste the encrypted licence script into the left hand side text panel Click the Read button The script is decrypted and the details of the licence are displayed in the right hand panel Click Apply to save the new Licence to the system Click Next to continue installation Adding a Licence Post Installation New licences can be installed at any time using the NMS Server Manager Open the server manager and click the Properties button NMS Server Manager Click the licence tab 52 Installation Services Security Database Version Licence Paste new licence below Max Number of BS Items 0 Unlimited Max Number of SS Items 0 Unieeted BDB SB MV TW aoisNLvLczFinN gANUSbIHa2 SFKSOiBOVincP2uBF baby why MASOSSCSFSUD 7FH bPdUTPHwasdwiRAGIdNic87g sHPSasDOYpNdo Ang YS ysdRsL3uD cic SOBYCo4yN 2E HMq93G T 5 20 XCKHAVpcHGAQF 31 3myELHblLIO 45 eM si SuyUj y wrwNEScDNTHOizZi FEg7zelE h7SkN ck Th gv5 mBxyy oy 2 UFVMU dM gH khXE u amp HhO wvITxdAT iy cse PVT xaM OCA OD TEJLaOFU 3p7deMPE AIBCBEUE rent 9Afapl YCWIGN T VguN vq9N 3j g wnghdkxz 26 38 xhoM pR qu CdzoSFHeiSURS HSLL Skt Status Paste the licence number in the window and then click Read to decode Services Security Database Version Licence Paste new licence below Max Number of BS TAx 0 Unimed Savice Profile Detinition Enabled True jax Number of BS TR
208. e transmission of the fragment is not acknowledged by the receiver before the time limit is reached the fragment is discarded A value of 0 means Infinite 301 Netspan Actions Release 6 5 Sync Loss Timeout 10 us The maximum interval before declaring a loss of synchronization of the sender and receiver state machines A value of 0 means Infinite Delivery Order Indicates whether or not data is to be delivered by the receiving MAC to its client application in the order in which data was handed off to the originating MAC e Not Preserved e Preserved Rx Purge Timeout 10 us Indicates the time interval the ARQ window is advanced after a fragment is received A value of 0 means Infinite Block Size Byte This value of this parameter specifies the size of an RQ block Values may be selected from a drop down list See Action Buttons 302 Service Profiles Packet Classifier Packet Classifier Rule Profiles This is a rule that determines if the packet is going to use the service flow associated to this classifier o Layer 2 rules e Source Destination MAC address e Layer Protocol ID Type EtherType e VLAN ID o Layer 3 rules e Source Destination IP address e Source Destination Port number range e ToS range Each Packet Classifier has a priority 0 Low to 255 High Each packet is checked against the Classifier in Priority order This allows a low priority service flow to have a low priority allow all classifier
209. ection The target group of SSs is filtered by selecting one or more of the existing profiles on the SS Service Product Config Profile VLAN Port Profile The SSs that have been selected as a result of the filter are listed in the selection window New Configuration New Service Product Config Profile VLAN Port Profiles can be set by checking the box alongside that to be provisioned and select the new profiles from the drop box associated with the profile Only those items that have been checked will be applied Click apply to initiate the provisioning Status Information The status of the global provisioning is reported in the status information window 284 Topology Region 1 Open region list Add Region 1 Click Add on the region list Add Region Region Properties Name Description 2 Enter information in the fields listed below Region Properties o Name User defined o Description Use defined for further information Edit Region o To edit first select the region row entry on the regions list and then select edit Actions See Action Buttons 285 Netspan Release 6 5 Sites 1 Open Site List Sites IE Reed Export E Pet 7 Seo mener jen Filter o Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when g
210. ed management for EasyST ProST in order to define The BSID Mask of FF FF FF 00 00 00 Explanation As defined by iEEE802 16 the Base Station Id is a 48 bit long programmable user defined field identifying the BS The most significant 24 bits are used as the operator ID Selected Channels List of channels that are available to the SS after the mask is applies selected SNMP Properties 101 Netspan Release 6 5 SNMP communication requires a manager and an agent SS SNMP provides the language and the rules that the manager and agent use to communicate The manager sends requests to an SS either to send information or to set a parameter and an SS provide the requested data or set the parameter SS s can also notify the manager independently through unsolicited trap messages which indicate that certain events have occurred Management Information Bases MIBs define what can be monitored and controlled within a device o Allow edit Check the boxes to enable edit boxes in this section o Port Agent port number for the subscriber o Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public Default is public o Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public Default is private o Timeout The number of milliseconds that the agent waits for a response Actions See Action Buttons 102 Configuration Management Multi Edit SS Provisioning Use th
211. efault 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page select Reset to Default and click Select The Reset to Default confirmation message appears as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Advanced Software Download C Channel Table Settings C Base Station ID Settings C System Info Settings pode pans xi Detailed Log C Connections List Q 5 C Change User C Change Password C Maximum TX Power C IP mode Settings Reset2Default Clear Log C WiFi Control C Restart 3 Click OK to accept the Reset A page is displayed informing you that the device has been reset as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Reset to Default completed 4 Click Back to return to the Advanced page 168 Configuration Management f Note Reset to Default Will overwrite defaults to the NVRAM Defaults are of the current software in use 169 Netspan Release 6 5 Clear Log In the event you want to clear all the device s event logs to have a clean log state the WiMAXWeb tool allows you to clear all log entries To Clear the Logs 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page select Clear Log and click Select The Clear Log confirmation message appears as shown below
212. ems 16 Prev Next 1 zo i This screen lists the discovery tasks that have been set Once set discovery is continuous and Netspan will update itself automatically when new elements are added to the network All newly discovered BS TRxs are added to the Auto Discovery Site Default SS Discovery Task is an automated SS discovery task which includes all the IP addresses of SSs reported by BS TRxs as IP ranges for this task This ensures all known SS IP addresses are used for SS SNMP discovery When there are many SSs to try it may take a long time to complete single iteration and it may be better to write multiple SS discovery tasks with smaller IP ranges with the checkbox Exclude IP addresses not reported by BS TRxs to speed up the process See Add Edit Discovery Task List e See Add Edit Discovery Task Actions See Action Buttons 397 Netspan Release 6 5 Add Edit Discovery Task Add Edit Discovery Task Add Discovery Task Identity Name ss find Discovery Type s wf General Properties Enabled SNMP Timeout Preferred SNMP Protocol Write Community Read Only Community E Discovery Target IP Address Ranges Iv Exclude IP addresses not reported by BSs Start Address ind Address LIO 20 10 10 10 20 10 100 NL NN Identity e Name User defined e Discovery type Select BS TRx subscriber station shelf or BSDU General Properties e Enabled Click to enable the discovery task e SMNP T
213. ens captured in this manual may be cosmetically different dependant on the build deployed Terminology BS TRx refers to the Base Station Transceiver This was referred to as a base station in earlier documents but has now been changed to avoid confusion with other definitions of base station Definition The entity with single management stack It consists of one or more BS TRx Channels BS TRx Channel refers to the radio channel within the spectrum In earlier documentation this was often referred to as a sector Definition The entity representing a single 802 16 MAC Phy interface as defined in 802 16 2 004 standard SS refers to a subscriber station Often referred to as CPE Customer Premise Equipment The Airspan version is referred to a an ST Subscriber Terminal i e EasyST and ProST VoiceMAX is Airspans offering of VoIP Voice Over IP on MicroMAX equipment Structure The Manual is organised into the following sections Network Management Overview Describes some of the basic concepts behind a Netspan NMS Installation Describes the installation of database sever and client machines Getting Started Describes the User Interface account management and basic configuration steps Search Instructions for using the search facility in Netspan Configuration Management Configuration status and inventory management for all supported network elements Topology Setting up regions and sites Service Profiles When creating an SS pr
214. eptable Frame Types is either Tagged and untagged or untagged only o Ingress Filtering Defines behaviour for port ingress o Default Priority Priority used when frame is tagged with Port VLAN ID Information section o Info Panel Backwards compatible VLAN Port Mode and Tagging Behaviour are for information only and cannot be set Provider VLAN Q in Q o Q in Q Supported Select Yes or No Note Provider VLAN configuration is applicable only for SS registered on BS TRx with Provider VLAN Bridge Mode o S Tag Port VLAN o Use C Tag Priority For S Tag Select Yes or No If Yes selected then the Default C Tag Priority set in Port is used o S Tag Priority If Use C Tag Priority is set to No then set S Tag Priority 318 BS TRx Profiles Burst Profile Packages BS TRx Burst Profiles package is defined for the specific target hardware category The BS TRx Channels of different categories will not be able to have wrong profile assigned The exception is category not defined which is maintained for backwards compatibility purposes with older versions of Netspan databases Profiles of not defined category cannot be used for MicroMAX This table provides one row for each burst profile Base Station Burst Profiles Packages Neme Target Hardware COR CAR Category Protection Hysteresis 08 ia a i ou tse maron shirt Paged Vv 5125
215. er Global Configuration E01093 One of the SS Port VLAN IDs matches the Management VLAN specified in the Server Global Configuration E01094 The management VLAN matches the Port VLAN defined in one of the SS VLAN Port profiles E01095 When one of Service Product Config Profile or VLAN Port Profile is set the others must also be set E01096 This operation is not supported on an unmanaged BSDU E01097 Service allowed channel is not within the registration allowed channels E01098 Operation failed due to licence terms violation E02000 Web Service Exception E02001 No SS with this Mac Address exists XXXXXX XXXXxx where x is a hex digit E02007 Invalid VLAN Id Please supply an integer between 1 and 4094 or 4096 E02008 No VLAN exists with the supplied VLAN Id E02009 Web Service authorisation failure E02010 If no SS Custom Configuration is supplied then a default SS Custom Configuration must be configured in the NMS E02011 If no VLAN is supplied then a default VLAN must be configured in the NMS E02012 For this method to be supported a default SS Custom Configuration must be specified in the NMS E02013 For this method to be supported a default SS VLAN Port Profile must be specified in the NMS E02014 This web service is not currently supported E02015 This method is no longer supported E02016 No SS VLAN Port Profile exists with this name E02017 If no SS VLAN Port Profile is supplied then a default SS VLAN Port
216. er bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary g This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Ed Lists all criteria see Creating Filters List e Alarm Status in order of increasing severity A Normal Previous alarm has been cleared amp warning minor indeterminate Netspan has been unable to determine alarm severity e Registered on this BS TRx Box ticked if registered e Time First Detected Time stamp showing when SS first appeared on the BS TRx e Time Last Detected Time stamp showing when SS last connected to SS 111 Netspan Release 6 5 112 BS TRx Name BSID Identity of BS TRx IP Address IP address of Management Channel Managed Checked if SS managed by this BS TRx Connection State Current connection status Provisioning State Current provision status Provisioning Changes Number of Provisioning changes Discovered Known to BS TRx Number of Registered SSs Number of registered SSs Site Name Region Name Location of BS TRx Shelf ID Id of shelf SS connected to Shelf Physical Slot Slot BS TRx located within the shelf Description Hardware Type Hardware Type Mgmt On Traffic Checked if management used the traffic IP address Bridge Mode Port Mode Mgmt VLAN ID VLAN ID of mana
217. erface Stats Enabled 55 Modulation Stats Enba sj SS Ethernet Stats Enabled SSPacketCounts Enba SS Air interface Stats Enabled s Server Properties 99 User Activity Logging User Interface Default Values e Default Operator Id User defined e Default Hardware Category Select hardware type e Default Management VLAN ID The default VLAN ID to use for management traffic is the BS TRx is configured to use a VLAN for management traffic This applies to all types of BS TRx Default 4094 e Default Port VLAN ID The port VLAN ID is the VLAN ID associated with untagged traffic when a port is in Check And Untag mode This quantity defines the default VLAN ID to use on both BS TRx and SS ports Default 4093 e Default Reserved VLAN ID 1 2 3 These are the VLAN IDs used internally within the MicroMAX BS TRx They do not apply to any other BS TRx type Defaults 4090 4091 4092 Default Configuration to apply on Discovery e BS TRx Discovery Site This allows the user to specify which site newly discovered BS TRxs will be added Default SS Configuration This section sets the service configuration that will be applied to a newly discovered SS e Service Product Select from drop list See Service Products e VLAN Port Template Select from drop list See VLAN Configurations e SS Custom Configuration Select from drop list See Discovery Task Security 400 Server e Security Policy
218. erver Management Studio porting Services The Reporting Services installation options you specdied in Setup determine whether further configuration is required before you can access the report server If you installed the default configuration the report server can be used If you installed just the program filaa sanas mni ma Onan inna hom a Anal da Ana e Click Finish Reboot the machine Apply the latest Service Pack for SQL Server 2005 can be found either on Microsoft s website or in the Image PrelInstall directory 36 Installation Installation Steps for SQL Server 2005 Express edition If the server to be upgraded already runs a Netspan version using SQL Server 2000 DO NOT UNINSTALL SQL SERVER 2000 before installing SQL Server 2005 Express Netspan s installation program needs the two products to run side by side in order to automatically migrate the database from SQL Server 2000 to 2005 The migration is handled in the section Server Installation From the http msdn microsoft com vstudio express sql download page click on the Install Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition with Advanced Services Download link and save the SQLEXPR_ADV EXE to a temporary location on the server Run the SQLEXPR ADV EXE file BE microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup End User License Agreement MICROSOFT SOFTVARE LICENSE TERMS MICROSOFT SQL us 2005 EXPRESS EDITION W
219. es in unlicensed bands 5 X GHz amp 3 65 GHz when the BS TRx is turned on and this option Via WEB and enable by the operator the BS TRx searches the spectrum and automatically selects the clearest channel o Clearest Channel Choice Select Disabled or Enabled o Power Threshold If the signal level is below the value set the channel will not be chosen Allowed Channels o Allowed Channels Netspan help the user by translating the channel numbers into frequencies The BS TRx will not use any channel that is not in the allowed channels list AND in the channel scheme Type ranges and or single channels separated by commas similar to the Word interface for printing pages of a document Actions See Action Buttons 345 Software Management BS TRx Software 4 Menu Software Management gt BS TRx Software They show the currently running versions of software as well as allow the software upgrade of individual or multiple BS TRxs BS TRx Software BRS TR 313237 30305t 100271 25 07 2007 13 ERPS TR 313237 303032 100272 25 07 2007 13 SEBS TR 313237 303033 100273 2507 2007 13 BS T amp 313237 303131 1002711 25 07 2007 13 uuumu ee FF 5007 2007 13 1 Total Detabase ttems 605 Total Loaded 6 RECS Eart Vies WENO AT sae meten moz Help IE 1898 382 1299 BS TRx 313237 303132 1002712 Click any item on the list double click item or click manage button to open the Software Tab
220. es the alarm has cleared warning Minor Mirndeterminate e Alarm Type See Fault Management Alarms e Source ShelfID of the shelf e Alarm Information For alarm messages see Fault Management Alarms e Ack This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged e User Name of user e Last Received Time when alarm was last raised e Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised 212 Configuration Management Edit This gives additional alarm details including a history of that particular alarm See Alarm Details Acknowledge Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Release Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Release of an alarm indicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all Other Actions See Action Buttons 213 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Events
221. et successfully IIS started successfully NMS Server Management Operations completed SUCCESSFULLY on the local Server Press Enter to exit the program This attaches and activates the Netspan database files Netspan_Data MDF and Netspan_Data LDF found in C NMSBkpData Restoring Netspan using Database Restore method 1 The NMS SQL database restore files must be placed in the folder C NMSBkpData for this operation to be successful 2 Open the DOS command window and change the directory to that of the server change tool The default installation location of this is C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 Setup Setup ServerChange 3 At the command prompt type the following line gt setup serverchange exe A R M DBBR P C NMSBkpData NetspanDB_02_11 BAK 4 This will output the following lines NMS ServerChange utility v255 8 60 001 This executable is going to RestoreAndActivate the NMS Database on the Local Machine NMSServerName Do you want to continue Y N 5 Pressing Y will output the following lines Creating Log File NMS Services Stopped IIS Stopped ReStarted SQL Server NMSServerName SQL2005 successfully Starting database backup operation Existing database files backedup successfully to C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc Backup Files NetspanDB BAK Starting database restore operation Restoration of database file c nmsbkpdata netspandb_02_11 bak successful Database ver 255 8 60 001 ma
222. etected added reported by discovery service and web application BS TRx Deleted BS TRx deleted reported by web application 8 10 005 any above BSDU Connection State Change Change in BSDU connection state as detected by discovery service BSDU Added New BSDU detected added reported by discovery service and web application BSDU Deleted BSDU deleted reported by web application BSDU Provisioning Error BSDU provisioning error reported by provisioning service BSDU Reprovision BSDU re provision attempted reported by web application 375 Netspan Release 6 5 Shelf Connection State Changed Change in shelf connection state as detected by discovery service Shelf Added New shelf detected added reported by discovery service and web application Shelf Deleted Shelf deleted reported by web application Shelf Slot BS TRx Connection State Change in shelf connection state as detected by Change discovery service BS TRx Shutdown BS TRx trap reporting the BS TRx is shutting down BS TRx Temperature Change BS TRx trap reporting the temperature of one or more boards on the BS TRx has crossed the warning threshold GPS Comms Change BS TRx trap reporting loss restoration of comms to GPS module GPS Lock Change BS TRx trap reporting loss restoration of satellite lock on GPS module BS TRx Timing Frame Lock BS TRx trap reporting loss restoration of the 1pps timing frame lock BS TRx Carrier Sense BS TRx trap reporting detection
223. everity Severity First Raised Time initiated Acknowledged Time acknowledged Last Raised Last occurrence User Name Name of user acknowledging the alarm Alarm Count Number of Number of Raise Events Number of Comments User added comments BS TRx Obsai Link Failure Partial Alarm Type Properties ITU Event Type ITU Event Type Probable Cause Most likely cause of alarm Description Possible fix User Description User description Alarm History for Alarm ID Change Type Action taken Time Time and date Alarm Info Information on alarm Ack whether the alarm has been acknowledged or not User Name Name of operative acknowledging the alarm Actions e See Action Buttons for other buttons 383 Performance Management BS TRx Ethernet Stats BS TRx Ethernet Statistics Latest from each BS TRx Fiter No Filter 1979 Octets in Ucert Pits in 6 Discards in Errors in Ottete Cut Ucsst Pits Ot 91 3003650896 9914341 67479212 1585021605 4920120 95526187 430693 3487518372 85229535 194135112 1144372 2783430890 201408489 2450409145 896554627 6947902290 J un 12084361300 2286329 Total Database 7 Total Loaded bams Reload Export View Export All Paged 2 SaeS m et2 BS TRx Ethernet Statistics e Filter Filter by By Date Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week A list of current filters is displayed by clicking th
224. ext time the page is visited e Hyperlinks provide navigation to the management page or property page of each item e Icons show items that are unmanaged are offline or have alarms associated with them e Additional information such as the IP Address is available in tooltips o Management Page Mini Tree The Mini Tree has been updated to provide the following new features e Shelf and BSDU is shown in the hierarchy when present e Itis possible to navigate down the hierarchy if a button is shown This gives the next level in the hierarchy and provides links to the appropriate management page Software Upgrade o Introduction of r Download and Activate command for BS TRx SS and BSDU o As a consequence of this the status of r pending r in progress r completed and r retrying for this command are reported in r Upgrade categories list page and r Edit upgrade category page o Additional column introduced in software compact report to report r retrying state separately o Additional row introduced in software compact report to report on BSDU o Scheduling available in node specific management page multi node management page and software category pages Password Security o Improved Netspan password security with configurable security policy User can select one of 3 policies Basic Medium and High e Basic Security Policy is defined by what is implemented in Netspan SR5 This is a default policy
225. ey Management Profiles package is defined for the specific target hardware category The BS TRx Channels of different categories will not be able to have wrong profile assigned The exception is category not defined which is maintained for backwards compatibility purposes with older versions of Netspan databases Profiles of not defined category cannot be used for MicroMAX BS TRx Private Key Management Profiles oo Layout LE ree Hardware Auth EET Lifetime wtauk Trust for Category Lifetime 2 Cartitiogies Totsl Database teme 1 Total Losded tems 1 j Expod View Posed ste 20 Previtet 1 lott List o See Add Edit Private Key Management Profiles below Actions See Action Buttons Add Edit Private Key Management Profiles Add BS TRx Private Key Management Profile Name 3 Target Hardware Category medeine xy General Settings Default Authonsation Key Lifetime Default Trafic Encryption Key Lifetime Default Trust for Manufacturing Certificates Trusted _ gt Checking Certificates Validity Periods Not Checked Timers Custom Authorisation Grace Time TEK Grace Time Authorise Wait Timeout Reauthorise Wait Timeout Operational Wait Timeout Rekey Wait Timeout Name 330 BS TRx Profiles o Name Length 2 to 64 characters Allowed characters 0 to 9 Ato 2 2 _ o Target Hardware C
226. f any of the allowed BS TRx Channels it will result in the SS becoming uncontactable and a site visit may be required to restore service to the SS Allowed channels configuration Select to configure Restrict allowed channels Check box to open restriction selection Channel BSID Channel BSID Channel BSID Mask The BSID Mask is a user defined field that identifies which bits of the BSID require a match to enable the EasyST ProST to associate with the BS TRx By default a mask of 000000 000000 allows the SS to register with any BS TRx To restrict the BS TRxs that the SS can register on apply a mask examples are given below Example for defining a single base station with which the unit can communicate Assume that the operator wishes to limit the network entry of an EasyST ProST to a specific BS TRx with ID 20xAB5050123456 To enable this the following configuration must be performed BSID AB 50 50 12 34 56 BSID Mask FF FF FF FF FF FF this is limited to one 1 specific BS TRx Example for defining multiple base stations with which the unit can communicate The operator needs to set up a BSID plan in which it can identify for example three base stations together For example it can divide the coverage area into zones of four BS The zone number shall be 22 bits and the BS index within the zone shall be 2 bits If the operator wishes to limit the unit access to zone 30 then the configu
227. f messages the last message will say r Operations completed SUCCESSFULLY on the local Server Press Enter to exit the program This will complete Netspan Backup process Backing up Netspan using Database Backup method 1 Inthe NMS Server Manager go to Properties Database tab 2 Select the Method as Database Backup Restore 3 Select Action as Backup to backup Netspan database NMS Server Manager Properties Services Secunty Database Version Licence Database Transfer Method Attech Detech Database Bsckup Riestore Warning Importing ot Restoring a database uring this feature will delete the current NMS database in use on this server Action Backup C Restoe and Activate Activate Orly pr Directory ox File Name 5 ata El Execute 4 In the Directory or File Name Text box enter path name where you would like to backup Netspan Database 5 Press the Execute button This will open a DOS window and prompt to continue Y N Press r y to continue 6 After few lines of messages the last message will say r Operations completed SUCCESSFULLY on the local Server Press Enter to exit the program This will complete Netspan Backup process Restoring Netspan Database Netspan database can be restored using either the Attach method or Database Restore method This depends on the backup method used to backup Netspan database For restore to work successfully the resto
228. f the first two bytes of a MAC address are entered then all MAC addresses containing those bytes are returned e Is Not Equal To Does not match the data value e Data Value Choices are offered dependant on and appropriate to the filter type chosen Click the arrow to transfer value or add a value direct into the field e External Checking this box give access to secondary criteria 410 Server 411 Netspan Release 6 5 Export Export BS TRx and Service profiles may be exported as XML files These files can then be Imported into other deployments of Netspan To Export a File e Navigate to Server gt Export Export Make Selection Description My export Profile Category Bs TRX Profiles Selection By Assigned To BS TRXs BS TRx 85 slot 3 51 Channel Sector 010000 031051 tems Selected For Export SL Al mods corrected threshokis 51 473 SRa 0 Sau TOO 3 4GHz 10 CP1 16 no subcha O HiperMAX micro SMHz end 10Mz t 20 4 0 Sulu TOO HiperMAX check and tag SMetz r No SubChanneis 1L40 Tota Database ems Total Loaded tems 5 Paged e Description Enter descriptive text for profile to export this is a mandatory field e Profile Category Select the profile category BS TRx profiles or Service profiles e Selection Select the type of export to perform e By assigned to BS TRx selects all the profiles that have been assigned to a specific BS
229. f uplink frames using 16 QAM 3 4 modulation o Uplink Frame Data 64 QAM 2 3 Percentage of uplink frames using 64 QAM 2 3 modulation o Uplink Frame Data 64 QAM 3 4 Percentage of uplink frames using 64 QAM 3 4 modulation 392 Performance Management o Uplink Sub chanelisation 1 16 Percentage of uplink frames using 1 16 sub channelisation width o Uplink Sub chanelisation 1 8 Percentage of uplink frames using 1 8 sub channelisation width o Uplink Sub chanelisation 1 4 Percentage of uplink frames using 1 4 sub channelisation width o Uplink Sub chanelisation 1 2 Percentage of uplink frames using 1 2 sub channelisation width o Uplink Sub chanelisation Full Percentage of uplink frames using no sub channelisation o Last Read From BS TRx Time stamp of the last time a value was read from BS TRx o Last Changed Time stamp of the last time a value read from BS TRx changed from the previous read values Actions e See Action Buttons for other buttons 393 Netspan Release 6 5 SS Packet Counter Statistics SS Packet Counter Statistics Latest from each BS TRx Fiter No Filter 7 E Jenna 203 09 A0 04 09 30 C8 S Jenna 203 00 AD A CO 3E 0C S Jenna 203 D0 A0 CO 3E 94 S Jenna 203 DX A0 0A CU 66 95 S Jenna 203 DX 0 1 58 2 Total Database tems 19 Tote Loaded 5 Reload Export View Export AN Paged JV sze Eora Help SS Packet Counter Sta
230. fig table to support this feature o MAC Forced Forwarding is now available on MicroMAX As already available as part of VLAN configuration in MacroMAX and HiperMAX With MAC Forced Forwarding the BS is given the IP address of the traffic gateway Router and it learns the MAC address of the gateway ARPs in the uplink direction are not forwarded out of the BS instead the BS replies to the ARP giving the MAC address of the gateway Northbound Interface o New Fault Management web service to supports e Retrieval of active alarms e Allow acknowledge and editing of alarms o Create edit extensions to the service flow template and related items e g classifier templates Features of Release 6 0 that are also in 6 5 Change of Terminology For release 6 0 the term Base Station when it refers to hardware has been renamed BS TRx Base Station Transceiver This was renamed as base station has a broad range of meanings whereas BS TRx is specific to the actual transceiver HiperMAX Blade HiperMAX micro SDR and SCRT MacroMAX and MicroMAX The term Sector has been replaced with Channel to bring it more in line with standard industry terminology Note about the installation Netspan Release 6 5 Netspan server should be installed on dedicated server machine The configuration where Netspan shares hardware with other server application e g web sites is not supported The only allowed OS platforms Netspan can be installed on are Win
231. files o Name Description See Add Edit Service Product Properties Click the sign on a service product to display a list of service flows that make up the service product e Service Flow Description See Create Service Flows Direction Uplink Downlink Initial State This sets the initial status of the SS upon provision e Service Class Name Scheduling Type Traffic Priority Sublayer Type See Add Edit Service Classes Click the sign on a service flow to display a list of classifiers that make up a service flow e Classifier Name e Priority This sets the priority order for the rules to be applied with the highest priority overriding conflict with lower order priority rules e L3 Rules A checked box means L3 rules apply e L2 Rules A checked box means L2 rules apply Actions See Action Buttons 293 Netspan Release 6 5 Add Edit Service Product Properties Service Flows Service products are a collection of flows associated with the range of services offered Eg Note Configuration of a service flow in the uplink needs to be specified separately to a service flow in the downlink To add a service product e Select Service Products from the side menu e Select Add from the Service Products window Add Service Product identity Name Service Flow Template List Sa vice Cissa je E Traffic Priorit Identity Enter a meaning full Identity Name like Normal Untagged
232. filters No Filter m By Event Type m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e EJ Lists all criteria see Filters Events Events may be raised by e SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan e Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event tab shows the events stored in the database for the selected BS TRx e Event Name See Fault Management Event Types e Source The BS ID as set in the shelfcfg txt file on the BS TRx e Event Information For event messages see Fault Management Events e Received Time Time when event was last raised 250 Configuration Management BS TRx Channel Management Statistics Note See BS TRx release notes for details of statistics support The following BS TRx statistics are available from the channel management statistics tab HiperMAX HiperMAX micro Service Release BS TRx Air Interface Partially Usage Supported SS RF Statistics SS Modulation Statistics BS TRx Air Interface Counts For details of statistics see Performance Management section BS TRx Air Interface Usage BS TRx Air Interface Counts SS RF Statistics SS Modulation Statistics 251 Netspan Release 6 5 Multiple BS TRx Channel Management Use this feature to manage multiple BS TRx channels Use the mouse to select
233. fixed bandwidth slots on the uplink for an ST to transmit data at regular intervals The bandwidth should be used by the UGS SF however the final decision of which SF if any uses the bandwidth slot is made by the ST V VoIP Voice over Internet protocol W WiMAX WiMAX is a wireless industry coalition whose members are organized to advance IEEE 802 16 standards for broadband wireless access BWA networks 471 amp How to find out more about Airspan products and solutions span For more information about Airspan its products and solutions please visit our Web site www airspan com Or write to us at one of the addresses below We will be delighted to send you additional information on any of our products and their applications around the world Worldwide Headquarters Airspan Networks Inc 777 Yamato Road Suite 105 Boca Raton Florida 33431 4408 USA Tel 1 561 893 8670 Fax 1 561 893 8671 Airspan has offices in the following countries Europe Czech Republic Poland Russia United Kingdom Africa South Africa Americas United States Asia Pacific Australia China Indonesia Japan New Zealand Main Operations Airspan Communications Ltd Cambridge House Oxford Road Uxbridge Middlesex UB8 1UN UK Tel 44 0 1895 467 100 473
234. g only L2 Rules RF Stats Registered Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week By Date Shelf By Region Name By Site Name 409 Netspan Release 6 5 SS Air Interface Stats Registered Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week By Date SS Ethernet Stats Registered Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week By Date SS Modulation Stats Registered Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week By Date SS Packet Count Stats Registered Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week By Date SS Software By Hardware Category Subscriber Station By Hardware Type By Last Seen on Channel By Home Channel By Service Product Provision Failure Not Discovered Discovered Not Registered Registered By Custom Config Profile By Port VLAN Profile Subscriber Station By Product Code Inventory Check the Shareable box if this filter is to be made available to other users If the box is unchecked other users do not see this filter but the administrator can see all filters Click the add button to add criteria to the filter Creating Editing Criteria e Criteria Name User defined e Data Column Name Select the column in the database The list represents the available columns in the table for the entity type selected e Comparison Sets the rule e Is Equal To Is exactly as the data value e Is Like Contains the data value i e i
235. g parameters as defined in 802 16f that are configured for the specified SS o ProvisionCustomSS Provision an SS within the NMS with the specified provisioning properties The Provisioning parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the SS does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise the existing SS is updated o ProvisionCustomSSV2 Provision an SS within the NMS with the specified provisioning properties The Provisioning parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the SS does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise the existing SS is updated o ProvisionFixedSS Provision an SS within the NMS with the specified provisioning properties on the specified sector only The Provisioning parameters are restricted to those permitted in 802 16f If the SS does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise the existing SS is updated 459 Netspan Release 6 5 460 o ProvisionSS Provision an SS within the NMS with the specified provisioning properties The Provisioning parameters are restricted to those permitted in 802 16f If the SS does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise the existing SS is updated o Reprovision Resend the configuration information related to Provisioning for this SS to every Sector it has recently registered on Users can track the progress of this reprovisioning b
236. ge 10000 to 2147483647 us e Invited Ranging Retries Number of retries on inviting ranging requests Default 16 Allowed Range 16 to 65535 Application settings Application Settings 2nd Mgmt Connection Dnlk Serice Class Sample of Service Class z 2nd Mgmt Connection Uplk Serice Class Sample of Service Class BS TRx SFID Auto Allocation Disables e 2nd Mgmt Connection Dnlk Service Class Select required service class The second management channel automatically has priority 8 regardless of what has been set in the service class It s a good idea to set a reasonable MIR though e 2nd Mgmt Connection Uplk Service Class Select required service class e BS TRx SFID Auto Allocation Enable Disable MicroMAX Add Base Station 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profile Name Target Hardware Category MicroMAX MAC Messages General Settings DCD Interval DCD Transition 2 MAC frames UCD Interval 00 UCD Transition 2 MAC frames UL MAP Effectiveness Time Tproc 200 lps Numbered Timeout Settings T3 Registration Timeout T27 Idle Max Time Between Unicast Grants 10000 Ranging Settings Initial Ranging Interval 5 Name e Name Length 2 to 64 characters Allowed characters 0 to 9 A to Z a to 2 MAC Messages General Settings 328 BS TRx Profiles DCD Interval ms Time between transmission of DCD Messages Default Not Specified Allowed Range 0 to 10000ms DCD Transit
237. gement channel MAC Address MAC Address of BS TRx Main Supported MIBs MIBs Supported by this BS TRx Db Cache Changed At Time stamp of when database Cache was written to database SNMP Agent Manager VLAN ID SNMP management information Actions See Action Buttons Configuration Management SS Software This screen reports software status and is also used when upgrading software to the Subscriber Station Configure Software Download Hardware Categorylmage Type s EasyST Application New Values Old Values WV Specific Configuration Specific Configuration Use Hardware Category Global Configuration Request Download v 19 idle image FileSute Ma sx not set set Schedule iv Time Stat 0000 Time End 1200 Time Span 1200 hours minutes Date Stan 06 08 2007 Date End 06 08 2007 DateSpan 1 days IV Allow Edit Apply Current Software Status 102542 Ns pe E BOONQU POONG poo me 50230 pase Qe YTSXXNXYS_ Total Database Reme 1 Total Loaded 1 Update From Equipment Last Updated From Equipment 11 03 39 3j Last Loaded From Database 110358 Configure Software Download o Hardware Category Image Types Product Name o Use SS Specific Configuration Current Specification for this BS TRx o Use Product Global Configuration Specification for all products See Products o Allow Edit To enter new values for a specific configuration click Allo
238. ger o Refresh services Refreshes the services o Dependant services Shows all the services dependant on the service selected NMS Services Dependent NMS Discovery Seni NMS Discovery Service NMS Job Engine Service NMS Job Engine Service NMS Alaim Service NMS Alam Service NMS Event Serice NMS Event Serice NMS Archive Service NMS Archive Service NMS SwManager Service NMS SwManager Service NMS Statistics Service NMS Statistics Service o Dependant on Services Shows all the services dependant on the service selected 57 Netspan Release 6 5 58 Properties Shows the status and health of the services and allows individual services to be started and stopped e Services NMS SwManager Service Running Heatthy EJO NMS Statistics Service Runing Heathy Right click on a service name to reveal a shortcut menu to reveal further options for that service Dependant Services Depended On Services and to Toggle the Startup Type To stop an individual service uncheck the box next to the service name A confirmation dialog is displayed NMS Server Manager Stop NMS Provisioning Service AIRSPAN x V NMS Server Management Click Yes to stop the service e Security Click to reset password a warning confirmation message is displayed All logged on users will be affected as the IIS service is reset e Database See Server Change e Versio
239. gistrahion SS 00 40 04 C0 09 49 Exatusinto Nul ChanneleNut 5 Denegistration SS 00 A0 0A CO 08 49 Statusinto tew Status notitication Channe O0A004 100542 LESS Registration 55 00 A0 DA CO 05 49 Bistusinfo Nul Channei hal Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter By Event Type Exclude SS Events Raised in Last 5 Minutes Raised in Last Day Raised in Last Hour m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Lists all criteria see Creating Filters Events Events may be raised by o SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan o Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event tab shows the events stored in the database for the selected SS 183 Netspan Release 6 5 Statistics BE a a NN Een enum cece i oe semen DWaamcemx b eramen paoaactsaze m H 85 TRx Name Channel Name S Mac Adares o Statistic
240. h the Current Bank B and Bank A are displayed To access the Code Bank List 1 Access the Advanced page as described in Accessing the Advanced Page section 2 Inthe Advanced page select Code Banks List and click Select The Code Banks List page opens as shown below WIMAX Modem Management gnal Parameters Addresses NEA Log Advanced Gode Banks List Boot Loader Parameter Yalue Creation Date WED AUG 23 13 55 46 2006 This is a new format Booter application Current Bank Code Bank A Parameter Value Creation Date THU AUG 02 10 55 03 2007 Gode Bank B Parameter Yalue 5 0 18 0 Creation Date MON MAR 26 16 17 23 2007 Back 146 Configuration Management The parameters of the tables on the Code Banks List page are described in the table below Boot Loader Version version number of the Boot loader Creation Date the date this code was created a brief description of the code Current Bank Code Bank A version number of Code Bank A Creation Date the date this code was created a brief description of the code Code Bank B version number of Code Bank B Creation Date the date this code was created a brief description of the code 3 Click Back to return to the Advanced page 147 Netspan Release 6 5 Viewing Detailed Logs WiMAXWeb has detailed log traps and events that are generated by and received from the EasyST
241. hanged The last time a reading was different from the last Actions 390 e See Action Buttons for other buttons Performance Management SS RF Statistics RF Status Latest from each BS TRx BS Jenna 203 Sector Jenna 203 00 A0 04 30 8 5 BS Jenna 203 Sector Jenna 203 DXADOACOSEOC M pe 68 S Jenna 203 Sector Jenne 203 00 OA CO JEN Ig bs leg BS 203 Sector Jenna 203 bs iy SEES Jerna 205 Sector Jenne 203 DIADDACTSECO R gs ES n Fiter No Filter 3 69 Total Database tems 16 Total Loaded tems 5 Reload Export View Export AN Paged 7 Sme5 Previiext SS RF Statistics Filter Filter by Date Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week Registered A list of current filters is displayed by clicking the list button See Filters BS TRx Name BS TRx Name Channel Name Channel Name SS Mac Address SS MAC address Registered Indicates whether the SS is registered on the specified BS TRx Channel These counters are all reset when the BS TRx resets and counters for individual SSs are reset if the SS has been deregistered from the BS TRx for 3 days Mean CINR Uplink dB Mean CINR reported on uplink Mean RSSI Uplink dBm Mean RSSI reported on uplink Std Dev CINR Uplink dB Standard Deviation CINR reported on uplink Std Dev RSSI
242. hardware are displayed in the window HiperMAX HiperMAX micro 333 Netspan Release 6 5 334 Add Base Station Custom Configuration Profile Name Target Hardware Category defined Protocol eo Ranging Gackoff Start 2 2 Ranging Backoff End E gt Request Backoff Start D 2 Request Backoff End 4 2 Link Update Period 1000 ms Link Update Number of SSs 5 Min Ranging TOS 100 per sec Periodic Ranging Type Fast Downlink Map Period 1 ms Uplink Allocation Max Size 40000 byte Uplink Adjacent Allocations Gap 2 Downlink Preambles Use Ome ss Contention Period TTS 660 Ps initial Burst TTG 1340 Downlink Max Allocation Size 1530 byte Midamble Repetition Interval Disabled H Timing Source mema Transmission Frame Gap 600 Ps Protocol The ranging process establishes an appropriate connection for the SS Ranging Backoff Start Initial backoff window size for initial ranging contention expressed 2 to the power n Values of n range from 0 to 15 Ranging Backoff End Final backoff window size for initial ranging contention expressed 2 to the power n Values of n range from 0 to 15 Request Backoff Start Initial backoff window size for contention BW requests expressed 2 to the power n Values of n range from 0 to 15 Request Backoff End Final backoff window size for contention BW requests expressed 2 to the power n Values of n range from 0 to 15 Link Update Period Period between fa
243. have csv extension and can be directly open by Excel The log can be archived on request by clicking the Make Log Now button page The content of the log is as good as the information available in the place doing the log There is no intention to change software design to satisfy the requirements of the log Instead the log is used as an independent tool as is The columns in the user activity log are N OD Ui A WN HG Actions See Action Buttons Date and time Milliseconds Performed by user name or service name Action explicit string defining user action e g Visit DBCreate DBDelete Resource explicit string identifying resource e g BS TRx SS List BS TRx Instance string identifying resource instance e g Id 000000 003548 DBID 1 Status string defining status of the action e g OK Failed etc 401 Netspan Release 6 5 Trap Destinations Edit Trap destinations Edit Trap Destinations SNMP Trap Destinations NMS Server IP Address 10 0 60 104 Description IP Address MS Trap Destination Enabled Trap Destinations can be configured only on BSDUs and MicroMAXs The configuration system will not set them on other BS TRx This screen allows trap destinations to be named and set Trap destination configuration is applied globally to all BS TRx and BSDU Network Elements Enter IP address and destination port Check enabled to set 402 Server
244. have primary and secondary options to further refine results Two types of filters are available System Filters that are pre defined and User Defined Filters System filters Primary No Filter By Filter Creator By Filter Name By Filter Type By Not Sharable By Not System By Sharable By System Filter User Defined Filters Each user also has the option of being able to add define their own filters to the system Filtering power is then significantly increased when combining system and user filters together User defined filters can either be created afresh or cloned from an existing filter and then editing the properties of that filter 407 Netspan Release 6 5 Add Edit Filters Clone Add Filter To clone a filter select Server Filters from the side menu Select Item to be cloned from the list When selected the clone button becomes active Click Clone button To add a filter select Server Filters from the side menu Click Add button Add Filter Filter User Defined Filter Senice Class Criteria Column Name Comparer Calumn Yalue Total Database items Total Loaded Items Criteria fold Data Column Name Service Class Name Comparison fis Equal To Data Value Sample of Service Class old t of Service Clas External Vv Filter Add name and description Select the Type of filter Options are Pre defined filter Items
245. he previous read values Actions e See Action Buttons for other buttons 389 Netspan Release 6 5 SS Air Interface Statistics SS Air Interface Statistics Latest from each BS TRx Fiter No Filter zu Layout d 5 Name SSMacAdd ss Reguiered Ui Mint Situ Dowellnk Mast Sch Upink M _ Court Court Octet Co Total Database tems 0 Reload Export View Expon All Paged fv Sue Prev Next zoro export Filter Filter by Date Changed in Last Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week A list of current filters is displayed by clicking the list button See Filters BS TRx Name BS TRx name SS MAC Address SS Mac Address Registered Checked if registered These counters are reset when the BS TRx resets o Uplink Mgmt Sdu Count Uplink Management SDU counts o Downlink Mgmt Sdu Count Downlink Management SDU counts o Uplink Traffic Sdu Count Uplink Traffic SDU counts o Downlink Traffic Sdu Count Downlink Traffic SDU counts o Broadcast Sdu Count Broadcast SDU counts o Uplink Mgmt Octet Count Uplink Management Octet counts o Downlink Mgmt Octet Count Downlink Management Octet counts o Uplink Traffic Octet Count Uplink Traffic Octet counts o Downlink Traffic Octet Count Downlink Traffic Octet counts o Broadcast Octet Count Broadcast Octet counts o Last Read From BS TRx Last read from BS TRx o Last C
246. he schedule box is unchecked the request will be acted upon immediately o Allow Edit Check this box to enter new values for a specific configuration o Apply Click Apply to initiate action 223 Netspan Release 6 5 Current Software Status Content in this list is only displayed once a request has been initiated It summarize the request and progress of the download o Update From Equipment Gets software status information from equipment immediately If BS TRxs of different hardware category and images are selected the Hardware Category Image s drop down list will show the types selected When applying config it must be borne in mind that each item in the drop down must be selected and config applied in order for ALL the selected items to be configured The current configuration list shows only the items applicable to the current selection in the drop down list The Current Software Status list shows ALL the items that were selected 224 Configuration Management Multiple BS TRx Management Inventory As soon as a BS TRx is discovered by Netspan an entry is made in BS TRx table and the relevant inventory entries are automatically made in the BS TRx inventory table An overview of the active network inventory is shown as part of the Navigation menu The screen capture below shows the inventory for three BS TRxs Multiple BS TRx Management 3 BS TRxs Selection Hardware Softwa Seris Number ki 225 Netspan
247. he Check Boxes 6 Click OK 7 Click Next to start the Windows Components Wizard 8 Restart the Server IIS Installation is now complete 19 Netspan Release 6 5 Installing SQL Server2000 amp Service Pack 4 Installation of SQL is divided into 2 parts First a standard installation and then applying service pack 4 A Installation of SQL Standard Edition 1 Run setup exe you will see the following screen 2 Select Local Computer and click Next the name of the computer on which you want to create a new initance of SOL Server or modiy an tenting instance of SOL Server 3 Select Create a new instance for SQL Server or install Client Tools and click Next Cresto a New Inchallaton This option allows you to create new instance of SOL Server 2000 or instal Cent Tools on any supposed Operating Syster Lose ce 20 Installation 4 User Information type in the details as required in Name and Company and click Next Ente your name below It ie not necessary o ertet a company Q ne Lime 5 On Software License Agreement click Yes 2 Pleate read the License Agreement Piers the PAGE DOWN hey to see te rest of the agreement LICENSE AGREEMENT RVER UCENSE FOR MICROSOFT SQL SERVER PRODUCTS wil close To metal SOL accept Lu _ Enter the license key when requested you accept all the
248. his functionality ensures that the EasyST ProST establishes a communication link with authorized BS TRx s The BS TRx ID is a 48 bit long programmable user defined field identifying the BS TRx The most significant 24 bits are used as the operator ID This is a network management hook that can be used to restrict the EasyST ProST from performing network entry with a predefined base station or a group of base stations The BS TRx Mask is a 48 bit programmable user defined field that identifies which bits of the BS TRx ID require a match to enable the EasyST ProST to associate with the BS TRx o Example for defining a single base station with which the unit can communicate Assume that the operator wishes to limit the network entry of an EasyST ProST to a specific BS TRx with ID 0xAB5050123456 To enable this the following configuration must be performed e Base Station ID AB 50 50 12 34 56 e Base Station Mask FF FF FF FF FF FF this is limited to one 1 specific BS TRx o Example for defining multiple base stations with which the unit can communicate The operator needs to set up a BSID plan in which it can identify for example three BS TRxs together For example it can divide the coverage area into zones of four BS TRx The zone number shall be 22 bits and the BS index within the zone shall be 2 bits If the operator wishes to limit the unit access to zone 30 then the configured parameters must be e BS TRx ID AB 50 50 00 00
249. iable Transport Protocol any O hop protocol Layer Two Tunneling Protocol D II Data Exchange DDX Interactive Agent Transfer Protocol Schedule Transfer Protocol SpectraLink Radio Protocol Simple Message Protocol SM Performance Transparency Protocol CRTP Combat Radio Transport 434 Appendix Protocol Datagram 131 PIPE Private IP Encapsulation within IP 132 SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol 138 Unassigned 252 253 Use for experimentation and testing 254 Use for experimentation and testing 435 Netspan Release 6 5 IP Address Type The IP address Type is a type of Internet address Type Description unknown 0 An unknown address type This value MUST be used if the value of the corresponding Inet Address object is a zero length string It may also be used to indicate an IP address which is not in one of the formats defined below ipv4 1 An IPv4 address as defined by theInetAddressIPv4 textual convention ipv6 2 A global IPv6 address as defined by theInetAddressIPv6 textual convention ipv4z 3 A non global IPv4 address including a zone index as defined by the InetAddressIPv4z textual convention ipv6z 4 A non global IPv6 address including a zone index as defined by the InetAddressIPv6z textual convention dns 16 A DNS domain name as defined by the InetAddressDNS textual convention 436 Appendix QOS Working Examples Introduction This document is inte
250. ic Port fEnat ed Management On VLAN Disabled Port Port Mode Transparent Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Raw c Bridge Mode VLAN Port Mode VLAN Acceptable Frame Types Tagged Only 192 Configuration Management Allow Eda V Bridge Mode sx Reserved VLAN 1 VLAN ID4050 default resewed Management On VLAN Enaved Reserved VLAN2 VLAN ID4091 default reseved2 Management VLAN ID VLAN 1D4094 defaut mgmt Reserved VLAN3 VLAN ID4092 default resewed3 Port Mode VLAN Port Mac Address 00 01 A4A 00 00 0C Acceptable Frame Typas Tagged Only gt Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Made Check And Tag Ingress Filtering Enabled z Tagging Behaviour Taged sid Port VLAN Lists Member Set Excluded Set VLAN 100 IDx 100 VLAN ID1 SU ID 1 VLAN 101 10 101 102 MU 10 2 VLAN 102 ID 102 lt VLAN 104090 default reserved ID 4090 VLAN 104091 default reserved 10 4091 VLAN 104092 default reserved3 104092 VLAN 104093 default Port Vian ID 10 4093 d Bridge Mode VLAN Port Mode VLAN Acceptable Frame Types Tagged and Untagged PVID not supported untagged Available only for HiperMAX HiperMAX micro and MacroMAX Allow Edit V Bndge Mode Management On Traffic Port Management On VLAN Eu Management VLAN ID VLAN 102094 defaut mgmt Port Mode Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Acceptable Frame Types Untagged Ony Tagging Behaviour
251. ication number Time Time in Days Hours Minutes Seconds and Milliseconds since power up when the particular event was generated Informational Code Unique event code Brief description of trap or event 129 Netspan Release 6 5 Accessing the Advanced Page The Advanced page accessed from the Advanced menu is used for advanced configuration procedures such as software upgrade defining frequency channels defining associated base stations System information viewing Code Banks viewing detailed log viewing current connections information changing the User Name changing the Password maximum TX power settings IP mode settings Performance monitor LAN table management LAN table entries reset to default clear Log entries reset WiFi when WiFi enabled and restarting the unit This page is secured by login user name and password and therefore can only be accessed by authorized technicians The default Advanced page login parameters are as follows o User Name Admin o Password Admin In previous versions login parameters are User Admin and Password Airspan f Note The login parameters are case sensitive To access the Advanced page 1 Onthe menu bar click Advanced The Login page opens as displayed below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Login User Name Password 2 In the User Name field enter your user nam
252. ich the downloaded file has been transferred as shown below 135 Netspan Release 6 5 WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Code bank has been swapped from 0 to 1 effective after restart Back 11 To activate the downloaded file you need to restart EasyST ProST a Click the Back button to return to the Software Download page b Click Back to return to the Advanced page and then follow the restart instructions in Restarting the Unit When the restart process is complete the downloaded file becomes the active software version running on the EasyST ProST active software bank You can verify that the downloaded software version is active by opening the System page see Viewing Configuration Parameters On the System page the Software Version field should display the downloaded software version file number Zf Note Once you have downloaded the SW version file to the standby bank you can transfer i e swap the version file to the active bank at any time the SW version file remains stored in the standby bank even after powering off the unit 136 Configuration Management Defining Frequency Channels WiMAXWeb allows you to define frequency channels for uplink and downlink channels You can define a frequency band range and then define the channels that can be used in this range The EasyST ProST scans these defined channels to seek viable frequency channels one for uplink and
253. ier This value is set via the web interface IP Address IP address of BS TRx Managed Box checked if managed Connection State Current connection state of the BS TRx Provisioning State Current Provision state of the BS TRx Provisioning Changes Number of provision changes Discovered Node discovered Displays the discovery site allocated to the BS TRx Number of Registered SSs Displays the number of SSs registered on the BS TRx Site Name Site where the BS TRx is located Region Name Region where the BS TRx is located Shelf ID Shelf ID Shelf Physical Slot Shelf Physical Slot Description User defined Hardware Type Hardware Type Bridge Mode Bridge Mode Port Mode Port Mode Management VLAN ID VLAN ID for the management channel Main Supported MIBs Main supported MIBs Db Cache Changed At Time stamp of when database cache was written to database Actions See Action Buttons Configuration Management Add Edit BS TRx Add BS TRx Add BS TRx General Properties First Channel BSIO 000000 VV Create First Channel Name Description Region Auto Discovery Region Uist Auto Discovery Site SNMP Properties Alowedt 31 FR IP Address Port SNMP Version SNMPv2c SNMP Read Community public SNMP Write Community pnvate 187 Netspan Release 6 5 Edit BS TRx For a discovered BS TRx the following will be displayed Actual content of bridge and network
254. iers See also IP Address Type e Source IP Addr Defines a specific source IP address to which a QoS rule will apply If the referenced parameter is not present in a classifier this object reports the value of ipv4 e Source IP Addr Mask Defines a range of source IP addresses to which QoS rule will apply This object specifies the value of the IP Source Address required for packets to match this rule Default value 0 0 0 0 e Destination IP Addr Defines a specific destination IP address to which a QoS rule will apply e Destination IP Addr Mask This object specifies the value of the IP Destination Address required for packets to match this rule e Source Port Start This object specifies the low end inclusive range of TCP UDP source port numbers to which a packet is compared This object is irrelevant for non TCP UDP IP packets Default value 0 e Source Port End This object specifies the high end inclusive range of TCP UDP source port numbers to which a packet is compared This object is irrelevant for non TCP UDP IP packets Default value 65535 e Destination Port Start This object specifies the low end inclusive range of TCP UDP destination port numbers to which a packet is compared This object is irrelevant for non TCP UDP IP packets Default value 0 e Destination Port End This object specifies the high end inclusive range of TCP UDP destination port numbers to which a packet is compared This object is irrelevant fo
255. iguration and Port VLAN Profile The provisioning of large number of SSs is time demanding hence it is done asynchronously User can watch the progress on the page or go to a different page while the operation continues Lists e Export to Excel of entire list of items SR5 offered only WYSIWYG list export e Use 100 of available space e Custom sorting IP address enumeration backed columns e Search has been added to list pages o Cleanup removed not implemented actions e Reset Channel no channel actions available at all e Delete SS Config SS action e Delete All SSs Config BS TRx action e Reinitialise MIB BS TRx action o During creation edit of service products it is now allowed to creates service flow templates with identical parameters except the service flow template name which needs to be unique within the service product as was the case before o SF Status added to Channel Management SF Status is now available from the Channel Management page in addition to the BS TRx Management and SS Management pages where is was previously available 11 Installation Installation Overview This document describes the entire installation process It is assumed that the reader is completely familiar with all aspects of Windows Server 2003 administration help on this is available in the Windows 2003 documentation or on the MSDN which is accessible from the Microsoft web site The only allowed OS platforms Netspan can be inst
256. igurations only 362 Software Management o User Name and Password These fields are only present for SS Images that come from an FTP server and the User name and password are as set in the FTP server Software Version Expected in the Image file o Software Version Enter in this field the software version that is contained in the image file Note It is important that this is correct if the s w version is wrong the download will continually re try and the user will never see it successfully completed Software Image File Suite 1 Setup the Software Image File Suite this brings together the images to be downloaded It will be referenced by individual nodes BS TRx or SS or by the Upgrade Categories to perform a system wide upgrade Software Image Suites Name ascnphon Se p Software Ser Server Version z Typ Address File Info Name Image Type 1 Ti tide Remo Prev 1 Heti 2 Click Add to add a new software image file suite Add name select Product Category Image Click on software type in list and the click Edit Select file configuration and apply Add Software Image Suite General Properties Name jos 011 Description Product Category Imaga s not defined OS Apphcation SCRT SecurityCertficates Currently Assigned File Configurations To Software Types Software Type Software File Configuration os Application Peisecurity Certificates Total Database Items 4 Total Lo
257. ils Details as provided by BS TRx o Standby Version This version is either a new downloaded version or a version that was previously in the primary bank but has been moved to standby o Standby Details Details as provided by BS TRx o Registered Channel Registered Channel o Reported State Current status of BS TRx software o Reported State details Reported state details o Reported State Last Retrieved At Last status update o Home Channel Home Channel 349 Netspan Release 6 5 The Table below shows the possibilities for the contents of the Running Version Primary Version Standby Version fields in Netspan Section A shows the normal situation where version 1 is being replaced by version 2 and section B show the circumstance where further software version 3 is downloaded before the customer has rebooted to the version 2 SS has been reset to V2 z Actions o Manage Opens the Subscriber Station Management page See Action Buttons for other buttons 350 Software Management Software Configure Software Download Hardware Category Image Type s defined No Images New Values Old Values F Specific Configuration F Specific Configuration Request ia Image File Suite o1 se zi F Allow Edit Current Software Status Hordwore c Latest Request NMS State Scheduled Start Dete Date Start Tee Ene Time Total Database tems0 Total Loaded items
258. imeout Set to 5000ms e Preferred SNMP Protocol Select version being used Discovery Target Communities and Ports e Write Community Set to Private The community should be the same value as set in the SNMP file during installation e Read Only Community Set to community name or Public for open access and click Add to append to list of communities To remove a community select on the list and click Remove The community should be the same value as set in the SNMP file during installation e Port Set to the port to be used The port number is whatever is set in the SNMP file Click Add to append to list of ports To remove a port select on the list and click Remove Discovery Target IP Address Ranges e Discovery Target IP Address Ranges Displays the address ranges for the devices that will be added to the discovered network list IP addresses outside that range will not be added e Exclude IP addresses not reported by BS TRxs on a SS discovery task only The IP addresses of SSs that are reported by BS TRxs will be tried for SS SNMP discovery other SSs 398 Server that may lie within the selected IP range but not reported by the BS TRx will not be discovered If this checkbox is not checked all IP addresses in the given IP ranges will be tried Normally BS TRxs would report the IP addresses of SSs So you can exclude IP addresses in the IP ranges that are not reflected by BS TRx report to speed up trying valid SS IP addre
259. imum sustainable rate will depend on the packet size This parameter specifies the minimum tolerable rate for this service flow Minimum Tolerable Traffic Rate Minimum Tolerable Traffic Rate R bits sec with time base T sec means the following Let S denote additional demand accumulated at the MAC SAP of the transmitter during an arbitrary time interval of the length T Then the amount of data forwarded at the receiver to CS in bits during this interval should be not less than min S R T Tolerated Jitter ms Defines the maximum variation in packet delay associated with a Service Flow The maximum and minimum tolerable jitter can be any number but will depend upon application requirements using the service flow For example VoIP services will require a tighter specification of jitter than web browsing This parameter defines the Maximum delay variation jitter for the connection Max Latency ms Defines the maximum delay through the BS TRx from a packet arriving through to transmission This is the max time the buffer will hold onto the packet before it gets discarded If you set the max latency to less than the Scheduling Poll Period then it depends on when exactly the packet gets received as to whether it gets discarded The maximum and minimum latency can be any number but will depend upon application requirements using the service flow For example VoIP services will require a tighter specification of latency than web browsing The
260. ing SS select the SS entry from the grid Click the configure button or Edit button to open the configuration screen My Subscribers Filter To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary Secondary 95 Netspan Release 6 5 By Port VLAN Profile Name Discovered Not Discovered Not Registered Provision Failure Registered e d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e 9 Lists all criteria see Creating Filters e Alarm Status in order of increasing severity normai Previous alarm has been cleared warning Minor Mb indeterminate Netspan has been unable to determine alarm severity List For details of the My Subscribers list see Subscriber Station Actions See Action Buttons 96 Configuration Management Add Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning To open this page either enter a MAC address for a new SS and click the configure button on this case the title of the page is Add instead of edit or click and existing SS in the Subscriber Provisioning page and click edit Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning MAC Address 00 0 0 0 2 28 e on Service Senice Product SGOPsSNL s Custom Contig Profle NewRFCO mmc H Pot VLAN Prosle VLAN PVID 60 FramelypsUmagi
261. ing required by the operator user AS MAX MacroMAX MicroMAX HiperMAX HiperMAX Micro BSDU Netspan EasyST and ProST are brands of Airspan Networks Inc General Revisions 01 25 9 Initial Document 2005 02 18 10 Updated for v69 8 00 004 2005 A 23 11 Updated for v69 8 00 005 2005 23 11 Updated for v69 8 10 013 SR1 4 2005 7 6 3 2006 Updated for v69 8 10 013 SR1 5 1 4 2006 Updated for v69 820 011 SR2 0 14 11 Updated for V5 8 30 013 SR3 0 2006 12 12 Updated for V5 8 30 016 SR4 0 2006 31 01 V5 8 60 008 566 5 2008 3 1 2007 V5 8 30 016 SR5 0 4 4 2007 V5 8 40 009 SR6 0 31 01 V5 8 60 008 SR6 5 2008 467 Netspan Release 6 5 Notes Any product performance limits stated within this document are for information purposes only and should be considered as indicative 468 Glossary A AAS Adaptive antenna system see Introduction for further details AP Access point API Application programmers interface ATCA Advanced telecommunications computing architecture BE Best effort scheduling service for requesting uplink bandwidth BER Bit error rate BS Base Station BS TRx Base Station Transceiver Equipment Definition The entity with single management stack It consists of one or more BS TRx Channels BS TRx Channel Base Station Transceiver Channel Definition The entity representing a single 802 16 MAC Phy interface as defined in 802 16 2 004 standard BSID Base Station Identifie
262. ing the direct Web browser of the BS TRx This feature is not available for MicroMAXBS TRx Configuration For Q in Q Mode The IEEE 802 1Q in Q VLAN Tag is purpose to expand the VLAN space by tagging the tagged packets thus producing a double tagged frame The expanded VLAN space allows the provision certain services such as Internet access on specific VLANs for specific customers and yet still allows the service provider to provide other types of services for their other customers on other VLANs Generally the service provider s customers require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications Customers can use this feature to safely assign their own VLAN IDs on subinterfaces because these subinterface VLAN IDs are encapsulated within a service provider designated VLAN ID for that customer Therefore there is no overlap of VLAN IDs among customers nor does traffic from different customers become mixed Reuse Group When adjacent sectors share the same channel different reuse groups are set for each sector SSs that can see both sectors will only sign on to one sector Reuse groups can be disabled or set to either Group A or Group B Support For New MicroMAX Features o Clearest Channel Choice CCC BS TRx Netspan CCC configuration support has been added o Subchannelisation is now supported by MicroMAX BS TRx and enabled in Netspan o Scheduler defines scheduling priority or WFQ Netspan introduces an extra property in BS TRx custom con
263. ings amp 14KB Text Document 28 03 2005 14 02 ef wes ReadmeSal2k325 163KB HTML Document 03 05 2005 21 27 amp C Inetpub M redist txt 29KB Text Document 28 03 2005 14 02 amp 7 Program Files E setup bat 1KB MS DOS Batch Fie 20 10 2002 15 21 Sy SQUIKSPA jui smssqizksps pat 1 POF Fie 03 05 2005 21 27 m DSP frt Free space 34 1 GB bos Em Computer 28 Installation 15 END of Installation 29 Netspan Release 6 5 Installation Steps for SQL Server 2005 If the server to be upgraded already runs a Netspan version using SQL Server 2000 DO NOT UNINSTALL SQL SERVER 2000 before installing SQL Server 2005 Netspan s installation program needs the two products to run side by side in order to automatically migrate the database from SQL Server 2000 to 2005 The migration is handled in the section Server Installation Run the executable from your installation DVD End User License Agreement Accept the Licensing terms and click Next Microsoft m Server 2005 Setup Installing Prerequisites os cnim coton ma Bid pic ooi arver Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Setup Support Files Click Next 30 Installation System Configuration Check Wait while the system is checked for potential installation 15 Click Next On the Next Screen enter your company name and your name and click Next 31
264. ion o VOIP Qos profile See BS TRx VOIP Qos Profile o Unlicenced Channel MicroMAX only Unlicensed channel profile for dynamic frequency switching Click List to open the Unlicensed Channel list Actions See Action Buttons 239 Netspan Release 6 5 Commissioning The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific hardware are displayed in the window HiperMAX HiperMAX micro and MacroMAX New Values Downlink Channel Tx Diversity Custom STC Mode 2 so J Licensed Band Unlicensed _ gt Unlicensed bd Channel Number m EIRP n Transmitter State Custom Enabled Tx Power Custom 025 Uplink Channel Rx Diversity Custom Frequency Initial Ranging Max EIRxP Rx Level Set Point Custom Penodic Ranging Set Point Spread Custom Initial Ranging Set Point Spread Custom Rx Gain RF Custom Allow Edit Arbarary Units Apply Validate Last Updated 23 07 2007 15 43 36 Screen capture showing arbitrary units box checked New Values Downlink Channel Tx Diversity Custom src Made 2 Off Licensed Band Unlicensed jnbconsed Channel Number EIRP Transmitter State Custom Tx Gain Chan A Custom arbitrary units Tx Gain Chan B Custom arbitrary units Uplink Channel Rx Dwersity Custom Frequency Initial Ranging Max EIRxP Periodic Ranging Set Point Spread Custom Initial Ranging Set Point Spread Custom Rx
265. ion MAC frames The time the BS TRx shall wait after repeating a DCD message with an incremented configuration change count before issuing a DL MAP message referring to uplink burst profiles defined in that DCD message Allowed Range 2 to 65535 MAC frames UCD Interval ms Time between transmission of UCD Messages Allowed Range 0 to 10000ms UCD Transition MAC frames The time the BS TRx shall wait after repeating a UCD message with an incremented configuration change count before issuing a DL MAP message referring to downlink burst profiles defined in that UCD message Allowed Range 2 to 65535 MAC frames UL MAP Effectiveness Time Tproc us Time provided between the last bit of a UL MAP at an SS and effectiveness of that MAP in us Numbered Timeout Settings T9 Registration Timeout ms The time allowed between the BS TRx sending a RNG RSP success to an SS and receiving a SBC REQ from the same SS Default 30000ms Allowed Range 300 to 65535ms T27 Active Max Time Between Unicast Grants ms Maximum time between unicast grants to SS when BS TRx believes SS uplink transmission quality is not good enough Default 5000ms Allowed Range 10 to 2147483647 ms Ranging Settings Initial Ranging Interval ms Time between initial ranging regions assigned by the BS TRx Default 5 Allowed Range 0 to 2000 ms Actions See Action Buttons 329 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Private Key Management Profiles BS TRx Private K
266. ion for this channel To rectify select the Manual Re Provision option for this SS Loss in communications is normally due to a temporary network condition and will typically clear automatically To rectify try reprovisioning currently trap destination only Loss in communications is normally due to a temporary network condition and will 379 Netspan Release 6 5 Shelf Slot BS TRx Connection Fault BS TRx Shutdown BS TRx Temperature High GPS Lost Comms GPS Lost Satellite Lock BS TRx Timing Frame Lock Lost BS TRx Carrier Interference BS TRx Obsai Link Failure partial BS TRx Obsai Link Failure all BS TRx RF Transceiver Fault partial BS TRx RF Transceiver Fault all Multiple BS TRxs claim the same Shelf Slot The BS TRx has been manually reset has a software error or is too hot The BS TRx temperature has exceeded the warning threshold The BS TRx has lost comms with the GPS module The BS TRx GPS module has lost timing lock with satellite s The BS TRx has lost timing lock with external GPS timing source The BS TRx has detected a high level of interference on the carrier At least one OBSAI link between the SDR and SCRT has failed The OBSAI link between the SDR and SCRT has failed At least one transmitter has been disabled due to detection of a fault The BS TRx transmitter has been disabled due to detection of a fault typically clear automatically
267. is attached e Region Name Region to which the channel is attached e Description User Defined e Burst Profiles See BS TRx Burst Profiles Packages e Pkm Profile See BS TRx Private Key Management Profiles e Protocol Configuration Profile See BS TRx 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profile e Ofdm Profile See BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profiles e Custom Configuration Profile See Custom Configuration e Subchannelisation See Subchannelisation e Voip Qos Profile See BS TRx VOIP Qos Profile e Licensed Checked if licensed See Unlicensed Channel e Downlink Centre Frequency Downlink Center Frequency kHz e Channel Number Downlink Channel Number e Tx Enabled Checked if enabled e EIRP dBm Effective isotropic radiated power e Target TX Power Desired TX power in dB e Achieved TX Power Actual TX power in dB e Uplink Center Frequency Downlink Center Frequency kHz e Max EIRxP for Init Ranging dBm Maximum Effective isotropic radiated power for initial ranging e Rx Level Set Point dBm See BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profiles e Target RX Gain Desired RX gain in dB e Achieved RX Gain Actual RX gain in dB e TX Diversity O disabled 1 enabled e RX Diversity 0 disabled 1 enabled e DB Cache changed at Time cache changed e Unlicensed Channel Displays unlicensed channel if set 232 Configuration Management Actions See Action Buttons Auto refresh Chec
268. is feature when applying a change to more than one subscriber station at a time Select the SSs to be changed from the Subscriber Station list Click the edit button The selected SSs appear in the list at the top of the screen Multi Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning 2 Subscriber Stapans In Selection Y Descnption 7 In Serice Yes Serece Product Sample of Serece Product Config Profile Sample of SS Custom Configuration VLAN Port Profile Sample of SS VLAN Port Untagged Only bd 2 Service Allowed Channel Channel 313238 303031 Registration Allowed Channels Allowed channels configuration Restrict allowed V channels Channel BSID 313238 303031 Channel BSID Mask OF0000 F FFF FO Channel 313236303031 Channel 313238303032 Selected Channels Channel 313238 303033 Enabled v F SNMP Properties Port SNMP Version Read Community Public Write Community Private Timeout sooo OK Cancel Validate Reload Help Description o Description 1 5 User defined Service o Service Enabled Places the SS in service o Service Product Select Service Product from drop list See Service Products o Config Profile Select from drop list See SS Custom Configuration o Port VLAN Profile Select from drop list VLAN Configurations o Service Enabled Yes in service No out of service o Service Allowed Channel Use to select the service channel for this SS Any set for nomadic use
269. isplay the SNR RSSI and Channel Coefficients of the WiMAX radio interface 4 Click Select Downlink Channel Statistics are displayed as shown below Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without viewing the statistics 159 Netspan Release 6 5 WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Downlink Channet Statistics umber of Samples 1365 v 3 4 2 34 44 42 14 30 44 62 73 94 110 724 142 153 174 195 RSSI of Sampies 944 Ld n L s Regular Zone Channel Coefficients Error Rate ow Average siR 130 208 emanes 27 008 SNR jade The graphs displayed on the Downlink Channel Statistics are described in the table below Description Pe Displays the SNR statistics collected incrementally since Power up of the CPE 557 Displays the RSSI statistics the received signal strength 160 Configuration Management Channel Displays the sub channel statistics fficient Coefficients The performance monitor presents a graph of channel coefficients magnitude vs subcarriers These statistics are based on modem calculation for every one of the 192 data subcarriers SW takes this data into account and changes DL modulation and other parameters according to it Using this graph user can Display the level of frequency selective fading in the link Display how difficult th
270. isplayed in the window HiperMAX HiperMAX micro and MacroMAX General Properties BS TR BS TRx 313237 303130 Sequential Number 1 Channel BSIO Name Description Profiles Burst Profiles Package Channel not 6 Protocol Configuration gf Private Key Management nts Custom Configuration Profile ois JEE SubChannelisation Package custom E EEE E Voip Qos Profile 9 MicroMAX General Properties BS TRx BS TRx 313238 303131 Sequential Number Channel 8510 Name Chamel3i327 838301 00 AEN Profiles Burst Profiles Package Ofdm Channel 9 Protocol Configuration nist f ferm M Custom Configuration Profle x Voip Gos Profile raw ee Unlicensed Channel not sat Edit General Properties o BS TRx See BS TRx Channels o Sequential Number See BS TRx Channels o Channel BSID See BS TRx Channels o Name See BS TRx Channels o Description See BS TRx Channels Profiles o Burst Profiles Package See BS TRx Burst Profiles Packages 238 Configuration Management o Phy Settings Test See BS TRx OFDM Channel Configuration Profiles o Protocol Configuration See BS TRx 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profile o Private Key Management See BS TRx Private Key Management Profiles o Custom Configuration Profile See Custom Configuration o SubChannelisation Package Custom See Subchannelisat
271. iven BS TRX j Validate To edit a profile check the box next to the profile list and select the new profile When OK is clicked only those profiles that are checked will be changed Of the selected channels changes will be applied only to channels of Managed BS TRxs Custom profiles will be configured on the equipment only if supported by given BS TRx General Properties o Description User Defined Profiles o Burst Profiles Package Select from drop list Click List to open the Burst Profiles Packages list o Ofdm Channel Select from drop list Click List to open the OFDM Channel list o Protocol Configuration Select from drop list Click List to open the Protocol Configuration Profile list o Private Key Management Select from drop list Click List to open the BS TRx Private Key Management Profiles list o Custom Configuration Select from drop list Click List to open the Custom Configuration list o SubChannelisation Package custom Select from drop list Click List to open the Subchannelisation list Not supported on MicroMAX o Voip Qos Template custom Select from drop list Click List to open the BS TRx Voip Qos Profile list o Unlicensed Channels MicroMAX only Unlicensed channel profile for dynamic frequency switching Click List to open the Unlicensed Channel list Actions See Action Buttons 236 Configuration Management BS TRx Channel M
272. k User 1 FY 427 Lost Comes BSDU 010000031049 BSDU Connection State NoComms x x Ili Total Catabase teme Total Loaded tems 1 Est Ri RE J Expot View EXpon AW Paged fe sue wort e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters EIE No Filter Acknowledged By Alarm Type m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e Eg Lists all criteria see Filters e Alarm Status in order of increasing severity Normal Indicates the alarm has cleared warning Minor A indeterminate e Alarm Type See Fault Management Alarms e Source The MAC address of BSDU e Alarm Information For alarm messages see Fault Management Alarms e This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged e User Name of user e Last Received Time when alarm was last raised e Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised 281 Netspan Release 6 5 282 Edit This gives additional alarm details including a history of that particular alarm See Alarm Details Ack
273. k box to initiate auto refresh 233 Netspan Release 6 5 CAdd Edit BS TRx Channel Add Edit BS TRx Channel Edit BS TRx Channel Provisioning General Properties 6 BS TRx BS Kar 3 Sequential Number M Channel BSID 000000 006093 Name Sector Karol 93 Description 4 n Profiles Burst Profiles Package S3 Ma y Of m Channel SRE1A Mac 175M 100 6C amp Protocol Configuration 5815 Mc amp Private Key Management ssi Mc g Custom Configuration Profile SR61 A Mac 175F 108 93190 I x SubChannelisation Package custom Ren amp Voip Qos Profile feasa gg OK Cancel Validate Reload Help General Properties o BS TRx Select from list o Sequential Number Read only generated by Netspan o Channel BSID User defined o Name User Defined o Description User Defined Profiles o Burst Profiles Package Select from drop list Click List to open the Burst Profiles Packages list Click edit to edit the selected profile o Ofdm Channel Select from drop list Click List to open the OFDM Channel list Click edit to edit the selected profile o Protocol Configuration Select from drop list Click List to open the Protocol Configuration Profile list Click edit to edit the selected profile o Private Key Management Select from drop list Click List to open the BS TRx Private Key Management Profiles list Click edit to edit the selected profile o Custom Configuration P
274. k old are purged so that only the 1st record in every day remains Statistics over 12 weeks old are deleted The following BS TRx statistics are available HiperMAX HiperMAX micro Service Release BS TRx Ethernet Statistics BS TRx Air Interface Usage BS TRx Air Interface Counts SS Ethernet Statistics SS RF Statistics SS Packet Counts SS Modulation Statistics For details of statistics see Performance Management section BS TRx Ethernet Stats 216 BS TRx Air Interface Usage BS TRx Air Interface Counts SS Ethernet Stats SS Air Interface Stats SS RF Stats SS Modulation Stats SS Packet Counter Statistics Configuration Management 217 Netspan Release 6 5 Multiple BS TRx Management Use this feature to manage multiple BS TRxs The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific hardware are displayed in the window BS TRxs Fiter No Filter BS scorch Connechor Provision Provision Adores Managed State d Changes d Discovered L 0080 91 005083 _ Auto Refresh 1 minute Hep Use the mouse to select more than one BS TRx from the BS TRxs list Then click the manage button The management screen shows a list of the selected BS TRxs Click the Tabs to view the different management screens Multiple BS TRx Management 3 BS TRxs In Selection Name BSD
275. l period in seconds Actions See Action Buttons 314 SS VLAN Port SS VLAN Port Subscriber Station VLAN Port Profiles This window lists the Subscriber Station VLAN Port Profiles o Name User defined o Description User defined o Port Mode Shows Raw or VLAN o Acceptable Frame Types VLAN tagging types o VLAN Port ID Port ID number o Import Description Information on import Actions See Action Buttons Service Profiles 315 Netspan Release 6 5 Add Edit a SS VLAN Port Profile Port VLAN Configuration The VLAN Port profiles will differ dependant on bridge mode and VLAN options chosen Set out below are the different VLAN Port Profile screens displayed for different VLAN configurations a Port Mode Transparent Port VLAN Configuration oo Port Mode Transparent Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Rw b Port Mode VLAN Frame Types Tagged Only Add Subscriber Station VLAN Port Profile Name Description Port VLAN Configuration Port Mode VLAN Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Check And Tag Acceptable Frame Types Tagged Only gt Tagging Behaviour Ingress Filtering En abled a Port VLAN Lists Mernber Set Excluded Set 100 ID 100 VLAN 101 ID 101 fgg VAN 102 0 102 VLAN 200 1D 200 VLAN 0 41 ID 60 IVLAN B1 ID 61 vede Reload c Port Mode VLAN Frame Types Tagged and Untagged PVID 1 lt PVID lt 4094 e g PVID
276. l uplink gain At present prefer full bandwidth is the only management scheme that can be configured because other schemes such as prefer subchannelisation where decreasing modulation causes subchannelisation to be imposed first and then only when 1 16th bandwidth is reached is more robust modulation selected require the ability to enter negative values for the burst profile thresholds and this is not currently supported by Netspan Burst Profiles Packages OFDM Channel Configuration Profiles Add BS TRx Subchannelisation Base Station SubChannelisation Package Name SubChannelisation 180506 Definition oo Total Database tems 5 Total Loaded Items 5 OK Cancel Validate Reload Help Select the allowable sub channelisation bandwidth by checking the appropriate boxes to align with the network strategy It may be decided for example to allow only Full and one sixteenth to ensure that both channelised SSs and non channelised SSs are catered for or all levels of subchannelisation may be set o Mandatory Exit Threshold Sets the level at which the channelisation will exit to the next level o Mandatory Entry Threshold Sets the level at which the channelisation will enter from the previous level The following values will give a realistic example of the thresholds that should be configured in order to implement a prefer full bandwidth scheme of bandwidth management This is the scheme where decreasing SNR causes a change t
277. lay Agent Mode Of Custom Properties Single User F MAC Forced Forwarding MAC Forced Forwarding IP Address 0000 Broadcast Service Class 256k Normal Prionty l 162 Service Product Service products are a template of a service offering based on a grouping of service flow definitions To add a service product Select Service Products from the side menu Select Add from the Service Products Window Enter a meaningful Identity Name like Normal Untagged and a brief description Select Add from the Add Service Products window Create a Service Flow Template by clicking Add on the Service Flow Template List Separate Service flows need to be created for both the Uplink and the Downlink See Create Service Flows e Downlink Give a meaningful descriptive name like Downlink Normal Untagged Set service class to Normal Traffic Set direction to Downlink Initial State Active Convergence Sublayer Type Packet 802 3 Ethernet Leave the Packet Classifier as default Click OK to set e Repeat above for uplink clicking Add on the Service Flow Template List Give a meaningful descriptive name like Uplink Normal Untagged Set service class to Normal Traffic Set direction to Uplink Initial State Active Convergence Sublayer Type Packet 802 3 Ethernet Leave the Packet Classifier as default Click OK to set Click OK to add the service flow to the service product Be
278. le for details of fields Actions See Action Buttons 312 Service Profiles Add Edit Custom Configuration Profile Add Subscriber Station Custom Configuration Profile Name Descnption 4 Application oo Max Number of Network Hosts Downlink Adaptive Modulation SNR Configuration Enabled Disabled Alpha Low 768 Alpha High B2 Protection Margin dB Hysteresis Margin B Custom Properties Dynamic Semces Allow Change Allow Delete Requested Downlink Modulation Dynamic E Requested Uplink Modulation Oynamic E Minimum SubChannel Width Fui z RF Measurements Enabled RF Measurement Poll Period 60 s Identity Name User defined Description User defined Application Maximum number of Network Hosts Downlink Adaptive Modulation SNR Configuration Enabled Select from Disabled Enabled Alpha Low Leave as default Alpha High Leave as default Protection Margin dB Protection Margin Hysteresis Margin Switching margin Custom Properties Dynamic Services Select the services required Allow Allow Change or Allow Delete Requested Downlink Modulation Select modulation Requested Uplink Modulation Select modulation Minimum SubChannel Width Select sub channel width RF Measurements Enabled Check box to enable 313 Netspan Release 6 5 o RF Measurement Poll Period Sets the pol
279. lema of the licence Agwemart you choose No Setup 6 On Installation Definition screen select Server and Client Tools and click Next You can select one of the following types of installations Ghent Tooke Oriy Orly Thee option you to install a server and the chert took Use thes option you wart to set up server wih rac pas e ie ccm 21 Netspan Release 6 5 7 On Instance Name select Default and click Next a deish leave Delad checked and chck Newt To install ot marian a named imtance of SOL 8 On Setup Type select Typical and click Next if required Destination folder can be changed to another location it is advisable to leave it default Click the type of Setup you prefer then click Nest with the moit common opens Fiecommended for most user Irsct den vath tranumum vequred C Quiton You map choose the pou want to install Fiecommended for amp ivanced Desteaton Folder Progam Files Browne C Progam Files Microsoft SOL Server Data Fies Bome C Progam Fier Merosoft SOL Server Regured Space on progama dive VASK 35404772 V Space on tyitem dive 182917 35404772 Space on data drive WERK 36404772 K ome ge oue 9 On Services Accounts screen select Use the same account for each service Auto start SQL
280. lock Synchronisation Role Role of blade as reported by the blade Primary Master Manage GPS This checkbox allows the shelf to be a primary master Note this does not make the shelf a primary master that is determined by the physical cabling of the shelf Secondary Master GPS This checkbox allows the shelf to be a secondary master Note This does not make the shelf a secondary master that is determined by the physical cabling of the shelf Check the allow edit box to re assign the GPS management Actions See Action Buttons 201 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management State Auto Discovery SNMP Node Discovered Iv Supported MIBs IP Address 10025 167 MAC Address 00 01 AA 00 F5 Connection State On Line Last Changed At 13 07 2007 10 34 20 Provisioning State Statistics This window tracks scheduled provisioning tasks Auto Discovery SNMP e Node Discovered Checked if discovered e IP Address MAC Address IP MAC addresses of node e Connection State Current connection status e Last Changed at Time stamp of last update e Supported MIBs MIBs supported by this BS TRx Provisioning e State Current Status e Statistics e Source Type Statistics are collected for BS TRxs Channels Subscribers and All e All Changes New Changes In progress Awaiting Response Failed Status of BS TRx Actions Re provision The Re provision button has an associated drop down which
281. lt hostid gt Netspan for a named machine on an intranet i e http NMS PC Netspan or o Connection on the Server machine i e http localhost Netspan not recommended Discover the Network The auto discovery system searches the network for WiMAX compatible devices on the network BS TRxs are automatically attached to an Auto Discovery Site but can be reallocated to named site at a later time if required To set up a discovery task see Discovery Task Service Provisioning within Netspan As shown in the diagram below Service Flows are assigned to a Subscriber Station by defining a Service Product Each Subscriber Station has a single Service Product to define the capacity and capability associated with the service delivered to each customer Within the IEEE 802 16 2004 standard a Service Product can define up to sixteen Service Flows which provisions the types of service web browsing VoIP FTP etc delivered via each Subscriber Station Detailed QoS specification is defined within the Service Class and the filters which tag a level of QoS to a particular flag or packet type is defined within the Classifier Rules A single QoS rule defined within the Service Class can be associated with one or more Classifier Rule s 78 Getting Started Qos Packet Filter Classifier Rules X1 or more Service Products Service Products Service Classes Subscriber Station Subscriber Station Subscriber Sta
282. lters By Event Type d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e c Lists all criteria see Filters Events Events may be raised by e SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan e Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event tab shows the events stored in the database for the selected BSDU e Event Name See Fault Management Event Types e Source SNMP port number e Event Information For event messages see Fault Management Events e Received Time Time when event was last raised 283 Netspan Release 6 5 Global SS Provisioning Global SS Provisioning Global SS Provisioning Subscriber Station Selection Semice Product 5830 Pass ALL Config Profile New RFC Dynamic VLAN Port Profile VLANs 60 99 ere are 7 SS s that match ServiceProduct SR3 0 Pass ALL Selection AND config template New RFC Dynamic AND port vlan template VLANs 60 99 New Configuration Serice Product SR3 0 Pass VLAN 13 with Priority Downlink F Config Profile RF C_Dynamic Check And Tag Ile VLAN Port Profile VLANs 33 34 35 36 Status Information m Last refreshed at 24 07 2007 15 55 57 Refesh This screen allows the user to provision new Service Products Configuration Profiles and VLAN Port Profiles Subscriber Station Sel
283. m the database 2 Backup the current version of Netspan database Copy the files located in C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 Database default into a backup directory 3 Start the server right click icon on menu bar and select MSSQLServer Start Restore or Re attach a Database Note If the database is to be attached to Netspan running on a different machine see attaching database to a different new Netspan server below Re Attach the Database 1 Start the server right click icon on menu bar and select MSSQLServer Start 2 Either 421 Netspan Release 6 5 If the current database is to be attached go to step 3 or If the backup database is to be used Copy the back up database files from the backup directory into the Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 Databaseand Rename the files Netspan_Data MDF and Netspan_Log LDF respectively 3 In the Enterprise Manager SQL Server Group Local Databases right click mouse Select All Tasks and then Attach Database 4 Browse to the Database Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 Database Netspan_Data MDF file x MOF file of databate to attach C Progr Fies oiiaii irc AGERET Persa APL g Venly Fio Custert Finis Location Data MDF w C Progum Tei AS EC Mer Log LOF w M ets nc AS BG 1f OK Cancel Hele 5 Check that the Netspan_Data M
284. mary N e m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e c Lists all criteria see Filters List e Hardware Type Hardware Type e MAC Address MAC Address of ST e Address IP address assigned to the ST e Registered Checked Registered e Service Enabled Checked Enabled e Service Product See Service Products e Configuration Profile Modulation Used e Port VLAN profile Port VLAN Profile 246 Configuration Management e Service Home Channel Channel selected as a home channel See Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning e Last Seen On Channel Last channel to have established a link with the SS e Provisioning Error Count Netspan will provision the SS on every BS TRx it is deemed to have been recently seen on unless constrained by the specification of a home BS TRx for that SS The Provisioning Error Count is the number of BS TRxs from this set on which there has been a failure to provision this SS e Description 1 5 User defined e Discovered Checked if SS has been discovered by a BS TRx e Discovered Status Changed At Displays the last time the discovery logged a change of status Actions See Action Buttons 247 Netspan Release 6 5 Management Alarms This tab shows the alarms Fiter No Filter Ar search Layat d Shelf A amp LITO 00 50 C2 44 1C 04 Sheit Connection State Onine Total Database tems
285. mary bank e Activate Activate will ensure that the version for activation ends up in the Primary bank provided it exists in any of the banks and then reset from it After reset BS now running new software In BS list Running Version field shows new version Note In any upgrade a request is made to Download the image and then another request is made to either Activate or Assign to Primary Software upgrade operation is provisioned by assigning a given Software Category When a profile is assigned Use this specific hardware category only given hardware will be upgraded When the profile is assigned to Use Hardware Category Global Configuration all hardware characterised by the given category will be upgraded The progress of SW upgrade can be monitored individually on the Software tab of BS TRx SS management page if you click reload frequently 361 Netspan Release 6 5 Software Upgrade Categories Detail Process Detail Software Images 1 Setup pointers to the software image locations for the BS TRx OS Application SCRT and Security Certificates as necessary for your hardware type On a new system Initially there are no Image Files defined Software Image Configurations Software Hiechvare Category Fils Server Version mage Type s EIERS 0 SCRT5_00_ 10500015 105 Application SCRT Security i i mes 0 5_00_0 10 5 00 015 lApgiicstion SCRT SecurtyCertific SCRT
286. mary for SS if required Click Apply 6 After swapping the Standby and Primary banks the Status changes to Rebooting Note SS only If Assign to Primary has been used for an SS the SS does not reboot and status becomes Idle 7 After rebooting the hardware will run the new code Note SS only If Assign to Primary has been used for an SS the SS does not reboot until the Subscriber resets the SS or the SS is reset from the SS Management Actions screen It is possible to have mixture of option 1 and option 2 to allow network wide upgrade with some equipment specific upgrade where overridden individually on Manage Software tab on individual BS TRx or SS 367 Fault Management Events BS OXAROA CO 20 2 response Channels 0000 060193 BS TR 010000 060193 FremeLockStatus IockedToOps t pos ClockDetectededetectes pps 3S TRx 010000 060133 ifldex T jAdminStatus up OperStatussu BS TRx 010000 060133 ithdex7 jAdminStstu BSTR O1000006003335 500 202 55 00 00 1 0612 BBS TRx 010000 060193 hes BS TR 010000 060133 i Expos View Expr A Filter Select the filter from the drop down list Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged Primary No Filter By Event Type Events Events may be rai
287. match the rule Range 0 to 4095 e VLAN User Priority Low Limit This object applies only to Ethernet frames using the 802 1P Q tag header Tagged Ethernet packets must have a 3 bit Priority field within the range of the low and high limit This field sets the Low Limit Range O low to 7 e VLAN User Priority High Limit This object applies only to Ethernet frames using the 802 1P Q tag header Tagged Ethernet packets must have a 3 bit Priority field within the range of the low and high limit This field sets the High Limit Range to 7 high Payload Header Suppression Payload Header Suppression ease PHS Size FL PHS Mask jim PHS Verify z In payload header suppression the repetitive portion of the higher layer is compressed by the sending entity and restored by the receiving entity On the uplink the sending entity is the SS and the receiving entity is the BS TRx on the downlink the sending entity is the BS TRx and the receiving entity is the SS For more information refer to the 802 16 5 2 3 1 e PHS Size Default 0 The PHS size is automatically assigned and is equivalent to the number of bytes in the payload suppression Field and on the number of valid bits in the PHS Mask Max size 255 e PHS Mask The PHS mask determines which bytes are not suppressed e PHS Verify Enable Disable VLAN Tag VLAN Tagging i Definition of the VLAN tag used for tagging the packets which match the classification rules
288. ments For general use the following host machine is recommended for the server application CPU Dual Processor Pentium 4 Xeon or better with 1Mb 12 cache Memory 2GB RAM Drive Controller Dual Channel Ultra 320 SCSI RAID Controller support RAID 01 or stripped mirror e g PERC Hard Drive 2 x Hot Pluggable 73GB SCSI drives 15K RPM CD ROM Drive Tape Back up Network Interface Card For small network trials where backup and redundancy capability within the host machine is not required the following specification can be used for the Netspan Server CPU Pentium 4 2 8Ghz Memory 1GB RAM Hard Drive 80GB CD ROM Drive Network Interface Card Note These are recommended minimum specifications 14 Installation Software Requirements The server is based around Internet Information services IIS See http www microsoft com iis This is a web hosting application and allows the clients to connect up via HTTP using a standard web browser The web application is developed using Microsoft ASP NET f Note Netspan server should be installed on dedicated server machine The configuration where Netspan shares hardware with other server application e g web sites is not supported f Note Netspan Requires an English version of OS keyboard SQL Server f Note Netspan must not be installed on a machine configured as a Domain Controller Installation of Netspan on
289. n Microsolt SQL Server 2000 8 00 2039 intel XB6 May 3 2005 22183 6 0 3790 1830 Information on software versions used for the NMS e Licence 59 Netspan Release 6 5 60 Services Security Database Version Licence Paste new licence below Max Number of BS TAx Items 0 Unimited xCKHAVpcISAQF 319my5SLHbwiJUO 456 eM siV SuyUj yWrwNEScDNTHQizZisF6g7zelJE h SkNcek Thdgicv5 mBxyy oy 2 UFVMU dM gH khiXE uSH wv xA T y KVANT xa OCA OD 1 BJL a0FU 3p7de MPE AJBCBE UE nent Afgan YCWIGNTVguN vga N Jl 2a a h7ciBE xhoMyXpR qv dz o5F He URS 08150 64 Status Paste the licence key text in the window and then click Read to decode and then Apply to install Once installed the new license information is moved to the current licence panel and a status message to reboot is displayed Services Security Database Version Licence Paste new licence below Start Click to start services Not available when service already started Stop Click to stop services Not available when service already stopped Automatic Service Startup Check this box to have the services automatically start when the server is started Start MNS server manager when OS starts Check to start the service manager when the OS starts NMS Server Management Server Change Introduction Netspan Server change command line tool is used to Backup and Restore or bring in the database from another Netspan server Both Ne
290. n To add a new region see Add New Region e Site Select required site To add a new site see Add New Site e Managed Check this box to set to managed A Shelf cannot be deleted unless this box is un checked SNMP Properties e Allow edit Check this box to enable access to all other boxes in this section e IP Address IP address of Ethernet connection e Port Ethernet port number e Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c e Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c e Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c e Timeout The number of milliseconds that the manager waits for a response Actions 262 See Action Buttons Configuration Management 263 Netspan Release 6 5 Manage Shelf Shelf Management Shelf Management Location Auto Discovery Region QD Auto Discovery Site Lst 0 099000 Long 0 000000 Shelf Shelf Number 3 Shelf Number 3 Provisioning Siots Alarms Events Shelf Properties Name Shelf Shelf Number 3 MACAddess 0 0 Shelf ID Shelf Number 3 Region Auto Discovery Region Site Managed Location This displays where the shelf is located within the network and displays a graphic of the type of shelf deployed Panels The Shelf Management page has the following tabs Provisioning Slots Alarms Events 264 Configuration Management Manage Shelf Shelf
291. n 100 195 217 232 28 Destination 195 217 232 32 Note The ARP Classifier does not need to be set as ARP packets can pass over the uplink Service Product 443 Netspan Release 6 5 nena Service Class P2 Best Effort MIR 600k Edit Service Class Name P2 Best Effort MIR 600k Traffic Priority RequestAransmission Policy Max Sustained Rate Max Trafic Burst Min Reserved Rate Min Tolerable Rate Tolerated Jitter Max Latency SDU Length Indicator Service Class P7 Best Effort MIR200k Edit Service Class Min Tolerable Rate Tolerated Jitter Max Latency SDU Length Indicator Scheduting Poll Period custom 1000s Packet Classifier Pass All 444 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Pass Ad Preeay 1 Acton B NT TREO Packet Classifier Destination IP 195 217 232 32 Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Destination 195 217 232 32 Proy 101 Action Forwara gt L3 Rules Packet Classifier Destination 195 217 232 28 Edit Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Destination 195 217 23228 J Phy 0 627200 Appendix 445 Netspan Release 6 5 Multiple Uplink Downlink Service Flows Best Effort amp rtPS Service Service Class Classifiers Product Priority Priority Best 2 Pass All 1 Effort 600k 1 Best Destination 100 Effort 195 217 232 28 200K U L rtPS 200K 7 Destination 1
292. n Failure An SNMP manager is attempting to access the equipment with invalid credentials Correct the SNMP Read and Write Communities on the offending manager SS RSSI SS RSSI below permitted threshold SS Authorization Failure Lost Comms Management Service Stopped BS TRx Provisioning Error Channel Provisioning Error SS Provisioning Error Lost Comms BSDU Provisioning Error Lost Comms An SS with invalid credentials is attempting to gain service on the BS TRx NMS is unable to communicate with the SNMP agent on the BS TRx The management service was stopped for e g maintenance reasons There was a problem in configuring the per BS TRx configuration on the specified BS TRx There was a problem in configuring the per channel configuration on the specified channel There was a problem in configuring service for this SS on one of the channels on which it has recently been seen The server is unable to communicate with the SNMP agent on the BSDU There was a problem in configuring the per BSDU configuration on the specified BSDU The server is unable to communicate with the SNMP agent on the Shelf Loss in communications is normally due to a temporary network condition and will typically clear automatically For full NMS operation restart the specified management Service To rectify select the Manual Re Provision option for this BS TRx To rectify select the Manual Re Provision opt
293. n below WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Advanced C Software Download C Channel Table Settings C Base Station ID Settings C System Info Settings C Code Banks List C Detailed Log C Connections List C Change User Name C Change Password C Maximum TX Power Setting C P mode Settings C Performance Monitor C LAN Table Management C LAN Table Entries C Reset2Default C Clear Log C WiFi Control Restart _ Select _ 2 Select Restart A confirmation message box appears as shown below Microsoft Internet Explorer x Q 4re you sure you want to restart 9 J cw 3 Click OK to confirm that you want to restart the unit A message appears as shown below informing you that the unit is being restarted 173 Netspan Release 6 5 WiMAX Modem Management The system is being restarted You will be automatically redirected in 30 seconds After a few seconds the system restart is completed successfully 174 Configuration Management Multiple Subscriber Station Management Use this feature to manage multiple subscriber stations Use the mouse to select more than on SS from the subscriber stations list Then click the manage button Selection Multiple Subscriber Station Management 3 Subscriber Stations In Selection Address Registered 00 35 155 00 35 179 00 35 1356 Statistics Type 55 RF Statistics z Moan ONR 55 Mac
294. n modulation in both the U L and DL and VLAN tagging Service Products Service Products i Sets 005 Scheduling Type Traffic Priority MIR CIR Service Class and ARQ Only one service class per service flow Downlink Service Flows Service Class Sets 005 Traffic Priority MIR CIR and ARQ Only one service class per service flow T Clasare Service product may have more than one service Downlink Service F OWS flow ie service flows for VOIP FTP and HTTP To create a Service Product the elements need to be designed in the following order VLAN Configurations Packet Classifier Rule Profiles Service Classes Service Products Custom Configuration See SS Custom Configuration 291 Netspan Release 6 5 Service Products Service Products Service products are a template of a service offering based on a grouping of service flow definitions 1 Downlink High Priority for traffic to SSPC2 Classifier has the highest priority so packets will be matched to this rule first 2 Downlink Lower Priority for all other traffic 3 Uplink High Priority for traffic to PCBS2 4 Uplink Lower Priority for all other traffic Service Products mporn Name XSF on Uplink 1xSF for Dowrnlnk 261 Service flow Cass Clans rection Fitis Stats Service Class Descrpbon Shedding Type Traffic Prionty List Table headings are listed below 292 Service Pro
295. n the SS on every BS TRx it is deemed to have been recently seen on unless constrained by the specification of a home BS TRx for that SS The Provisioning Error Count is the number of BS TRxs from this set on which there has been a failure to provision this SS e Provisioning Changes Displays changes e Description 1 5 User defined e Discovered Checked if SS has been discovered by a BS TRx Actions See Action Buttons 245 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Home For SS This page shows the list of SSs that have as their Home Service Channel one of this BS TRx s channels Fiter No Filter FST ser toot 2 Registered Service Ensbied Service Product Configuration Protie 40 80 00 00 29 hoooat E Sample of Service Sample of SS Cust Sample of SS Chann A 0 000 2 1000 42 Sample of Service Sample of SS Cust Sample of SS Chann Total Database fems 0 Total Loaded tems 0 Eat Msnsge Reload Export View Export AN Peged V Sze20 prevnet voto Close Reload Hep Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Pri
296. nded as a guide for Engineers or customers configuring ASMAX equipment when demonstrating different QoS scenarios The values in the screen shots are examples only as these values will be application specific ALL the examples have been tested in the Systems Lab and confirmed as a valid working scenario It is important to note that scheduling is inherently an uplink only feature and is how bandwidth requests get to the BS TRx The standard uses the term priority for Packet Classifiers but this only determines the order in which the classifiers are matched against the incoming packet It is the classifier that determines which flow the packet will go into Each service flow has a queue assigned to it and therefore a priority type and latency requirement which the scheduler uses to determine which queue to service first Scheduling Information Summary of Scheduling Types The references e g 11 13 12 are to the IEEE Std 802 16 2004 UGS The UGS is designed to support real time data streams consisting of fixed size data packets issued at periodic intervals such as T1 E1 and voice over IP without silence suppression The mandatory QoS service flow parameters for this scheduling service are Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate 11 13 6 Maximum Latency 11 13 14 Tolerated Jitter 11 13 13 and Request Transmission Policy 11 13 12 If present the Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate parameter 11 13 8 shall have the same value as the Maximum Su
297. ndicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all To delete one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Delete Button Other Actions See Action Buttons Configuration Management SS Management Events Fier No Filter j 73 Layout a JSS Equipment S 555 00 40 04 0 08 49 6 0 18 0 PAddress 10 0 35 3 255 255 255 255 WiliMacAddess MESS Registration SS 00 0 0 0 08 49 Bxatusinto Nuf ChanneleNut BES Registration SS 00 A004 CO 08 49 Stotusinto Nevw Status notitication Channel 00 004 1 00568 LESS Deregistrahion SS 00 40 04 C0 09 49 Exatusinto Nul ChanneleNut 5 Denegistration SS 00 A0 0A CO 08 49 Statusinto tew Status notitication Channe O0A004 100542 LESS Registration 55 00 A0 DA CO 05 49 Bistusinfo Nul Channei hal Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter By Event Type
298. ners SS web Provisioning only Only SS Provisioning Web Service and Service Profile Web Service Home Page Displays name of a page in the Netspan if the user has set using the Set as Favorite page 405 Netspan Release 6 5 The user is displayed on the Add user screen Note When the user logs in they will see a screen with only options specified for that user role Actions See Action Buttons 406 Server Filters Filters To optimize the efficiency of returned listings filters are used Filters allow the user to return a subset of the complete listing Netspan comes with enhanced filtering and searching capabilities Filters Fiter By System Filter 7 C seoch Description By Alarm Type External titer By Alarm Type inLast Day Alana raised within the past day f i Raised in Last Hour Alann retsed within the past hour Raised n Last 5 Minutes Alone raised hi the past 5 mines 1 Not Acknowledged Alana has not been Acknowleged Total Database tems 107 Losded 5 Paged Size 5 Prev Next 1 of 22 m This button allows user defined criteria to be edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Ed Lists information about all the filters For a list of predefined filters see Add Edit Filters Pre Defined Filters Set as default Netspan has pre defined filters to help an operator narrow down the sources of an alarm for quicker troubleshooting Many filters
299. nformation option option 82 enables a BS TRx to include information about itself when forwarding SS originated DHCP packets to a DHCP server The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other parameter assignment policies and improve security Select Active if the DHCP server supports that feature and it is required to be implemented Custom Properties o Broadcast Service Class Select from List see Service Classes 310 Service Profiles o Single User Check box for single user o MAC Forced Forwarding MAC forced forwarding sends a MAC address received as response from an ARP request through the BS TRx to the router This allows the router to ensure layer 2 separation and control traffic to and from individual SSs Used if for example the operator implements billing for traffic between SSs Check to enable Refer to RFC 4562 o MAC Forced Forwarding IP Address This is the IP address of the router connected to the BS TRx only required if MAC force forwarding is checked See also VLAN Scenarios Actions See Action Buttons 311 Netspan Release 6 5 SS Custom Configurations The Custom Configuration defines modulation dynamic services VLAN and subchannelisation This is then applied to the SS during Subscriber Provisioning Subscriber Station Custom Configuration Profiles Requested Downink Requested Descrptio ATI Modulation Name Description See Add Edit Custom configuration profi
300. nged in Last Week Registered A list of current filters is displayed by clicking the list button See Filters o BS TRx Name BS TRx Name o Channel Name Channel Name These counters are all reset when the BS TRx resets and counters for individual SSs are reset if the SS has been deregistered from the BS TRx for 3 days The counters are calculated by the BS TRx as a running average over the most recent frames o Downlink Frame Data BPSK Percentage of downlink frames using BPSK modulation o Downlink Frame Data QPSK 1 2 Percentage of downlink frames using QPSK 1 2 modulation o Downlink Frame Data QPSK 3 4 Percentage of downlink frames using QPSK 3 4 modulation o Downlink Frame Data 16 QAM 1 2 Percentage of downlink frames using 16 QAM 1 2 modulation o Downlink Frame Data 16 QAM 3 4 Percentage of downlink frames using 16 QAM 3 4 modulation o Downlink Frame Data 64 QAM 2 3 Percentage of downlink frames using 64 QAM 2 3 modulation o Downlink Frame Data 64 QAM 3 4 Percentage of downlink frames using 64 QAM 3 4 modulation o Uplink Frame Data BPSK Percentage of uplink frames using BPSK modulation o Uplink Frame Data QPSK 1 2 Percentage of uplink frames using QPSK 1 2 modulation o Uplink Frame Data QPSK 3 4 Percentage of uplink frames using QPSK 3 4 modulation o Uplink Frame Data 16 QAM 1 2 Percentage of uplink frames using 16 QAM 1 2 modulation o Uplink Frame Data 16 QAM 3 4 Percentage o
301. nist Click on Help for help whole page 72 Getting Started 73 Netspan Release 6 5 Action Buttons The list below describes the activities invoked by the buttons Note Not all buttons appear on every page but only those applicable to the page viewed Buttons Add Add a new item Apply Changes the value of these properties Auto Refresh Check this box to set an automatic screen refresh each minute Cancel Discard changes Clone When an item is selected in the list a duplicate is made containing all the values of the chosen item and the Add window is opened Close Return to the previous screen Delete The item selected in the list is deleted The deletion of objects is only allowed if they are not being used unless specified otherwise For example you cannot delete a region that is allocated to a site cannot delete a BS TRx that are allocated to subscribers etc Default Restores item layout default settings Edit Allows the item selected in the list to be edited Export View Exports the current view as a spreadsheet Export All Exports the current file as a spreadsheet Manage Click to open the relevant management window OK Accepts request updates database if required and returns to the previous page Paged Check box to set from continuous scroll to page mode When checked the display changes to show page number of total Reload Reload button reloads the page with data fr
302. nitiate action Current Software Status Content in this list is only displayed once a request has been initiated It summarize the request and progress of the download 210 Update From Equipment Gets software status information from equipment immediately Configuration Management BS TRx Inventory ni No Filter z ES TR Name tem Nustber Product Code Descrptior Board Auri BSR Connectorized 3 4 3 8 BS TR 313238 303132 BSR3 amp 0LF EXT BSR Commectorized 34 36 BS TR 3132538 303031 BSRISOLF EXT 1 BSR Cormectorized 3 4 3 6 3SOLF EXT 1 BSR Conmectorized 34 36 350LF EXT 1 BSR Cormectorized 3 436 BSR350LF EXT Cormectorized 3 4 3 8 EXTI BSR Cornectorized 3 4 3 8 BSRISOLF EXT 1 Cormectorized 3 4 3 6 EKTA ESR Cornectorized 34 38 E BSRISOLF EXT 1 BSR Cornectcrized 3 4 3 6 FS Toc 313238 303039 1 BSRISOLF EXTA BSR Cormectorized 3 4 36 X gt Total Database 513 Total Losded tlems 20 Reload Export View Paged RV Size 20 Previieot 1 w ot2e As soon as a BS TRx is discovered by Netspan an entry is made in BS TRx table and the relevant inventory entries are automatically made in the BS TRx inventory table An overview of the active network inventory is shown as part of the Navigation menu The screen capture above shows the inventory for a number of MicroMAX BS TRxs e Filter Filters are used to limit the
303. nnels on which an SS may register SS provisioning now allows the assignment of Service allowed channel and Registration allowed channels o SS global service provisioning is available under Configuration Management allowing a combination of service parameters service product configuration template and VLAN template to be assigned globally to all SSs on a network wide basis SS reporting inventory and equipment addresses SS reports to BS TRx using custom management messages the following its own IP address SW version and HW revision number MAC Address and IP address of integrated WiFi AP and MAC Address and IP Address of integrated voice gateway EasyVoice BS TRx exposes reported values in read only MIB table and also sends the trap when any of the values change for any given SS Netspan reads the values from the BS TRx MIB table and also from the objects of the relevant trap and displays the values on the screen IP Addresses are displayed as HTML links to local management pages of the corresponding equipment WiFi AP management What s New o SS list now contains additional columns for WiFi access point and residential voice gateway IP addresses o The SS inventory list has additional columns for the WiFi access point and residential voice gateway Mac Addresses o The SS management page State tab now has the additional information of WiFi Access point and residential voice gateway IP and Mac addresses
304. nnne 175 BSUURK seneatads ees och ede T 185 BS TRX Managements 2 2 ones saben iR Dae shea reds euch cede cee cede ee ve RR eens vee ee 196 Configure Software Download ile deg engin ede bebdsd cose vas 210 Multiple BS TRX Management ini pi tien atA i ataa cee boven eee bees YN 218 BS TRx Charnels eet Rt DR d Ie E lex ek EAEEren ieee EAE Ree eee Ede 231 BS IRx Channel Management p inopi ipii ERE VAT SERERE AD eee eee peered eee 237 Multiple BS TRx Channel eme sene e ennt i neret 252 BS TRX Inventory isror c m 259 SSiINVENCOlY ae oan nace beak aaia 260 Slielt o iino ipi ER Mae teeter e eis 261 Manage Shelf ayer os aemulus a se he edad ea ges ee a cen aa EEDE eet eee ee 264 IUe 271 Manage BSDU iere IR eat ees Seek i tees x M Ra iri ix e LEE DER tees neue 275 Global SS Provisionitg 3 2 iin RAS tae eis ees eee et ee ees 284 WOPOIOGW seh lc 285 Service Profiles Cw 291 Service PRODUCES pec EE 292 Service Classes iie ue a a E E E E Ea N E A nds rer D ents 298 5 RR 303 BER 309 SS Custom Config ratiGrs cocti ecce capote eto edt een ee eder stt ese vett edatr eet
305. not remove any files left over on the disk Netspan Installation fails with an error message in the log stating that aspnet regiis has failed and the detected version beginning of the log of Net is 1 1 4322 2300 Installation fails when trying to create the database Local Windows Account ASP Net or IIS WPG group cannot be added to the Security accounts Some validation controls throw unexpected error messages and some lists show a No Data to Display Netspan installation on Windows2003 hangs up Pressing Cancel button does not help When killed using Task Manager it displays the message that it failed to create application pool When trying to access Netspan s URL an HTTP Error 404 File or Directory not found is thrown although the installation An attempt of installing Net Framework 2 has failed and deleted some files required by Net 1 1 Trying to install Netspan on a Domain Controller machine IIS 6 0 Default Website maps to Net 2 0 instead of 1 1 IIS internal error System does not return the call to create web application pool ASP Net windows component is not installed Go to add remove programs and uninstall Net 1 2 or 2 0 if reinstalling Net 1 1 fails and the problem persists during Netspan install reinstall Windows 2003 Do not install Netspan on a machine configured as a Domain controller Open the IIS management console and change the default website a
306. nowledge Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Release Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Release of an alarm indicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all Other Actions See Action Buttons Configuration Management Management Events Fiter No Filter 179 Los EN Gd BSDU Added BSDU 00 BO 00 08 2 Total Database teme Total Loaded hems 1 Reload Export View Export All Paged 7 Sie 1 fort Close Reload Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined fi
307. ns WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced System Info Settings System Description System Contact faoshwartzlianycormp com System Name TWtest system System Location anytown Submit Reset Back 3 Define the System information as required 4 System Description define a brief description of the system 5 System Contact define the contact information i e Support IT 144 Configuration Management System Name enter the name of the system a user defined name System Location define the location of the system the actual location i e address where the unit is currently 4 Click Submit A confirmation window appears confirming that the new parameters have been stored 5 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without defining System information settings 6 Click Reset to erase all fields and redefine information WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced New parameters have been stored effective after restart Back 7 To apply the settings to the unit you need to restart the unit Perform the following 1 Click Back to return to the Base Station ID Settings page 2 Click Back to return to the Advanced page and then follow the restart instructions in Restarting the Unit 145 Netspan Release 6 5 Viewing Code Banks WiMAXWeb allows viewing the Code Banks and the Boot Loader version Bot
308. nterval from Rekey Wait State 1800s 30min 43 200s 12h 604 800s 7days 3 024 000 35 days 300s 600s 5min 10min SS Time prior to TEK 3600s 302 399 331 Netspan Release 6 5 332 Encryption Key Grace Time Authorisation Reject Wait Timeout Actions See Action Buttons expiration SS begins Rekeying Delay before resending Auth Request after receiving Auth Reject 5min 1hour 3 5 days 600s 10min BS TRx Profiles BS TRx Custom Configuration BS TRx Custom Configuration package is defined for the specific target hardware category The BS TRx Channels of different categories will not be able to have wrong profile assigned The exception is category not defined which is maintained for backwards compatibility purposes with older versions of Netspan databases Profiles of not defined category cannot be used for MicroMAX Base Station Custom Configuration Profiles me Check and Tag Min TOS 10 DL defined acromax recommended cromax SMhz check end tag updated not defined x Sih check and tag Free Run net defined List o See Add Edit Custom Configuration below Actions See Action Buttons Add Edit Custom Configuration Different configurations are displayed for HiperMAX HiperMAX micro and MicroMAX HiperMAX HiperMAX micro The use of hardware specific profiles means that only those items relevant to the specific
309. nventory is shown as part of the Navigation menu o Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary Secondary By Product Code Product Code 260 Configuration Management Shelf Shelf Shelves 099 Layt P Adress Auto Discovery Region o Discovery Site Put Discovery Regen Discovery Site pago Discovery Regin 10025 168 Da o Discovery Sie 168 21770 00 50 2 44 1 04 Discovery Site o Discovery Region 10025 165 pos t Total Database tems 25 Total Loaded tems 20 a ExpotView Expo AW Pepe V Sie 20 ot2 List This list summarises all the HiperMAX BS TRx shelf properties To open the Shelf Management page either double click a row in the list or select a row and click the Manage button o Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and n
310. o Anew eventtype SS Equipment Status Change has also been added for the trap containing the WiFi and easy voice IP and Mac addresses BSDU management o Provisioning o State o Software e o Inventory e o Alarms o Events provides identity SNMP connection and port connection information Port connections are automatically discovered if the BSDU is capable of reporting them In a scenario where BSDU loses connection with MicroMAX last port connection information is maintained in Netspan BSDU expires port connection information in 3 minutes In a scenario where a MicroMAX is moved from a BSDU to a Site by a user port connection information should also be manually released In a scenario where a MicroMAX which is connected to a BSDU is replaced with another the old MicroMAX could be found under the same site as of the BSDU provides connection state provisioning state and facility to re provision BSDU provides means to upgrade and monitor software status of BSDU provides available inventory information of BSDU provides alarms synthesised from Netspan events This includes snmp connection state alarms port connection state alarms port power state alarms link alarms and GPS alarms Events synthesised from BSDU traps as well as Netspan internal events This includes snmp connection state events port connection state traps port power state traps link traps and GPS traps ATCA hardware management
311. o a single customer o Multiple trap destination support covering BS TRx and BSDU This feature allows customers with third party fault management system e g HP OpenView to quickly configure up to 8 trap destinations including one for Netspan on all BS TRxs and BSDUs in the network Statistics Several new categories of statistics are available in SR6 0 BS TRx Air Interface Stats has been divided into two separate categories as follows e BS TRx Interface Usage These are the per interface frame usage statistics that were previously available e BS TRx Air Interface Counts These are per interface counters They include the Broadcast SDU and Broadcast Octet Counts that were available previously as well as new counters for SR6 0 covering management and traffic SDUs and octets for both uplink and downlink directions o 55 Ethernet Stats These are new for SR6 0 and report the SS Ethernet Stats per SS as measured on the SS and reported to theBS TRx o 55 Air Interface Stats These are new for SR6 0 and report the SS Air Interface Counts per SS as measured on the SS and reported to the BS TRx The counters cover management and traffic SDUs and octets for both uplink and downlink directions The statistics are available on the management pages as follows Single and multi BS TRx management e BS TRx Ethernet Statistics full history e BS TRx Air Interface Usage latest measurements only e BS TRx Air Interface Counts latest meas
312. o increasingly robust modulation types until BPSK is reached and then to begin to impose increasingly narrow bandwidth subchannelisation until 1 16th bandwidth is reached At present this is the only management scheme that can be configured because other schemes such as prefer subchannelisation where decreasing modulation causes subchannelisation to be imposed first and then only when 1 16th bandwidth is reached is more robust modulation selected is not yet supported The sample threshold values are BURST PROFILES 339 Netspan Release 6 5 64QAM 2 3 21 75 22 75 16QAM 3 4 17 25 18 25 340 BS TRx Profiles SUBCHANNELISATION Note MicroMAX only supports Full sub channelisation Actions See Action Buttons 341 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx VOIP Qos Profile BS TRx VOIP Qos Profiles v aiceMAX IP VoiceldA X Leste Enabled Ustin Bmdwith Address The VOIP Qos profile sets the connection to the Soft Switch and the parameters used Add Edit VOIP Qos Profile Add BS TRx VOIP Qos Profile General Properties Name Enabled ves s VoiceMAX Connection Parameters IP Address Type IP Address Port QoS Parameters Max VoIP Bandwidth Per BS TRx 1000 Max Number Of Calls Eb Keep Alive Retries Link Fail Call Clear Policy Normal VLAN Tagging Tagging Behaviour Enabled Tag VLAN ID 1 Tag VLAN User Prionty b f Valde
313. o0 AD BD 00 00 01 Service Flow Status 99 MacAddress Service Flow D Description Drectior Service Product State pom a eee ston BS 8 0 A0 6000 0001 Last Updated 19 07 2007 17 14 52 x This screen shows the Service Flow Status Subscriber Station SS MAC address Mac Address SS MAC address Service Flow ID Service flow ID Description Description Direction Uplink downlink Service Product Service product State Active Inactive Update from BS TRx Retrieves the latest values held by the BS TRx 215 Netspan Release 6 5 Statistics BS TRx Statistics BS TRx Ethernet Statistics 99 Fiter No Filter 3 aE Loot EN id BS Mame Octets in UcestPkisin Discerds in Errors in Ocfeis Ou UcsstPiis Out Cescards Out rorz Out Read From BS EEES TR313237 303031 Miss Thx 313237 303031 ps The 313237 303031 BS TR 313237 303031 SUBS Thee 313237 302031 BS TR 313237 303031 SMBS TRoc 313237 303031 BS TR 313237 303031 Reid Epo vis Epo A Note See BS TRx release notes for details of statistics support The statistics history is stored in the Netspan database The database keeps detailed history for a short amount of time and less detailed history for a much longer period of time For each combination of BS TRx Channel and SS the history of purged as follows Statistics over 1 day old are purged so that only the 1st record in every hour remains Statistics over 1 wee
314. of interference on the carrier BS TRx Carrier Sense Frequency Change BS TRx trap reporting a change in frequency due to interference on the carrier BS TRx OBSAI Link BS TRx trap reporting state change on the OBSAI links BS TRx RF Transceiver Fault BS TRx trap reporting status change on the RF transceiver SS Equipment Status Change BS TRx trap reporting status change on the SS BS TRx GPS Synchronisation Change BS TRx trap reporting state change on the GPS SS WiFi AP Reset BS TRx trap reporting WiFi AP reset DFS Event BS TRx trap reporting dynamic frequency shifting event BSDU BS TRx Port Connection State BSDU trap reporting port connection state change Change BSDU BS TRx Port Power State Change BSDU trap port power state change No Response SS failed to respond to the BS ranging requests several consecutive times An SS that is not passing data and has best effort scheduling will show this error if a you switch it off or b its UL really is struggling No Signal The BS granted the SS an uplink slot for traffic or polling and it failed to use it for 16 consecutive grants An SS with nRTP RTP UGS on any of its service flows will show this quickly if a you switch it off or b its UL really is struggling and missing the grants Re registration The SS attempted to sign on before the BS knew it had gone away This occurs if the SS has best effort scheduling so may take a while for the BS to know it has gone and it reboots and qui
315. of the BS TRx Management page for that item Select multiple items on the list click manage button to open the Software Tab of the Multiple BS TRx Management page for those items List e BS TRx Name BS TRx Name e Address BS TRx IP address e Hardware Category Hardware Type e Use Upgrade Category Config Checked if yes e Latest Request The latest request sent to hardware e NMS State Software upgrade state e Scheduled Ticked if scheduled e Start Date Scheduled start date of download e End Date Scheduled end date of download e Start Time Scheduled start Time of download e End Time Scheduled end time of download e Image Type The function of the image i e Application OS etc e Running Version Version of the currently running software e Running Details Details as provided by BS TRx e Primary version This version is the one that is used or will be used by the BS TRx after reset e Primary details Details as provided by BS TRx e Standby Version Other version e Standby Details Details as provided by BS TRx e Reported State Current status of BS TRx software 347 Netspan Release 6 5 e Reported State details Reported state details e Reported State Last Retrieved at Last status update e Site Site Actions e Manage Opens the BS TRx Management page See Action Buttons for other buttons 348 Software Management SS Software 4 Menu Software Management gt SS Software Shows the curren
316. om Netspan database or with default values if page creates new object Size Set number of records per page Changes are made on the next poll Update from Equipment Gets new data directly from the equipment and displays them and optionally stores them in Netspan database Validate Checks the values entered are legitimate Image Buttons 74 a Save Layout Settings Restore Layout Default settings Ed Filter List ux Edit Filter Definition Getting Started Login Please enter your Username Password and then click t ogin Username admin Password eeeeeees When connecting for the first time as an administrator you will be connected to a login screen The default for the first access is User name admin Password password f Tip The admin Password must be changed on first access Setup non admin users for general use Click on My Account in the side menu or on the welcome screen and set a new administrator Password See My Account When logging in for the first time the user is given the opportunity to change the accounts password from the default given by the administrator to a password of own choice Change your account s password My Account Creating New User Login Usernames and Passwords are allocated by the administrator see Add Edit Users 75 Netspan Release 6 5 System Information To view system information logon click the Netspan logo version number or machine name on
317. ome Channel by at least one SS E00048 SQL transaction applied for the related sql operations have failed E00049 This operation is not supported on an unmanaged node E00050 Only one untagged VLAN allowed and one already exists E00051 Unable to delete the BSDU as it still marked as being managed by this NMS Please mark this BSDU as Unmanaged first Unable to delete the Shelf as it still marked as being managed by this NMS Please mark this Shelf as Unmanaged first E01000 Blank Value E01001 Unknown error Possible exception ask administrator to check event log E01002 Unknown object E01003 A problem occurred whilst trying to create a record in the database E01004 A problem occurred whilst trying to update a record in the database E01005 A problem occurred whilst trying to delete a record in the database E01006 A problem occurred whilst trying to load information from the equipment E01007 A problem occurred whilst trying to load information from the database E01008 Validation failed 424 Appendix E01009 Object already exists E01033 Unable to load the Active Set for this SS E01034 Unable to contact the Snmp Job Service Please ensure this Service is running E01035 Certain parameters which are expected to be present could not be retrieved from the equipment E01036 Unable to load the Sub Channelisation Profile for this Package E01037 Reprovisioning this SS has no effect as the SS has Service Di
318. on of Netspan as described in Netspan Server Uninstall Process and choose to keep the existing Netspan database 4 Follow the instructions described in the Server Installation section the only difference being that the program offers you to Keep the existing Netspan checkbox needs to appear and be ticked as shown below SS Type Ful Server fratalstion Databave Web Application Services Keep Database Server AROSI 501200011 J Inchsllaton Properties Osaba Server anonss tSt 2000 z Ty Connection Applicstion Path c Arpa Nelspan rene Osat Log Pah C Progam FlesMicsosoft SQL Serve MSSQL VD aa Service Propertes Uvemanme Loc aS reiten Stat Services at the end of the wutallaion Configure Services Tor Automatic Startup Oe Non 1 Oncethe installation has completed the NMS Server Manager cf below whose icon appears in the system tray can be used to re configure the Services start up properties change Netspan s admin password as well as import a different Netspan database 54 Installation NMS Server Manager il c xj Server uposs i Services AINMS Services v Refresh Services Dependent Services Depended On Services Properties 1 E Start E st Automatic Service Startup Start NMS Server Manager when OS starts Stopped SAIRODA758 All NMS Services Upgrade of the Netspan SQL database explained
319. one for downlink to communicate with the ASMAX BS TRx The channel size is 3 5 MHz 3 5 MHz separation between consecutive channels and the maximum number of channels is 32 7f Note Click Back at any time to return to the previous menu page To define uplink and downlink frequency channels 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 In the Advanced page select Channel Table Settings and click Select The Channel Table Settings page appears as shown below WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Ghannel Table Settings C Scan ll Channel Bandwidth Tables C Scan 5 MHz Channel Table Scan 1 75 MHz Channel Table C Scan 3 5 MHz Channel Table C Scan 2 75 MHz Channel Table Submit Back 3 Select either to Scan All Channel Bandwidth Tables to scan all channel bandwidth tables Scan 5 MHz Channel Table to scan channel bandwidth table in 5 MHz increments Scan 1 75 MHz Channel Table to scan channel bandwidth table in 1 75 MHz increments VV V ON Scan 3 5 MHz Channel Table to scan channel bandwidth table in 3 5 MHz increments gt Scan 2 75 MHz Channel Table to scan channel bandwidth table in 2 75 MHz increments Note High and Low refer to a single Channel spacing in each band High refers to the larger channel spacing and low refers to the smaller one 4 In the Channel Table Settings page click Submit The Channel Table Settings page appears as
320. oning Provisioning Number of Cranne Name Changes Registered 552 in BS BS Name 1 narret 313238302001 113238 303031 m b 2 1 BS TRx 315238203031 28 harnet 323238 303031 23238300031 Im F b 5 2 BS 7 amp c313238 303031 28 Pnannet 333238 303091 833238 300031 Vv b 3 n BS T amp c313238 203031 28 la A 21 Total Database 3 Totali Loaded tems 3 JF mage Reload Export View Export Pagod RP Sue PrevNest 1 sors Close Reload Help Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters enma By OFDM Channel Profile By PKM Profile d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Ed Lists all criteria see Filters List For details of list headings see Add Edit BS TRx Channels Actions See Action Buttons 205 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Registered SS Fiter No Filter FST scorch LU Ensbied Service Product Configuration Protie mm Do AC BO 00 00 29 10020 41 Sanpie of Service Sample of
321. opens as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Software Download FTP Server IP Address 10 0 0 10 FTP User Name FTP Password File Name f Note Click Back at any time to return to the main Advanced page 4 In the FTP Server IP Address field enter the FTP server s IP address 5 For access to the FTP enter the following FTP login rights a Inthe FTP User Name field enter the FTP server s user name b Inthe FTP Password field enter the FTP server s password 6 In the File Name field enter the name of the software version file that you want to download to the EasyST ProST 133 Netspan Release 6 5 7 Click Load The Confirmation message box appears requesting that you confirm software version file download 8 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without performing a software download Microsoft Internet Explorer x Q 4re you sure you want to to download a new software version file 9 Click OK to confirm The Web server performs the following processes a Checks the connection with the FTP server via ping b Connects with the FTP server C the software version stored in the standby software bank on the flash memory d Begins communicating with the FTP server e Starts downloading the software version file via the FTP server to the EasyST ProST s standby software bank The progress of the SW file download is indi
322. operties of that SS are assigned properties through Service Products Service Classes Packet Classifiers VLAN BS TRx Profiles When creating an BS TRx properties of that BS TRx are assigned properties through Burst Profiles OFDM Channel Profiles 802 16 Protocols Private Key Management Subchannelisation Custom Configuration and VoIP QoS profile Server Contains information on server management security and filters Software Management Software download to BS TRx and SSs Fault Management Alarm and Event Management Performance Management BS TRx Ethernet Stats BS TRx Air Interface Stats SS RF Stats SS Modulation Stats SS Packet Counts Reports System status reports Backup and Restore System restoration and database backup procedures Appendix Supporting information New users should start with the Getting Started section to familiarize themselves with the interface and basic setup procedures f Note Netspan is designed to manage all 802 16 2004 WiMAX compliant equipment The term SS is used to describe subscriber stations in general Netspan uses the term ST EasyST and ProST to refer to Airspan WiMAX compliant SS s and for the purposes of this manual the terms ST and SS are interchangeable Netspan is a WEB based client server Network Management System Netspan server runs on a Windows 2003 Server PC s equipped with SQL server software The server connects to the ASMAX equipment Netspan Release 6 5 shelf Netspan
323. or Expert Users role e Note 2 Access types Full Read Only None 88 Main Actions See Action Buttons 89 Netspan Release 6 5 Search The search engine returns up to 15 items per type and should only be used where the expectation is for a small amount of records to be retrieved For more extensive lists Filters should be used The Netspan search engine is designed to search for e Network Elements e Topology Entities Regions and Sites e Classes and Profiles e Alarms Simple Search Search Result Total Database tems 5 Total Loaded tems 5 vum 1 a Manage Reload Paged 7 A simple search is used to search the whole database for the Item the advanced search will only search defined areas of the database Enter the Item to be searched search string must be between 4 and 25 characters The search engine can search for partial strings For example if 10 0 25 was set as a search string it would return all BSs with a IP address of 10 0 25 as the first three bytes of a IP address as in the result above Click the gt to start search Advanced Search When the advanced box is checked a set of filters open that narrow the search to specific database areas Search Result Search 10025 E Advanced F BS TRx Any Any Total Database tame 5 TotstLosdeditems S PrevNex ott Paged Size 20 Enter search string and then select primary and secondary ad
324. plete Netspan Restore process Restoring Netspan using Database Restore method 1 Inthe NMS Server Manager go to Properties Database tab 2 Select the Method as Database Backup Restore 3 Select Action as Restore and Activate Netspan database x Services Secuty Database Version Licence Database Trarater Method C Altsch Detach Backup Restore Woarning Importing or Hestonnga dotabate unng thet feature willdelete the current NMS database n ute on this server Action C Backup Restore and Activate C Activate Orly Delete network elements Directory ox File Name CANMSEkpDatsWetsparDB C2 1184 Excse 4 If you want to delete Network element the Netspan Database check the Delete Network Elements check box 5 In the Directory or File Name text box enter the path and the filename of the Netspan Database restore file 6 Press the Execute button This will open a DOS window and prompt to continue Y N Press y to continue 7 After few lines of messages the last message will say Operations completed SUCCESSFULLY on the local Server Press Enter to exit the program This will complete Netspan Restore process 65 Netspan Release 6 5 CLI Usage setup serverchange exe RM A action A action M method RM P dbpath Where Display this help message A action Specifies the type of the action Backup RestoreAndActivate ActivateOnl
325. port sections will vary dependant on BS TRx type and VLAN options 188 Configuration Management Edit BS TRx Provisioning General Properties First Channel BSID Name BS Tina 193 T o Auto Discovery Region E Lis Auto Discovery Site E 7 Shen AUTO 00 50 C2 3F F2 92 E List Network Profile 6 NTP Profile Name sw Lab Allow Edit V Bridge Mode Proader VLAN Q in Q E Management On Traffic Port Enabled Management On VLAN Disabled p Backwards Compatible VLAN Port Mode Acceptable Frame Types Tagged and Untagged Tagging Behaviour Fag Port VLAN ID Detaut As Max untagged Ingress Filtering x Defaut C Tag Priority Port VLAN Lists Member Set VLAN 60141 ID 60 90148 00 90 AndyL Mac FF testing ID 234 zz Defaut As Max 101 SU ID 1 Default As Max 102 MU 1072 Default As Max ID3 MU ID 3 Malcolm ID 4 VLAN 100 ID 100 VLAN 101 ID 101 Provider VLAN Bridge Q in Q S Tag EtherType 0x9100 S Tag Configuration Mode S Tag Port VLAN Use C Tag Priority For S Tag M B 523 Prorty J SNMP Properties Allow edit IP Address Port pos 1 SNMP Version wma E SNMP Read Communty pubic 8 0 0 0 0 1 SNMP Communty Timeout Em General Properties o First Channel BSID BS TRx ID 189 Netspan Release 6 5 o Create First Channel Tick click if this is the first channel Add only this
326. porting uplink RSSI for the SS lies outside the configured range BS TRx SS BPKM Fail BS TRx trap reporting a PKM failure SS Initial Ranging Success BS TRx trap reporting SS initial ranging success 374 Fault Management SS Initial Ranging Failure BS TRx trap reporting SS initial ranging failure SS Registration Success BS TRx trap reporting SS registration success SS Registration Failure BS TRx trap reporting SS registration failure SS Deregistration BS TRx trap reporting SS deregistration SS Basic Caps Exchange Success BS TRx trap reporting SS basic capabilities exchange success SS Basic Caps Exchange Failure BS TRx trap reporting SS basic capabilities exchange failure BS TRx Connection State Change Change in BS TRx connection state as detected by discovery service Management Service Stopped Service stopped reported by management service Management Service Started Service started reported by management service BS TRx Provisioning Error BS TRx provisioning error reported by provisioning service Channel Provisioning Error Channel provisioning error reported by provisioning service SS Provisioning Error SS provisioning error reported by provisioning service BS TRx Reprovision BS TRx re provision attempted reported by web application Channel Reprovision Channel re provision attempted reported by web application SS Reprovision SS re provision attempted reported by web application BS TRx Added New BS TRx d
327. portion of the downlink subframe that is used but does not carry user data This includes the FCH DLMAP ULMAP DCD UCD any preambles used on the downlink bursts and any frame gaps Note that it does not include PDUs that contain management messages as these are considered to be user data for frame usage purposes 9 o Downlink Frame Data BPSK Percentage of downlink frames using BPSK modulation 9 o Downlink Frame Data QPSK 1 2 Percentage of downlink frames using QPSK 1 2 modulation 9 o Downlink Frame Data QPSK 3 4 Percentage of downlink frames using QPSK 3 4 modulation 9 o Downlink Frame Data 16 QAM 1 2 Percentage of downlink frames using 16 QAM 1 2 modulation 9 o Downlink Frame Data 16 QAM 3 4 Percentage of downlink frames using 16 QAM 3 4 modulation 9 o Downlink Frame Data 64 QAM 2 3 Percentage of downlink frames using 64 QAM 2 3 modulation 9 o Downlink Frame Data 64 QAM 3 4 Percentage of downlink frames using 64 QAM 3 4 modulation 9 o Downlink Frame Available The proportion of the downlink subframe that is unused empty 9 o Downlink Frame Size The proportion of the whole frame period that the downlink subframe occupies Performance Management Uplink Frame Overhead The proportion of the uplink subframe that is used but does not carry any data This is total of all preambles used on the uplink SS transmissions bursts plus any allocations made for non data purposes e g ranging Uplink Frame Data BPSK
328. ptioni Description2 Description3 Description4 Description5 Hardware Type IP Address Mac Address Port VLAN Profile Service Home Channel Service Product Unlicensed Channel Any Profile Name VLAN Configuration Any Name VLan ID 92 Main VOIP QoS Any Name Any Search of all columns of the selected item type Edit and Manage Search Result Search 10 0 25 19 Advanced 7 85 TRx gt Any gt Layot completion of a search individual items may be selected the relevant option buttons enabled Select the Edit button to go to edit screen for that item or Manage to go to management screen Search on a List Page Quick search Click the search box and enter the search string BS TRxs No Filter Ai Seerch IV 10025 BS TRx Name D T Managed Bees meukmanc foo EO poraa poos d esc dU socis Reload Export View Export AI Advanced Search Click the search box and enter the search string Select a filter and a secondary option Choosing the secondary option starts the search 93 Netspan Release 6 5 nection Managed aic pan IIT IIT EE qan Rn ponaacoars g mie E Bn nm um pe n Auto Refresh 1 minute Hep 94 Configuration Management Subscriber Provisioning Link Acquisition On initialization and or after signal loss the Subscri
329. r Definition 6 bytes array expressed as a pair of two 3 bytes identifiers where most significant 3 bytes represent Operator s Identifier BWA Broadband wireless access C Channel Radio Channel referred to as sector in earlier documents CIR Committed information rate used to specify the guaranteed data rate to the customer CNIR Carrier to Noise Interference Ratio CPE Customer premises equipment interchangeable with ST D DCD Downlink channel descriptor DFS Dynamic frequency selection see Introduction for further details DL Downlink DLFP Downlink frame prefix EiRP Effective isotropic radiated power FDD Frequency division duplex FEC Forward error correction IAD Integrated access device IP Internet protocol 469 Netspan Release 6 5 K Kb s Kilobits per second MAC The next layer up from the PHY known as the media access controller Mb s Megabits per second MIB Management Information Base MIMO Multiple in multiple out MIR Maximum information rate used to specify the maximum data throughput to a customer MRC Maximal ratio combining NLOS None line of sight radio propagation path NRTP Non real time polling is similar to real time polling but is used to request uplink bandwidth less regularly O amp M Operations and maintenance ODU Out door unit associated with a ST OFDM Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing P PHY The physical layer associated with the WiM
330. r more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Release Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Release of an alarm indicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all Other Actions See Action Buttons 269 Netspan Release 6 5 Management Events fte NoFite 3 XJ Layout Event Type Source Evert Into Acded Shet AUTO 10 00 00 00 0C 00 User lt admn eS n Total Database tems Tota Loaded tems 1 Reload Export View Export All Paged v SueDO Eor Close Reload Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter By Event Type e d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System cri
331. r name 9 c 9 Click OK to accept the change no reset required Note The new User Name will be required for subsequent access to the Advanced page 151 Netspan Release 6 5 10 Click Back to return to the Advanced page 152 Configuration Management Changing your Password Using WiMAXWeb tool you can change your Password for access to Advanced page as necessary For security reasons it s advisable to change your password periodically To change your Password 1 Access the Advanced page see Accessing the Advanced Page 2 Inthe Advanced page click Change Password and click Select The Change Password page appears as shown below WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Change Password Old Password New Password Confirm New Password 3 Enter your User Name 4 Enter your old Password 5 Enter your new Password 6 Re enter your new Password to Confirm 7 Click Submit A confirmation message is displayed to confirm the requested change as shown below 8 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without changing your Password Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure you want to change your password 91 9 Click OK to accept the change no reset required 4 Note The new Password will be required for subsequent access to the Advanced page 153 Netspan Release 6 5 10 Click Back to return to the Advanced p
332. r non TCP UDP IP packets Default value 65535 L2 Rules 12 Rules Source MAC Address Source MAC Address Mask Destination MAC Address Destination MAC Address Mask Layer 3 Protocol ID Type unused 3 Layer 3 Protocol ID VLAN ID VLAN User Priority Low Limit VLAN User Priority High Limit e Source Mac Address IEEE802 3 Ethernet Source MAC Address e Source MAC Address Mask IEEE802 3 Ethernet Source MAC mask e Destination MAC Address IEEE802 3 Ethernet Destination MAC Address e Destination MAC Address Mask IEEE802 3 Ethernet Destination MAC mask e Layer 3 Protocol ID Type Specified whether a QoS rule is to be applied to a link layer control LLC of either Ethertype SNAP or DSAP e Unused Layer 3 protocol type not used as a matching criteria e Ethertype SNAP Ethertype Dec Intel Xerox DIX encapsulation or the RFC1042 Sub Network Access Protocol SNAP encapsulation formats 307 Netspan Release 6 5 e DSAP The rule applies only to frames using the IEEE802 3 encapsulation format with a Destination Service Access Point DSAP other than OxAA which is reserved for SNAP e Layer Protocol ID Ethertype a hexadecimal number the range 0000 to FFFF or a DSAP number in the range 00 to FF e VLAN ID This applies only to Ethernet frames using the 802 1P Q tag header If this object s value is nonzero tagged packets must have a VLAN Identifier that matches the value in order to
333. r of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters No Filter By Scheduling type m This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited Ed Lists all criteria see Filters For definitions of list headers see Add Edit Service Classes Actions See Action Buttons 298 Service Profiles Add Edit Service Classes f Note Changing a Service Class while in use can cause the Service Flow to be in the wrong state to overcome this a re provision of the SS is required and in some instances a re provision of the BS TRx Channel maybe needed The following screen is used to specify a set of Quality of Service QoS parameters which will be associated with a Service Flow to a Subscriber Add Service Class Name Scheduling Type Best Effort Traffic Priority Highest gt Broadcast BW Reg On Requesttransmission Policy Max Sustained Rate bps Max Traffic Burst a400XXXO Bytes Min Reserved Rate 2000000 bps Min Tolerable Rate 200000 bps Tolerated Jitter 100 ims Max Latency 100 ms SDU Length Indicator Variable length 500 Size ag Bytes
334. re files must be of the same version as the local NMS server Both methods require all Netspan services to be shutdown and restarted Restoring Netspan using Attach method 1 The NMS SQL database restore files must be renamed to Netspan Data MDF and Netspan Log LDF for this operation to be successful 64 NMS Server Management 2 Inthe NMS Server Manager go to Properties gt Database tab 3 Select the Method as Attach Detach 4 Select Action as Restore and Activate to restore Netspan database NMS Server Manager Properties x Services Security Database Version Licence Diabete Transler Method C Alach Delach Database Backup estore Wotrang Importing of Hestormng a detabore vimg this feature will delete the curent NMS dakabese n use on this server Acton C Backup Restore and Activate Activate Orly Delete network elements Droctoy oc Fie Noma CANMSBxpOate sj Execute 4 If you want to delete Network element in the Netspan Database check the Delete Network Elements check box 5 In the Directory or File Name text box enter the path name of Netspan Database restore files Netspan_Data MDF and Netspan Data LDF 6 Press the Execute button This will open a DOS window and prompt to continue Y N Press y to continue 7 After few lines of messages the last message will say Operations completed SUCCESSFULLY on the local Server Press Enter to exit the program This will com
335. red parameters must be BSID AB 50 50 00 00 78 BSID Mask FF FF FF FF FF FC Example for defining an SS to work with a single Operator BS radios The operator may want to define the units EasyST ProST to work only with BS radios that belong to the specific operator but would not like to define to which specific BS radio to connect to To enable this the following must be performed SNMP Properties SNMP communication requires a manager and an agent SS SNMP provides the language and the rules that the manager and agent use to communicate The manager sends requests to an SS either to send 98 To verify that the BS TRx radios have BSIDs with the correct operator ID To utilize the Web based management for EasyST ProST in order to define The BSID Mask of FF FF FF 00 00 00 Explanation As defined by iEEE802 16 the Base Station Id is a 48 bit long programmable user defined field identifying the BS The most significant 24 bits are used as the operator ID Selected Channels List of channels that are available to the SS after the mask is applies selected informat also noti events h Configuration Management ion or to set a parameter and an SS provide the requested data or set the parameter SS s can fy the manager independently through unsolicited trap messages which indicate that certain ave occurred Management Information Bases MIBs define what can be monitored and controlled within a device
336. rerequisite software is installed with the required version number Netspan Installation 1 Copy the installation executable dlls and configuration files to a temporary location on a local hard drive 2 Run the Setup install exe program AS82700 Netepan VE opynght 2000 2007 Jpn Nae ioe RIGHTS RESERVED is Computer program is owned by Amspan Networks Inc is protected by Copyright Law and International Treaties ed reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result m CEE a n zi lagpeetothe Tema and Conditions of the Licence 3 To install the default licence tick the I agree to the Terms and Conditions of the Licence check box and then click Next If a new Licence is to be applied follow the instructions contained in Licence 4 Forrelease 6 0 licences are not yet available but when they are paste new licence in left hand side text box and click the Read button Click Apply to save the new Licence to the system and then Next 5 In Installation Type make sure that the Full Server Installation radio button is selected 47 Netspan Release 6 5 10 Inctalistion Type G Ful Serves Initaliahon Database Web Application Services Inatallation Properties Database Server 48004753 SQL2000 Tey Connection Application Path c Netspan Browse Dast Pah s los ven J Log C Program Files Microsoft SQL Serve MSSQLVDat
337. rid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters Primary No Filter By Region Name o Edit This button allows user defined criteria to be edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited o List Lists all criteria see Creating Filters To add a site 1 Click Add on the site list 2 Enter information in the fields listed below Add Site Add Site Site Properties Name Description Region Auto Discovery Region Latitude D Longitude 0 OK Cancel Validate Reload Help Site Properties o Name User defined o Description Use defined for address etc o Region Select Region from drop list If the region does not exist in the list it will have to be created See Add New Region o GPS Latitude GPS reference or Map Grid Reference o GPS Longitude GPS reference or Map Grid Reference Actions 286 Topology See Action Buttons 287 Netspan Release 6 5 Tree Topology Navigation Tree Search Q Auto Discovery Region 4 Auto Discovery SitelLat 0 000000 Long 0 000000 5 5 ABS ATCA slot 3 510010000 031051 W Sector 010000 0310511010000 031051 485 91 000000 006061 VY Channet 91 000000 006081 ABs 207 000000 060207 A Channel 207 CC0000 066207 E 85 2031000000 062203 WV Channel 203 000000 060203 EI C2
338. rm by type select by alarm type from the filter list and then the specific alarm from the for list Actions Edit click edit to open the Alarm Details See Action Buttons for other buttons 373 Netspan Release 6 5 Event Types This list is used to select the events that are to be logged and displayed in the Events list Event Types 55 trom Channel SS trom Channel SS irom Channel Guaity of Service Alarm SS trom Charnes Guaity of Service Alarm SS trom Channel SS trom Channel SS from Channen 5S trom Chanoen SW Vos Vis Ys Fs Ves Big Total Database tems 59 Total Loaded 20 Logging On Loggmg Off Reload Export View Paged V Size 20 Prevot Heip o Logging On To enable event logging click the line item and then click the Logging On button o Logging Off To disable event logging from being reported to the log click the line item and then click the Logging Off button Actions e See Action Buttons for other buttons There are some event types that may not have logging disabled Examples are SS Registration Success and SS Deregistration which are needed for provisioning Event Name Description EGP Neighbour Loss Standard trap BS TRx SS Status Notification BS TRx trap reporting SS state changes BS TRx SS Dynamic Service Fail BS TRx trap reporting failure of a dynamic service operation BS TRx SS RSSI Status Change BS TRx trap re
339. rofile Select from drop list Click List to open the Custom Configuration list Click edit to edit the selected profile o SubChannelisation Package custom Select from drop list Click List to open the Subchannelisation list Click edit to edit the selected profile Not supported on MicroMAX o Voip Qos Profile Select from drop list Click List to open the BS TRx Voip Qos Profile list Click edit to edit the selected profile o Unlicenced Channels MicroMAX only Unlicensed channel profile for dynamic frequency switching Click List to open the Unlicensed Channel list Actions See Action Buttons 234 Configuration Management 235 Netspan Release 6 5 Multi Edit BS TRx Channel Provisioning To enter this page select more than one BS TRx channel on the BS TRx channel list and click edit Multi Edit BS TRx Channel Provisioning 3 Channels In Selection General Properties Description Profiles Burst Profiles Package Sample of Burst Profile I 4 lt List us Of m Channel EL of OFDM Channel E F List List Protocol Configuration Private Key Management Custom Configuration SubChannetisation Package custom coe NM List List Voip Gos Template custom Sample of VOIP Gos F Unlicensed Channel UCT default values e Ofthe selected channels changes will be applied only to channels of Managed BS TRxs Custom profiles will be configured on the equipment only supported by g
340. rs Addresses Log Advanced zm M IP Mode Settings C Dynamic Static Static IP Address Subnet Mask 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway Hara 8 Click Submit A confirmation window appears confirming that the new parameters have been stored as shown below 157 Netspan Release 6 5 WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced New parameters have been stored effective after restart 9 To apply the settings to the unit you need to restart the unit Click Back to return to the Advanced page and then follow the restart instructions in Restarting the Unit 10 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without setting the IP mode f Note After changing the IP setting to dynamic or static the unit will still be available with IP address 10 0 0 1 and Subnet mask 255 255 255 240 158 Configuration Management Performance monitor WiMAXWeb allows you to view the link s performance To access Performance monitor 1 Access the Advanced page as described in Accessing the Advanced Page section 2 Inthe Advanced page select Performance Monitor and click Select The Performance Monitor page appears as shown below WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced Performance Monitor Downlink Channel Statistics C Real Time Statistics C Scanning Results 3 Select Downlink Channel Statistics to d
341. rvices Dependent Services Depended On Services Properties gt Start 8 stop Automatic Service Startup Stat NMS Server Manager when OS starts Stopped AIR004759 AII NMS Services Context Sensitive Help Installation Netspan comes with a context sensitive help for the Web application 48 Installation To install the Help 1 Make sure that Netspan has already been installed 2 Run the Help Install exe file 3 On the first form choose the installation s path it has to be on the local Drive 4 Click Next on the following screens 5 Click Close To Upgrade Netspan s Help 1 Uninstall any previous version of Netspan s help 2 Install the new Netspan s help version as described above Coexistence of the current Netspan With Previous Versions o The current Netspan version can coexist with the previous version but this is not recommended as this would cause performance issues o The installation upgrade of Netspan 7 will stop the services of Netspan 8 due to the SQL dependency and restart them only if configured for automatic restart otherwise they will need to be restarted manually o The installation upgrade of Netspan 8 will stop the services of Netspan 7 and they will need to be restarted manually Troubleshooting Netspan installation programs log all the actions in the log files They are essential to understand the issues with installation or upgrade of the product Please do
342. s 2003 Server in the case of a small network Windows XP Professional with the latest Service Pack applied is also supported IIS e Internet Information Services 5 0 lt IIS version lt 6 0 o SQL Server e SQL Server 2005 Express Edition SP2 or later 9 00 2047 lt SQL 2005 Express version lt 10 0 o Net Framework 2 0 e 2 0 50727 lt Net Framework version lt 2 1 Netspan installation software will automatically check if all the prerequisites are installed with the required version number 15 Netspan Release 6 5 Client Requirements Netspan 16 1 The client machine requires an internet browser of appropriate type and version Netspan is optimised for Internet Explorer 6 and Netscape Navigator 7 System validation of Netspan is performed using Internet Explorer 6 Processing of support queries is not guaranteed for other browsers although general feedback will be welcome Most other modern browsers can be used too but some client side features might be disabled or not represented exactly as in IE6 Follow the installation instruction of the browser of your choice Netspan creates a new window without browser menu to maximise the area used for displayed information When popups are disabled on the browser Netspan will reuse existing window instead Installation Server Installation Installing Windows An installation utility is used to install all the components of a system Where components cannot
343. s Type Select type to be displayed and click update from BS TRx For details of statistics see Performance Management section SS Ethernet Stats SS Air Interface Stats SS RF Stats SS Modulation Stats SS Packet Counter Statistics 184 Configuration Management Connection Provisionng Provisioning State State Changes Managed 10025131 DOO1AA OAF57 10025132 OANA 100563 100251956 tie Total Database tems 5 Total Loaded Items 5 F EAA ree sin mere Eor Auto Refresh 1 minute Help List This list summarises all the BS TRx properties To open the BS TRx page either double click a row in the list or select a row and click the Manage button e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters e d This button allows user defined criteria to be added edited System criteria are locked and may not be edited e Ed Lists all criteria see Filters e Alarm Status e A Normal Previous alarm has been cleared e Awwarning cyan e minor 185 Netspan Release 6 5 186 e Miinaeterminate magenta BS TRx Name User defined BSID BS TRx identif
344. s display only and is not editable Description o Description 1 5 User defined Service o Service Product Select Service Product from drop list See Service Products o Custom Config Profile Select from drop list See SS Custom Configuration o Port VLAN Profile Select from drop list See below VLAN Configurations o Service Enabled Places the SS in service o Service Allowed Channel Use to select the channel for this SS Set to any for nomadic use o Registered Channel Registered channel Registration Allowed Channels 100 Configuration Management It is possible to restrict the BS TRx Channels on which an SS may register The list of allowed channels for registration is specified by applying a Channel BSID Mask to a Channel BSID The list of matching BS TRx Channels is displayed as Selected Channels Care must be taken when restricting the BS TRx Channels on which an SS may register If the SS is not within range of any of the allowed BS TRx Channels it will result in the SS becoming uncontactable and a site visit may be required to restore service to the SS Allowed channels configuration Select yes to configure Restrict allowed channels Check box to open restriction selection Channel BSID Channel BSID Channel BSID Mask The BSID Mask is a user defined field that identifies which bits of the BSID require a match to enable the EasyST ProST to associate with the BS TRx
345. s not already exist o AlarmList Produces a list of active alarms the NMS Returns a null if no Alarms are found o AlarmListChanged Produces a list of active alarms changed since lastChangedTime in the NMS Returns a null if no Alarms are found o AlarmListForBSDU Produces a list of active alarms for the specified BSDU macAddress in the NMS Returns a null if no Alarms are found o AlarmListForBSTRx Produces a list of active alarms for the specified bsId in the NMS Returns a null if no Alarms are found o AlarmListForSS Produces a list of active alarms for the specified SS macAddress in the NMS Returns a null if no Alarms are found o AlarmListForSector Produces a list of active alarms for the specified Sector BSID the NMS Returns a null if no Alarms are found o AlarmListForShelf Produces list of active alarms for the specified shelfId in the NMS Returns a null if no Alarms are found Appendix o AlarmRelease Releases an existing active Alarm with AlarmID that exist the NMS Returns an error if the AlarmID does not already exist 463 General Contact Information UK Office for sales and general enquiries Airspan Communications Ltd Cambridge House Oxford Road Uxbridge Middlesex UB8 1UN Call 44 0 1895 467100 Fax 44 0 1895 467101 email sales airspan com Internet Airspan com Customer Service Help Desk for customer service emergency Airspan Communications Limited Cambridg
346. s of the download activation by category and by node Click OK to initiate the process Individual Software Upgrade If a individual BS TRx SSs are to be upgraded then see Software Management Software Upgrade Overview For buttons see Action Buttons 355 Netspan Release 6 5 Software Image Files Menu Software Management gt Image Files Software Image files Software Image Configurations List BS TRx Hier are Category rhage Type s Fil Server P pe Protocol 010 Som oey foro 110 1 6 File Information Name Create An image File Sute mes ARE File Information Product Category Image s Image Type Image File Server Protocol Type Image File Server Type Image File Server Address Image File Name With Path sueDo os OS 9 B 50007 1 Software Version Expected In The Image File Software Version BS TRx files are stored on a TFTP server When the BS TRx downloads software it does it direct from the TFTP server and Netspan needs to inform the BS TRx of the file name and location The list displays the file and the server where the file can be found o Create an Image File Suite If this box is checked an image file suite is created with the file name specified in the Name box Subscriber Station 356 Software Management Edit Software Image Configuration Name 60 110 File Information Product Category Image s ProST Application Image
347. s the possibility that two or more STs will attempt to transmit a bandwidth request at the same time and that neither request will be decoded successfully by the BS TRx each ST initiates a random back off timer before attempting to retransmit the bandwidth request On successfully receiving the bandwidth request the BS TRx will schedule bandwidth for use by the ST the ST may or may not use the bandwidth slot for the correct service flow e Non real time Polling Non real time polling is similar to real time polling as it is configured on a service flow to allow that service flow to request uplink bandwidth However in the case of non real time polling the interval at which bandwidth is made available occurs over much longer periods Bandwidth is then provided by the BS TRx for use by the ST the ST may or may not use the bandwidth slot for the correct service flow e Real time Polling Real time polling is configured on an SF to allow that a service flow to request uplink bandwidth at regular intervals Bandwidth is then provided by the BS TRx for use by the ST the ST may or may not use the bandwidth slot for the correct a service flow e Unsolicited Grant Service The unsolicited grant service provides fixed size data grants on a regular basis Uplink latency depends on regularity of data grants which in turn depends on how the specific UGS is provisioned UGS allows grants of a specific size at the poll period With a rate of 64000 bps Max
348. sabled E01038 This operation is not supported on an unmanaged BS TRx E01039 Reprovisioning this SS has no effect as the SS is not registered on its Home Channel E01040 This operation is not supported on this object E01041 VLAN Bridging is not supported on this particular BS TRx 425 Netspan Release 6 5 E01042 The specified VLAN Bridging Mode is not supported on this type of BS TRx E01043 The value specified for the Management On VLAN property is inconsistent with the selected Bridging Mode E01044 The specified Port Mode is not supported on this type of BS TRx E01045 The specified Frame Type is invalid E01046 The list of VLANs specified will be ignored as the port does not accept tagged frames E01047 The global default Reserved VLANs Management VLAN and Port VLAN must all be distinct if set E01048 One of the reserved VLANs matches the Port VLAN defined in an SS VLAN Port Profile E01049 One of the reserved VLANs matches a VLAN membership entry defined for an SS E01050 Reserved VLANs must be specified E01051 The Reserved VLANs and Management on the BS TRx must all be distinct if set E01052 One of the reserved VLANs matches the Port VLAN defined on this BS TRx E01053 One of the reserved VLANs matches a VLAN membership entry defined on this BS TRx E01054 The management VLAN matches the Port VLAN defined on this BS TRx E01055 The management VLAN matches a VLAN membership entry defined on this BS TRx
349. sed by SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan e Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event list shows all events regardless of source Network element specific events are available via the Events tab in the network element multi tab management pages Events defined Go to Event Types on Netspan to see a list of all the defined event types Actions See Action Buttons for other buttons 369 Netspan Release 6 5 370 Active Alarms Alarms Fault Management Alarms are collected from the entire network and stored within the database and displayed using filters in the Netspan alarm window view The alarm view includes important features that give effective support in subsequent problem tracking and troubleshooting Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm Active Alarms ruer NoFite 9 Alam Type BS TRx Timing Frome Lock Lost BS Timing Frame Lock Lost Lost Comms Lost Comms Lost Comms SNMP Authentication Fallure Lost Comms Lost Comms Lost Comms Lost Comms Alam into BS 1 1 AB 040038 Lock Status notLockedToOps1pos Clock BS 000111 003838 Frame Lock Status lockedToOps1pps Clock Det BS 000111 003833 ES Connection State IvakdipToBskiMan BS 000000 006033 Connection State Onine BS 000000 006091 Connection State
350. shown below 5 Alternatively click Back to return to the Advanced page without defining uplink and downlink frequency channels 137 Netspan Release 6 5 WiMAX Modem eel ida LAU EY System Signal Parameters Addresses Log 5 MHz Channel Table Settings First UL Channel Frequency Last UL Channel Frequency 3 5 MHz Channel Table Settings First UL Channel Frequency Last UL Channel Frequency 2 75 MHz Channel Table Settings First UL Channel Frequency Last UL Channel Fr equency f Note Select Reset to default to reset the device to the factory default Channel settings and replace the user defined settings 138 Configuration Management f Note The frequencies shown are for illustration purposes only the frequency range of your specific model will be displayed For each Channel Table Settings define 6 In the First UL Channel Frequency field enter the first frequency of the Frequency Channel table for the uplink communication 7 In the Last UL Channel Frequency field enter the last frequency of the Frequency Channel table for the downlink communication f Note By default all the Status Channel IDs are selected checked When other settings are selected not default the range is according to the table settings range 8 Click Submit The Channel table appears indicating the frequencies used for the uplink and downlink channels 7f Note Check boxes with a check mark indicate
351. sifier are found o PacketClassifierUpdate Updates an existing Packet Classifier in the NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the Packet Classifier name already exist in the NMS it is updated otherwise an error is returned VirtualLan The interface can be viewed by browsing to http lt webserver gt wimaxws1 VirtualLan asmx VlanCreate Creates a new VLAN in NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the VLAN name or the port ID does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise an error is returned VlanDelete Deletes an existing VLAN in the NMS Return an error if VLAN name is not found VlanGet Gets the configuration parameters as defined in 802 16f for the specified VLAN name that exist in NMS Return an error if the VLAN name does not already exist VlanList Produces a list of names of VLANs configured in the NMS Returns null if no VLANs are found VlanUpdate Updates an existing VLAN in the NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the VLAN name or port already exist in the NMS it is updated otherwise an error is returned SSVIanPortProfile The interface can be viewed by browsing to http lt webserver gt wimaxws1 SSVlanPortProfile asmx
352. sion for activation ends up in the Primary bank provided it exists in any of the banks and then reset from it After reset BS TRx now running new software In BS TRx list Running Version field shows new version Client Operations for BS TRx Specific Upgrade Note set to use BS TRx Specific Configuration 1 Create pointers to Image Files 2 Group the pointers into an Image File Suite based on product category 3 Use Edit Upgrade Category to initiate request and select required Image File Suite 1 Download and 2 Assign to Primary or Activate 360 Software Management e Download The NMS Server requests BS TRx s to retrieve Image files for a specific BS TRx type from a location on the TFTP server SS requests downloads from TFTP server The BS TRx Downloads specified image files and places in standby bank e Assign to Primary Moves image files to primary bank e Activate Activate will ensure that the version for activation ends up in the Primary bank provided it exists in any of the banks and then reset from it After reset BS TRx now running new software In BS TRx list Running Version field shows new version Client Operations for Network Wide SS Upgrade Note All SSs should be set to Use Global Config Any SSs set to use BS TRx Specific Configuration will not be upgraded in this process 1 Create pointers to Image Files 2 Group the pointers into an Image File Suite based on product category 3 Use
353. specificed in this profile Tagging Behaviour Enabled Tag VLAN ID 1 Tag VLAN User Prionty 0 e Tagging Behavior Enabled or Disabled e Tag VLAN ID VLAN ID number e Tag VLAN User Priority VLAN User Priority Actions See Action Buttons 308 VLAN Service Profiles VLAN Configurations 99 Descrifi n VLAN Id Single User Forced Broadcast Service Tagged Untagged MAC Forced Forwerding Class Name Broadcast SFIO Broadcast SFIO Forwarding IP See also VLAN Scenarios f Note The SS has two IP addresses one fixed EasyST ProST has a pre configured default IP address 10 0 0 1 and a SMC secondary management channel whose address is allocated via DHCP The only way to ping or manage an SS is via the SMC In order to assign a secondary management channel the network needs to be connected to a DHCP Server Then once the DHCP server has allocated an IP address on the SMC the SS can be managed and pinged If using a management VLAN then a VLAN entry in the Service Profiles gt VLAN Configurations section must be created with the VLAN number matching the management VLAN ID in order for the SS s to receive an IP address from the DHCP Server It does not matter whether tagged or single user are checked or not List For descriptions of list headings see Add Edit VLAN Actions See Action Buttons 309 Netspan Release 6 5 Add Edit VLAN The 802 1Q standard VLAN tagging is supported
354. spnet version to 1 1 Reinstall Netspan Re install IIS Go to Add Remove programs select Add Remove Windows Components gt Application Server and 49 Netspan Release 6 5 50 was successful During an Upgrade installation there is a failure at the Database upgrade scripts stage The Database you are attempting to upgrade is below the minimum upgradeable version to SR3 0 i e 8 20 010 enable feature Do a two step upgrade first upgrade your SR1 0 database to SR2 0 and then from SR2 0 to SR3 0 Installation Licensing Using a Default Licence During Installation of Software Netspan use is protected by licence system The licence takes the form of text encoded encrypted licence key The licence is used to authorise the access to the advanced features and to limit the maximum number of created BS TRx and SS network elements During the installation a licence screen is displayed Click next to continue install with the default licence Tick the I agree to the Terms and Conditions of the Licence check box and then click Next if you don t need to apply a new Licence Licences Licences are distributed as an encrypted text file The can be opened and viewed using Notepad E Testunismited NBIF Enabled nlf Notepad Adding a Licence During Installation 51 Netspan Release 6 5 leue minal nm nml ne med veel When presented with the licence scheme open the licenc
355. sses for SNMP discovery But in special cases for example MicroMAX this is not the case since BS TRx does not report SS IP addresses In this case we have to include all IP addresses for SNMP discovery but it would slow down the effective discovery of such SSs Actions Add Click Add to add a new target IP address range A new line is added to the list Enter the start and end addresses of the range by typing directly into the list Delete Select the range to be deleted click delete to remove the selected range of IP addresses Actions See Action Buttons 399 Netspan Release 6 5 Server Global Configuration Edit Global Server Configuration Edit Global Server Configuration User Interface Default Values Default Operator 18 000000 Default Management VLAN ID VLAN 104094 default mgmt Default Hardware Category Default Port VLAN ID 104093 default Port Vian ID E Default Reserved VLAN ID 1 VLAN 04090 default reserved z Default Reserved VLAN ID 2 VLAN 104091 default reserved2 gt Default Reserved VLAN ID 4G VLAN 104092 default reserved E Default configuration to apply on Discovery Auto Discovery Site oo Discovery Site Default SS configuration Serece Product iot sat VLAN Port Template not set x SS Custom Configuration not set Security Security Policy Statistics Management BS TRx Ethernet Stats Enabled s SSRF Stats Embed sj BS TRx Air Int
356. st power control messages Unit ms Link Update SS Sets the number of SSs that can be concurrently updated Min Ranging TOS The number of transmission opportunities to contend for bandwidth per second Periodic Ranging Type O regular 1 Fast Always set to 1 Downlink Map Period The maximum interval that the BS TRx will allow between the transmission of DL Maps Uplink Allocation Max Size The upper limit in bytes of any single allocation that may be granted to an SS in the uplink Uplink Adjacent Allocations Gap This sets the gap to be placed between two consecutive bursts from the same SS Default 2 symbols Downlink Preambles Use Preambles are bursts used to allow the SS to re synchronize Enable in fading environments Contention Period The turnaround gap between the last DL burst and the next uplink contention slot Initial Burst TTG Gap between the end of the initial burst and the start of uplink processing BS TRx Profiles Downlink Max Allocation Size The upper limit in bytes of any single allocation that may be granted to an SS in the downlink Midamble Repetition Interval A preamble precedes each frame and this sets the number of bytes for a midamble O disable 4 8or 16 Timing Source Used for systems that have GPS timing sources implemented Transmission Frame Gap Interval between transmission frame OFDM Channel OFDM Channel o Fast Power Control Of Earliest STC Minimum Shift 8
357. st raised Edit This gives additional alarm details including a history of that particular alarm See Alarm Details Acknowledge Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Release Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Release of an alarm indicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all To delete one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Delete Button Other Actions See Action Buttons Configuration Management SS Management Events Fier No Filter j 73 Layout a JSS Equipment S 555 00 40 04 0 08 49 6 0 18 0 PAddress 10 0 35 3 255 255 255 255 WiliMacAddess MESS Registration SS 00 0 0 0 08 49 Bxatusinto Nuf ChanneleNut BES Registration SS 00 A004 CO 08 49 Stotusinto Nevw Status notitication Channel 00 004 1 00568 LESS Dere
358. stained Traffic Rate parameter rtPs The rtPS is designed to support real time data streams consisting of variable sized data packets that are issued at periodic intervals such as moving pictures experts group MPEG video The mandatory QoS service flow parameters for this scheduling service are Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate 11 13 8 Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate 11 13 6 Maximum Latency 11 13 14 and Request Transmission Policy 11 13 12 nrtPS The nrtPS is designed to support delay tolerant data streams consisting of variable sized data packets for which a minimum data rate is required such as FTP The mandatory QoS service flow parameters for this scheduling service are Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate 11 13 8 Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate 11 13 6 Traffic Priority 11 13 5 and Request Transmission Policy 11 13 12 BE The BE service is designed to support data streams for which no minimum service level is required and therefore may be handled on a space available basis The mandatory QoS service flow parameters for this scheduling service are Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate 11 13 5 Traffic Priority 11 13 5 and Request Transmission Policy 11 13 12 Examples Below are sample screens showing Service Flows for a number of possible setups o Multiple Uplink Service Flows Best Effort P2 amp P7 o Multiple Uplink Service Flows Best Effort Both P2 o Multiple Uplink Downlink Service Flows Best Effort o Mul
359. status are all collected by the management system at programmable intervals Statistics and status information will be lost in the case of system power failure The management system presents the data in tables All of the data can be logged to file which can be stored on the hard disk All statistics are time stamped Netspan Release 6 5 Important Definitions Template Profile template and profile are terms used in the document in places referring to the same entity defined as a Set of properties grouped and identified by the name used to provision configure equipment service by simple reference to the name of the template profile e g Packet Classifier Rule Profile Profiles templates are stored in the Netspan database and are applied to the equipment as a flat set of properties Class A Class is a set of properties grouped and identified by the name for the common use in the Netspan database and BS TRx database e g Service Class Since the definition of the class is known by BS TRx the configuration is simplified to setting only class name instead of flat set of all properties What s New What s New Release 6 5 Frequency Bands Generic Netspan support for all the new frequency bands introduced in this release Configuration of NTP Servers Each BS TRx can be assigned up to four NTP server IP addresses which can be used for time synchronisation It is possible to configure those IP addresses from Netspan instead of us
360. supports configurable outer tag Ethertype The configurable Ethertype field values are 0x8100 default IEEE 802 1ad 0x9100 0x9200 and 0x9300 191 Netspan Release 6 5 o S Tag Configuration Mode Select Use SS Configuration or select Use BS Configuration For All SSs o Use C Tag Priority For S Tag Select Yes or No If Yes selected then the Default C Tag Priority set in Port is used o S Tag If Use C Tag Priority is set to No then set S Tag Priority SNMP Properties o Allow edit Check this box to enable access to all controls in this section o IP Address IP address of Ethernet connection o Port SNMP port number o SNMP Version Select version Netspan supports SNMP V2c o SNMP Read Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o SNMP Write Community Sets SNMP privacy parameters private public needed if using SNMP V2c o Timeout The number of milliseconds that the NMS waits for a response VLAN Configuration Options a Transparent Mode is not available for HiperMAX HiperMAX micro and MacroMAX For these platforms use Transparent port mode instead Allow Edit V Bridge Mode Transparent Reserved VLAN 1 VLAN 104090 default reserved Management On VLAN Disabled Reserved VLAN 2 VLAN 104091 default reserved2 Reserved VLAN 3 b Bridge Mode VLAN Port Mode Transparent Allow Edit IV Bridge Mode VLAN Management On Traff
361. t 1 Senice Enabled Xe Senice Allowed Channel a gf Registered Channel Registration Allowed Channels Allow configuration to be set on SS Yes Restrict allowed channels Channel BSID 0000000000 Channel BSID Mask 1000000 000000 Sector Coin 91 Selected Channels SNMP Properties Allow edit Address 10 0 36 151 Pot pmi Version Read Community public Wnte Community private Timeout 5000 o Address This field is display only and is not editable Description o Description 1 5 User defined Service o Service Product Select Service Product from drop list See Service Products o Custom Config Profile Select from drop list See SS Custom Configuration o Port VLAN Profile Select from drop list See below VLAN Configurations o Service Enabled Places the SS in service o Service Allowed Channel Use to select the channel for this SS Set to any for nomadic use o Registered Channel Registered channel Registration Allowed Channels It is possible to restrict the BS TRx Channels on which an SS may register The list of allowed channels for registration is specified by applying a Channel BSID Mask to a Channel BSID The list 97 Netspan Release 6 5 of matching BS TRx Channels is displayed as Selected Channels Care must be taken when restricting the BS TRx Channels on which an SS may register If the SS is not within range o
362. t Alarms e Ack This box is ticked when alarm has been acknowledged e User Name of user e Last Received Time when alarm was last raised e Alarm Count The number of times an alarm has gone from clear to raised 255 Netspan Release 6 5 256 Edit This gives additional alarm details including a history of that particular alarm See Alarm Details Acknowledge Alarms can be acknowledged by any user Alarms can be de acknowledged by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To acknowledge one or more alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Acknowledge Button Acknowledgement of an alarm indicates that a particular user is investigating the alarm Release Alarms can be released by administrator or user who acknowledged alarm To release one or more acknowledged alarms select the alarms in the list and click the Release Button Release of an alarm indicates that the user is no longer investigating the alarm Delete Alarms are NOT deleted automatically They have to be explicitly deleted by administrator or user which acknowledged alarm Unacknowledged alarm cannot be deleted by non administrator at all Other Actions See Action Buttons Configuration Management BS TRx Management Events Fiter No Filter j 7g ies Lid Evert Type Source Evert info R BS TRx Added ps TRx 313238 303032 User Netviee Discovery Service 1200772 BE n Total Database hems 1 Total Loaded ems Relo
363. t the import of the main object fails the dependent object s will remain imported 413 Netspan Release 6 5 IP Network IP Network Profiles Each BS TRx can be assigned up to four NTP server IP addresses which can be used for time synchronisation It is possible to configure those IP addresses from Netspan instead of using the direct Web browser of the BS TRx This feature is not available for MicroMAXBS TRx BS TRx IP Network Profiles List eae NTP Server NTP Server2 P NTP Server3 NTP Servers i Address Address Address Address SW Lab 10 025 40 0000 0000 0000 o not imponed 258 pug 00 01 0001 10001 10001 0 Knot imported Total Database tems 2 Total Loaded tems 2 Add ede Delete Reload Export View Export Pages 52020 Prevot x ot List o DBID Database Identifier o Name Profile Name o NTP Server 1 IP Address IP Address of server 1 o NTP Server 2 IP Address IP Address of server 2 o NTP Server 3 IP Address IP Address of server 3 o NTP Server4 IP Address IP Address of server 4 o Import Details DBID Database Identifier if profile has been imported o Import Description Description of Database Identifier if profile has been imported Actions See Action Buttons 414 Server Add Edit IP Network Profile This screen is used to enter the IP addresses of different IP servers Add BS TRx IP Network Profile Name i NT
364. tched with Netspan ver 255 8 60 001 IIS SQL Server Login created NMS Database Installation settings updated IIS reset successfully IIS started successfully Operations completed SUCCESSFULLY on the local Server Press Enter to exit the program This restores and activates Netspan database from the restore file NetspanDB 02 11 BAK found in the directory C NMSBkpData Executing from Netspan Server Manager Tool Backing up Netspan Database Netspan database can be backed up using either the Detach or Database Backup method Detach method requires all Netspan services to be shutdown while the Database Backup does not Backing up Netspan using Detach method 1 Inthe NMS Server Manager go to Properties Database tab 2 Select the Method as Attach Detach 3 Select Action as Backup to backup Netspan database 63 Netspan Release 6 5 x Services Securty Database Version Licence Database Traraler Method Altach Detach Backup Restore Waning Importing Hestonng database useg thes feature delete the conent NMS database m use on this server Backup C Renoa and Activate C Activa E o Name CANMSBkpD ate E 4 In the Directory or File Name Text box enter path name where you would like to save the Netspan backup Database 5 Press the Execute button This will open a DOS window and prompt to continue Y N Press r y to continue 6 After few lines o
365. te Eno Reporting server To setup a Epu Reporting server ho control the inbomahon sert to Miciooolt see maosa com cemmiro arp utes the reports only to mprove SQL Server ard tests rbomabon as confident Fo more intoemation on the enx repoting estre and the type of infomaon sert cick Heb Aonais send fetal emo reports to Merosot Les 27 Netspan Release 6 5 11 Final screen shall appears Start Copying Files click Next 12 13 SQL SP4 is now complete Select Yes I want to restart my computer now and click finish Setup han copying Hes to your computer you can ute the program you must restat Windows or your computer ek ai ita cont ro No Lvl resta my computer later Remove any dihs hom thee divez and then cick Fireth to Complete setup 14 After the reboot the folder created during SQL SP4 setup C SQL2KSP4 can be deleted De SX CN CHA INE LC E gt Gore 09 20 2 TR casas Folders Gi desktop 498 My Documents 221082005 15 30 8 My Pktures JEQHotfix Fie Folder 2208 2005 15 30 My Computer eT File Folder 22 08 2005 15 29 29 3 Floppy A Cinsa File Folder 22 08 2005 15 30 9 Local Disk C Gms File Folder 22 08 2005 15 29 CI books C msolap File Folder 22 08 2005 15 29 CJ od File Folder 22 08 2005 15 30 Documents and Sett
366. te the BS TRx SS is set to run with this image It will automatically be rebooted and then the requested s w will run SS s also have the option to o Assign to Primary Ensures if possible that the version requested ends up in the primary bank The subscriber does not lose service but the software does not become active until the SS is reset or rebooted 364 Software Management Edit Upgrade Category Identity Hardware Category Image Type s ion SCRT Description BS with OS Application ad SCRT images Type 85 TR Nodes Of This Type In Network b Software Upgrade All Nodes Of This Hardware Category Except Where Individually Overridden Request Download Image File Suite 584 no cert 4_ 035 SCRT only Schedule iv Time Start 00 00 Time End 10000 Time Span 00 00 hours minutes Date Stat 06082007 Date End 06 08 2007 _ Date Span days Software Upgrade Summary Report For Nodes Of This Hardware Category amp Images Description Catagory Specific Node Specific OK Vel we Reload To perform a system wide upgrade this should be set to Download Software otherwise for individual BS TRx SS upgrade leave as Idle Schedule If in allow edit mode a request is made other than idle then a schedule box appears If the box is checked new controls appear to selects the date and time for download to start and to finish and the period in hours
367. tere Total Loaded Items t The screen capture above is for a single managed SS The screen for Multiple SS management contains the same fields Note Not all actions are supported on the MicroMAX Action Request o Select Action from list e Reset Subscriber Station e Instruct SS to de register and change the channel e Instruct SS to de register and stop transmitting e Instruct SS to de register and restrict transmission e Instruct SS to re register e Delete all SS Configuration Click Queue Action to add to the queue Click Confirmation Yes to proceed No to abort Note If performing multiple SS management then each item is added individually to the queue Any actions that are not supported an error message is displayed and the item is not added to the queue 177 Netspan Release 6 5 Action Request Select Action Reset Subscriber Station Instruct SS to de register and change the channel Instruct SS to de register and stop transmitting Instruct SS to de register and restrict transmission Instruct SS to re register Action Queue Displays all outstanding actions associated with the SSs Action Buttons See Action Buttons 178 Configuration Management Multiple SS Management Software Multiple Subscriber Station Management a State Actions Software Inventory Alarms Events Statistics Configure Software Download Hardware EcaySt Appication 1 Category
368. teria are locked and may not be edited e Ed Lists all criteria see Filters Events Events may be raised by e SNMP notifications traps or other protocol s notifications received by Netspan e Internal Netspan notifications sent by any Netspan component to Netspan Event Service The Event tab shows the events stored in the database for the selected BS TRx e Event Name See Fault Management Event Types e Source ShelfID of the shelf e Event Information For event messages see Fault Management Events e Received Time Time when event was last raised 270 Configuration Management BSDU BSDU BSDUs Fiter No Filter E 5 Conrection MAC Adoress Meragjed State Discovered 08 Cache Changed bo A0 BD 06 AG C6 10035 29 Tota Database hems 1 Total Loaded tema 1 Add Clone Mare Dette Reload Export View Export All Paged V Size 2 PrevNext List This list summarises all the BSDU properties open the BSDU edit page either double click a row in the list or select a row and click the edit button e Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pager bar when grid is paged To refine results and narrow search select the appropriate filter Below is a list of system filters in addition there may be user defined filters
369. the screen AS8200 Netspan V8 Network Management System for WIMAX About Product 0 5 Type Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows NT 5 2 3790 Serece Pack 2 Physical Memory 1022 M8 Web Application Version 5 8 50 009 r Database Version 5 8 50 009 Database Engine Version amp local Microsoft SOL Server 2000 8 00 2039 Inte X85 May 3 2005 23 18 38 Copynght c 1988 2003 Microsoft Corporation Standard Edition an Windows NT 5 2 Build 3790 Service Pack 2 15 Version Country Variant Code default Copyright Copynght 2007 Airspan Contact Airspan Licence Status No License Installed NIF Service Profiles Definition Enabled False Max Number of BS TRx tems Unlimited Max Number of SS Items Unlimited Netspan Servers Instalador eri Major Minor Res e Budd Number version Product Version Version 3 Server Name Deccrigion Instalelion Type FulUpgrade 5850009 Installation History Instatiebor Type and Fist Version Product Version ul Upgrade 5850009 End Success 5 toed x it BS 1 i FulUporade 5850009 Stat 5 Terr ee CI T Cm ee 5 Server hame Description instalation Type Budo Number Time Updated About Product read only OS Type OS in use Physical Memory Displays the size of RAM on the Server Web Application Version Displays current Netspan software version Database Version Displays current database version
370. the field displays the Max Supported Round Trip Delay as the Max cell size in meters o Tolerable Timing Offset per FS Recommended value 0 o Tolerable Power Offset dB Recommended value 0 00 o Tolerable Frequency Offset Hz Recommended value 0 o Downlink Initial Burst Modulation not supported on MicroMAX This is the modulation that will be used for broadcast traffic in the downlink and so should not be set at a modulation higher than what all deployed SS can receive The default is BPSK1 2 o Guard Interval Ratio G This sets the ratio of the cyclic prefix to frame size to allow a guard to be placed between symbols to reduce the effects of multipaths The cyclic prefix is sized appropriately to serve as a guard time to eliminate intersymbol interference This is accomplished because the amount of time dispersion from the channel is smaller than the duration of the cyclic prefix A fundamental trade off is that the cyclic prefix must be long enough to account for the anticipated multipath delay spread experienced by the system The amount of overhead increases as the cyclic prefix gets longer The sizing of the cyclic prefix forces a tradeoff between the amount of delay spread that is acceptable and the amount of Doppler shift that is acceptable Actions See Action Buttons 325 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profiles BS TRx 802 16 Protocol Configuration Profiles eo Up KM M JOD Tranetton
371. the new parameters have been stored WIMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced LAN Table Parameters have been stored effective after restart Back 164 Configuration Management 4 Click Back to return to the Advanced page and then follow the restart instructions in Restarting the Unit 165 Netspan Release 6 5 LAN Table Entries The LAN Table Entries page allows you to e View current MAC table entries e Add static MAC entries maximum 10 e Convert Dynamic MAC entries to Static entries e Delete specific MAC entries or all MAC entries in the table Viewing Entries To access LAN Table Entries and view MAC entries 1 Access the Advanced page as described in Accessing the Advanced Page section 2 Inthe Advanced page select LAN Table Entries and click Select The LAN Table Entries page appears as shown below WiMAX Modem Management System Signal Parameters Addresses Log Advanced MAC Table O 001 00 02 B3 17 27 F7 Learned 1 002 00 30 48 00 00 CF Learned Daan Deselect At SetAs Static _ Delete _ Ad Back Adding an Entry To Add a table entry to the MAC table 1 Click Add to add an additional Static entry a prompt appears x inum 9 Enter Static MAC Address 2 Enter the Static Mac address to be added to the MAC table Maximum number of Static entries is 10 3 Click OK to accept the Static MAC address
372. tion Subscriber Station Set up some basic Service Classes For the purpose of this example setup two basic Service classes are set The setup for service classes can be found in the Service Profiles menu 1 Name Broadcast with a maximum sustained rate of 50000bps leave all other fields as default 2 Name Normal Traffic with a maximum Sustained Rate of 10000000bps all other fields as default See Add Edit Service Classes Set up a basic BS TRx Burst Profile Create a BS TRx profile called All Mods and set the FEC code types as in the picture below See Burst Profiles Packages 79 Netspan Release 6 5 Add BS TRx Burst Profiles Package Downlink Protection Fade Margin 3 00 CINR Hysteresis Overlap 1 00 Focused Cortention Co Ty EC Code Type Power Boost 98 Set up a BS TRx Profile Custom Configuration Create a custom BS TRx configuration called Unchecked Broadcast See BS TRx Profile Custom Configuration Set as follows o Allow Insecure SS Check ticked o Unchecked Broadcast Service Class set to Broadcast o Leave other fields as default VLAN Configuration Edit the VLAN called Default AS MAX Untagged See VLAN Configurations Select from the menu the Broadcast service class created earlier 80 Getting Started Add VLAN Name VLAN Id Tagged Traffic Description Add This To All Existing BS TRes DHCP o DHCP Re
373. tions completed SUCCESSFULLY on the local Server Press Enter to exit the program This stops all Netspan services and makes a copy of the Netspan MDF and LDF files into directory C NMSBkpData Backing up Netspan using Database Backup method 1 Open the DOS command window and change the directory to that of the server change tool The default installation location of this is C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200NetspanV8 Setup Setup ServerChange 2 At the command prompt type the following line gt setup serverchange exe A B M DBBR P C NMSBkpData 3 This will output the following lines 61 Netspan Release 6 5 NMS ServerChange utility v255 8 60 001 This executable is going to Backup the NMS Database on the Local Machine NMSServerName Do you want to continue Y N 4 Pressing Y will output the following lines Creating Log File Starting database backup operation Existing database files backedup successfully to c nmsbkpdata NetspanDB BAK Operations completed SUCCESSFULLY on the local Server Press Enter to exit the program This will backup Netspan database creating a backup file with extension BAK in directory C NMSBkpData without stopping any Netspan Services Restoring Netspan Database Netspan database can be restored either using the Attach method or Database Restore method This depends on the backup method used to backup Netspan database For restore to work successfully the restore files must b
374. tiple Uplink Downlink Service Flows Best Effort amp rtPS o Multiple Uplink Downlink Service Flows Best Effort amp UGS o TOS6 437 Netspan Release 6 5 Multiple Uplink Service Flows Best Effort P2 amp P7 Service Service Class Classifiers Product Priority Priority 7 7 High Destination IP 195 217 232 30 2 Destination 101 195 217 232 32 Note The ARP Classifier needs to be set so that ARP packets can pass over the uplink In this traffic uplink packets will only pass to IP 195 217 232 30 and Destination 195 217 232 32 Traffic packets to IP 195 217 232 30 will have the highest priority Service Product Working Example 6 Edit Service Product identity Name Description Multiple UL SF Service Flow Template List Description Service Class Sc Traffic Direction Initial Convergencs Scheduling Priority State Sublayer Type Type gepoownlink P2 Best Effort MIR 600kBest Effort2 Downlink ActivePacket 802 3 Ethernet Classifier Priority L3 Rule EX Present Sampie of Packet Zuplink P2 Best Effort MIR 600kBest Effort2 Uplink 802 3 Ethernet Classifier Priority 15 Rule 12 Rule Present Present Service Class P2 Best Effort MIR 600k 438 Max Trafic Burst Service Class P7 Best Effort MIR 200k Edit Service Class Packet Classifier Pass All Add Packet Classifier Rule Profile Name Pass Pnomy 1 Action Forward E 00000000000
375. tistics o Filter Filter by By Date Changed in Last Day Changed in Last Hour Changed in Last Week Registered A list of current filters is displayed by clicking the list button See Filters o BS TRx Name BS TRx Name o Mac Address SS MAC address o Registered Indicates whether the SS is registered on the specified BS TRx Channel These counters are all reset when the BS TRx resets and counters for individual SSs are reset if the SS has been deregistered from the BS TRx for 3 days SS Packet Counter Statistics These counters all reset when the BS TRx resets and counters for individual SSs are reset if the SS has been deregistered from the BS TRx for 3 days o Uplink Basic SDU Count SDU count on SS basic management uplink to BS TRx connection o Downlink Basic SDU Count SDU count on SS basic management downlink from BS TRx connection o Uplink Primary SDU Count SDU count on SS primary management uplink to BS TRx connection o Downlink Primary SDU Count SDU count on SS primary management downlink from BS TRx connection o Uplink Secondary SDU Count SDU count on SS secondary management uplink to BS TRx connection o Downlink Secondary SDU Count SDU count on SS secondary management downlink from BS TRx connection o Uplink SDU Count SDU count on SS uplink to BS TRx connection This does not include management traffic o Downlink SDU Count SDU count on SS downlink from BS TRx connection
376. tly running versions of software as well as allow the software upgrade of individual or multiple SSs SS Software Fiter z No Filter senr anoa croa 10 0 35 46 EasyST r Download Completed 8 A0 0A CO 06 48 10 035 80 EssySt Bbo A0 0A CO 0F 97 10025 30 EnsySt d 7 hi l d n Tatal Oatabase temz 3 Total Loaded tems 3 Manage Relead Export View Export All Paged v Size 20 PrevNex 1 wor k Help Click any item on the list double click item or click manage button to open the Subscriber Station Management page for that item Select multiple items on the list click manage button to open the Multiple Subscriber Station Management page for those items List o Mac Address MAC address o IP Address SS IP address o Hardware Category Hardware Type o Use Upgrade Category Config Checked if yes o Latest Request The latest request sent to hardware o NMS State Software upgrade state o Scheduled Ticked if scheduled o Start Date Scheduled start date of download o End Date Scheduled end date of download o Start Time Scheduled start Time of download o End Time Scheduled end time of download o Image Type Application or OS o Running Version Version of the currently running software o Running Details Details as provided by BS TRx o Primary Version This version is the one that is or will be used by the SS after reset o Primary deta
377. to re register e Delete all SS Configuration Click Queue Action to add to the queue Click Confirmation Yes to proceed No to abort Note If performing multiple SS management then each item is added individually to the queue Any actions that are not supported an error message is displayed and the item is not added to the queue 109 Netspan Release 6 5 Action Request Select Action Reset Subscriber Station Instruct SS to de register and change the channel Instruct SS to de register and stop transmitting Instruct SS to de register and restrict transmission Instruct SS to re register Action Queue Displays all outstanding actions associated with the SSs Action Buttons See Action Buttons 110 Configuration Management Subscriber Stations Recently on BS TRxs This screen shows the BS TRxs that the subscriber stations have recently connected to Fiter No 4 5 ser teyot EN a Time Last Detected 1 4207 2007 153031 18 07 2007 171603 SOC 196 DAMA 100568 100 25196 2 E 1710712007 131219 170702007 233340 SOc 197 DOADOA 100542 10025137 6 t Total Database tems 2 Total Loaded beams 2 Edit Veng Relead Export View Export As Poged PrevNext t Elor Filter Filters are used to limit the number of rows displayed in the grid by providing specific query criteria The query results are limited to 200 rows The actual number of rows is displayed on the pag
378. tspan server and database must be of the same version for this tool to work This tool can be executed two ways 1 in DOS command window 2 or from NMS Server Manager tool 7f Warning This command line tool will cause all the NMS services IIS and SQL services to restart Executing in DOS window Backing up Netspan Database Netspan database can be backed up using either the Detach or Database Backup method Detach method requires all Netspan services to be shutdown while the Database Backup does not Backing up Netspan Database 1 Open the DOS command window and change the directory to that of the server change tool The default installation location of this is C Program Files Airspan Networks Inc AS8200 Netspan V8 Setup Setup ServerChange 2 At the command prompt type the following line gt setup serverchange exe A B M ATTA P C NMSBkpData 3 This will output the following lines NMS ServerChange utility v255 8 60 001 This executable is going to Backup the NMS Database on the Local Machine NMSServerName Do you want to continue Y N Press y to continue 4 Pressing Y will output following lines Creating Log File NMS Services Stopped IIS Stopped ReStarted SQL Server NMSServerName SQL2005 successfully Stopped SQL Server NMSServerName SQL2005 successfully Existing database files backedup successfully to c nmsbkpdata Started SQL Server NMSServerName SQL2005 successfully IIS started successfully Opera
379. u 59 2000 5 452 SD OMA US 12 C Pretestad SQL2000 kB884Sz5 Sp4 Se 44 4 MB 101 siz object s Disk free space 4 11 GB Install each executables to the default folder listed C SQL2KSP4 as shown below Location te Save Files Where wadi you the to save your peep pe ieina seer bein If the folder dows not exist t vi be created for you To continue cick Ment Save in folder iet Installation 3 After running all four service packs go to the directory C SQL2KSP4 and run Setup bat Ee gi Mew Favoes Tools Back gt Gy Byrciders 9 20 OIX ZA My Computer 1464 Filo Folder 22 08 2005 15 29 8 28 3 Floppy Costa File Folder 22 08 2005 15 30 Local Disk C Omo File Folder 22 08 2005 15 29 CJ books msolap Fie Folder 22708 2005 15 29 sO os O Eie Folder 22 08 2005 15 30 S Documents and Settings kcense txt 14KB Text Document 28 03 2005 14 02 sO 1366 ReadmeSgl2k32s 163KB HTML Document 03 05 2005 21 27 9 C3 Inetpob M redist txt 29KB Text Document 28 03 2005 14 02 CJ Program Files Ce setup bat 1KB MS DOS Batch Fie 20 10 2002 15 21 25 SQUKSPA i smssalzkspa pdt 1KB POF Fie 03 05 2005 21 27 amp C ose lt gt 13 object s Disk free space 34 1 GB Boake KE My Computer 4 A screen will appear as follows click Next
380. up Select the Management Studio Express little drop down list and choose Will be installed on local hard drive That s the only difference from the Default Settings Then click Next 40 Installation Instance Name You can install a defaut instance or you can specify named instance i If you are asked to enter an instance s name type SQLEXPRESS otherwise select the default instance radio button components Components have been found on the machine Select upgrade options below Click Next 41 Netspan Release 6 5 The authertication mode specifies the security used when connecting to SQL Server Click Next 42 Installation Click Next 43 Netspan Release 6 5 Setup has finished configuration of Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Surface Area Configuration toc Configuring and Managing SQL Server Express For improved manageability and security SOL Server 2005 provides more control over the SOL Server curface area on your system To minimize the surface ares the following default configurations have been applied to your instance of SQL server o connections are disabled ES e DX LLL ITI Click Finish Reboot your machine 44 Installation Installing Microsoft Net framework Net Framework 1 Install the Net Framework version 2 0 according to the operating system This has to be installed after IIS If you have doubts abo
381. urements only e 55 Ethernet Statistics latest measurements only e 55 Air Interface Statistics latest measurements only e 55 RF Statistics latest measurements only e SS Modulation Statistics latest measurements only e 55 Packet Counts latest measurements only What s New Single and multi Channel management BS TRx Air Interface Usage full history e BS TRx Air Interface Counts full history e 55 RF Statistics latest measurements only e SS Modulation Statistics latest measurements only Single and multi SS managements e 55 Ethernet Statistics full history e 55 Air Interface Statistics full history e SSRF Statistics full history e 55 Modulation Statistics full history e 55 Packet Counts full history MicroMAX BS TRxs will support a subset of these statistics in SR6 0 It is possible to navigate to the management page of any BS TRx Channel or SS in the statistics grids by following the appropriate hyperlink in the grid Integrated VLAN provisioning o MacroMAX HiperMAX HiperMAX micro support for PVID Release SR6 brings the implementation of VLAN bridging closer to IEEE802 1Q standard SR6 MacroMAX HiperMAX and HiperMAX micro SR6 now have standard implementation of Port VLAN ID and accepts standard based configuration with Acceptable Frame Types and PVID The backwards compatibility is guaranteed in both directions e BS TRx running SR6 code still responds to old configuration sets e Netspan
382. ut the installation sequence uninstall Net and reinstall it again Operating System Net Framework 2 0 Windows Server 2003 Dotnet Mdotnetfx exe 2 The Net Framework files can be found on the Netspan installation CD Bi C Image PreInstalf dotnet 091 7 x fle dt Yew Favertes Tods Help a bak O 17 2 Co Folders gt X C2 il Address C tmage pretnstatidotnet 22 960 K8 Application 25 08 2006 11 52 3 Select Run Open File Security Warning x Do you want to run this file Mame Publisher Microsoft Corporation Type Application From C lmagelPreinstalidetnet _ TV Always ask before opening this While fram the Intenet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer Only sun software from publishers you trust What s the risk Click next WF Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Setup Welcome to Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Setup This wizard wil guide you through the installation process dee 4 Click I agree to any licensing terms 5 Click Finish 45 Netspan Release 6 5 46 rework Installation Netspan Server Installation Pre Install Netspan Server Installation Before installing please ensure that the system prerequisites as detailed in Hardware Requirements and Software Requirements are met Note Netspan installation software will automatically check if all the p
383. vanced options 90 Main Advanced options are 802 16 Protocol Any Name Active Alarm Any Alarm Type Source User BS TRx Any BS TRx Name BSID Connection State Hardware Type IP Address Management VLAN Id Region Name Shelf ID Site Name BS TRx Channel Any BS TRx Name Burst Profiles Package Channel BSID Channel Name Custom Config Profile OFDM Channel Profile PKM Profile Protocol Config Profile Region Name Site Name BS TRx Custom Any Configuration Name Base Station Any Distribution Unit BSDU Name Hardware Type IP Address Mac Address Region Name Site Name BS TRx Software Any BS TRx Name Hardware Category IP Address Primary Version Running Version Site Software Images Standby Version State Status Burst Profiles Any Name Filter Any Creator Description Name Sharable System 91 Netspan Release 6 5 Type Historical Alarm Any Alarm Type OFDM Channel Any Name Packet Classifier Any Name Private Key Any Management Name Region Any Name Service Class Any Name Service Product Any Name Shelf Any Site Name Region Name Site Any Region Name SS Custom Any Configuration Name SS Software Any Hardware Category Mac Address Primary Version Running Version Software Images Standby Version State Status SS Vlan Port Any Name Sub Channelisation Any Name Subscriber Station Any Custom Config Profile Descri
384. via Edit on the Active Alarms page Historical Alarms page or Alarm tabs This page summarises all the alarm information The edit button allows the user to view alarm detail information and ability to add a comment if desired There is also diagnostic displaying probable cause and action to rectify the situation Alarm Details 1 Alarm Type Dnk Domn Source BS TRx 010000 050193 ifindex 7 Aw i Alarm Properties for Alarm ID 177 Ami ikon Severity Noma First Raised 17 07 2007 10 54 12 Acknowledged Last Raised 107 2007 09 07 07 UserName 0 Alarm Count a 1 Number of Raise Events Link Down Alarm Type Properties ITU Event Type Communications Alarm Probable Cause One of the network or radio interfaces is not operational e Sa User Description Alarm History for Alarm ID 177 ni 4 Alarm Details e Alarm Type Alarm type raised e Source Equipment creating the alarm e Alarm ID ID automatically assigned to the alarm e Prev The Prev button is used to show alarm details for the previous alarm of the same alarm type with the same alarm source e Next The Next button is used to show alarm details for the next alarm of the same alarm type with the same alarm source This makes is easy to check the comments that have been applied to a similar problem in the past Alarm Properties for Alarm ID e Alarm Info Information on alarm 382 Fault Management S
385. visioning for this SS from every Sector it has recently registered on Users can track the progress of this de provisioning by calling GetProvisioningStatus on this SS Returns an error if the SS does not already exist o DisableService Disables service on the specified SS This means that all provisioning information configured for this SS on any BS will be removed Return an error if the SS does not already exist o Enable the service on the specified SS All provisioning information configured for this SS will be configured on any BS it is currently or was recently registered on Return an error if the SS does not already exist o GetProvisioningStatus Gets the status of the provisioning for this SS on every Sector it has recently registered on If the SS has not recently registered on any Sector returns an empty array Return an error if the SS does not already exist o GetSSCustomProvisioningConfig Get the Provisioning parameters those defined in 802 16f and proprietary custom extensions that are configured for the specified SS The SS VLAN Port configuration is described by the VLANs the SS is a member of o GetSSCustomProvisioningConfigV2 Get the Provisioning parameters those defined in 802 16f and proprietary custom extensions that are configured for the specified SS The SS VLAN Port configuration is described by the VLAN Port profile used by the SS o GetSSProvisioningConfig Get the Provisionin
386. w Edit box This opens a new values script o Request Enter new action for Software If set to idle the software will not be downloaded until the request is set e If download then the download attempts to download the specified version to the standby bank if the specified version does not exist in either the standby or primary banks software is downloaded into the SS Standby bank based on the image set defined in the Selected profile e If activate then the NMS attempts to activate the specified version provided it exists in either the standby or primary banks If in the standby bank and not the primary bank it will first swap it into the primary bank before activating The SS is set to run with this image set defined in the selected profile The SS will be rebooted and then the requested s w will run on the SS That is in the standby bank of the image defined in the profile is activated e Download and activate will perform both the steps of download and activate as outlined above o Image File Suite Image File Suite used See Image File Suites o Schedule If in allow edit mode a request is made other than idle then a schedule box appears o Schedule for Selects the date and time for download to start end and the duration of download If the schedule box is unchecked the request will be acted upon immediately o Apply Click Apply to initiate action Current Software Status Content in this list is only displayed once
387. w the file can be found by the TFTP FTP server Software Image File Suite defines a set of images required by a particular BS TRx SS as defined by Software Category OS Application etc Software Categories enable the software operations to be carried out on all the hardware of a particular type on a network wide basis Eg Note In order to do software upgrade on individual BS TRxs use the Software Tab on the BS TRx Management page Select Use this BS TRx Config When performing a global network wide upgrade any Hardware set to Use this BS TRx Config will not be upgraded The diagram below shows the process used when upgrading a BS TRx Client Operations for Network Wide BS TRx Upgrade Note All BS TRxs should be set to Use Global Config Any BS TRxs set to use BS TRx Specific Configuration will not be upgraded in this process 1 Create pointers to Image Files 2 Group the pointers into an Image File Suite based on product category 3 Use Edit Upgrade Category to initiate request and select required Image File Suite 1 Download and 2 Assign to Primary or Activate e Download The NMS Server requests BS TRx s to retrieve Image files for a specific BS TRx type from a location on the TFTP server SS requests downloads from TFTP server The BS TRx Downloads specified image files and places in standby bank e Assign to Primary Moves image files to primary bank e Activate Activate will ensure that the ver
388. ware you will then need to press OK on the service product page to save the complete configuration Open the Service Products list expand the tree and it should look similar to this 81 Netspan Release 6 5 Service Products import Description service product 2 Service gt Senece Class onvergence Serwee Figa Descrption Direction hiig State Class Trattic Scheduing Sublayer 222117 Type Create Subscriber Custom Configuration Profiles o Create a new SS Custom Configuration profile by cloning the default SS Custom Configuration profile o Select the Dynamic option from the drop box or if you have a requirement to use a specific modulation the select that o Name the Profile to indicate both UL and DL modulations For example DL 16QAM1 2 UL 16QAM1 2 Create SS VLAN Port Profile Create VLAN port profile see the section Service Profiles SS VLAN Port Provision Subscriber Terminals Any SS s that are reachable on the network should have been discovered and placed in the Auto Discovery Site and will be listed in the Subscriber Stations List SS s that are not yet on the network can be provisioned in advance if the MAC address is known o Open the Configuration Management Subscriber Provisioning screen from the side menu Enter the MAC Address and click configure See Service Provisioning o Enter provisioning parameters in the Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning window See Edit Subscriber Station
389. xist in the Service Product in the NMS it is updated otherwise an error is returned ServiceProductCreate Creates a new Service Product in NMS with the specified name in the NMS If the Service Product name does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise an error is returned ServiceProductDelete Deletes an existing Service Product with the specified name in the NMS Return an error if Service Product name is not found ServiceProductList Produces a list of names of Service Products configured in the NMS Returns a null if no Service Products are found PacketClassifier The interface can be viewed by browsing to http lt webserver gt wimaxws1 PacketClassifier asmx o PacketClassifierCreate Creates a new Packet Classifier in NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the Packet Classifier name does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise an error is returned o PacketClassifierDelete Deletes an existing Packet Classifier the NMS Return an error if Packet Classifier name is not found o PacketClassifierGet Gets the configuration parameters as defined 802 16f for the specified Packet Classifier name that exist in NMS Return an error if the Packet Classifier name does not already exist o PacketClassifierList Produces a list of names of Packet Classifier configured in the NMS Returns a null if no Packet Clas
390. y M method Specifies the method chosen to perform the action Attachment or DBBackupRestore P dbpath the location of the database files MDF and LDF files or the database backup file BAK RM Delete all network elements from database after stopping all Netspan services Options B Backup Netspan database without stopping Netspan services or SQL server R Restores Netspan database and activates to operate on this server A Activates Netspan Database to operate on this server after stopping all Netspan services ATTA Attachment copies the MDF and LDF database files after stopping all Netspan services and SQL server DBBR Database Backup Restore uses database server s transact backup and restore functions Examples 66 gt setup serverchange exe A A Activates Netspan Database to operate on this server gt setup serverchange exe RM DELETE all Network Elements from Netspan database gt setup serverchange exe A B M ATTA P C NMSBkpData Stops all Netspan services and makes a copy of the Netspan MDF and LDF files into directory C NMSBkpData gt setup serverchange exe A R M ATTA RM P C NMSBkpData Attach and activates the database files found in C NMSBkpData and DELETE all Network Elements from the cloned database gt setup serverchange exe A B M DBBR P C NMSBkpData Backup Netspan database creating a backup file with extension BAK in directory C NMSBkpData gt setup serverchange exe
391. y calling GetProvisioningStatus on this SS Returns an error if the SS does not already exist ServiceProfile The interface can be viewed by browsing to http lt webserver gt wimaxws1 ServiceProfile asmx o GetGlobalConfig Retrieves the default global profiles configured in the NMS for the 555 o GetGlobalConfigV2 Retrieves the extended set of default global profiles configured in the NMS for the SSs o GetSSCustomConfigList Produces a list of the SS Custom Config profiles configured in the NMS o dGetSSVlanPortProfileList Produces a list of the SS VLAN Port Profiles configured the NMS o GetServiceProductList Produces a list of the names of the Service Products configured in the NMS o GetVlanList Produces a list of the VLANs configured in the NMS ServiceClass The interface can be viewed by browsing to http lt webserver gt wimaxws1 ServiceClass asmx o ServiceClassCreate Creates a new Service Classes in NMS with the parameters provided The parameters include those permitted in 802 16f and additional proprietary custom quantities If the Service Classes name does not already exist in the NMS it is created otherwise an error is returned o ServiceClassDelete Deletes an existing Service Class in the NMS Returns an error if Service Classes name is not found o ServiceClassGet Gets the configuration parameters as defined in 802 16f for the specified Service Class name that exist in NMS Return an error if the
392. y navigation between categories The menus on the WBM menu bar are described in the table below System Opens the System page which displays EasyST ProST identification parameters such as serial number and software version Signal Opens the Signal Parameters page which displays signalling parameters such Parameters as frequency and RSS Addresses Opens the Addresses page which displays addresses such as the EasyST ProST Ethernet MAC address and IP address Log Opens the Log page which displays logged traps and their severity levels Advanced Opens the Advanced page for performing advanced configuration settings such as software upgrade defining frequency channels and associated base stations and restarting the unit Access allowed only by authorized technicians Navigating The table below describes basic WBM navigation procedures Navigate to a specific Click the relevant menu on the menu bar configuration category Return to the home page Click the browser s Back button until the home page is displayed or click the System menu Quit WiMAXWeb Click the Web browser s Close button located in the top right corner of the browser s window 121 Netspan Release 6 5 Viewing Configuration Parameters The WBM allows you to view configuration parameters pertaining to the following categories e System e Signalling e Addresses e Logged Information Click on the specific parameter to access that parameter 7f Note
393. y threat warming leave the password blank 26 Installation 9 On the SQL Server 2000 Service Pack 4 Setup screen select Update Microsoft Search and apply SQL Server 2000 SP4 required and click on Continue SQL Server 2000 Service Pack 4 Setup Backward Compatibaity Checklist Verily the following SP4 securty enhancements Click Help for more information Cross database ownership chaning is tumed olf by default in SP4 Alter installation you can enable DE eras DEN Kc oclo cett If you must use cross database ownership chaining select the check box below Enable crozs database ownership chaining for all databases not recommended SP4 wil upgrade Microsolt Search service and automatically rebuild all fulltext catalogs for applications using the service Perd the et st tap T Le M HR Select the check box below to continue upgrading to SP4 v Upgrade Microsoft Search and apply SQL Server 2000 5 4 required Click Cancel to ext Setup without installing 5 4 10 On Error reporting screen do not select Automatically send fatal error reports to Microsoft leave it blank and click OK V you enable SOL Server s error ieporting feature SQL Server vl be configured to dnitesnale ally send Lalal service enor report to Micsosoft or a Comporale Eno Fepofing server M a fatal occurt the server sends nomin about the emo to Micsonclt over a secuse connection where is shored with lmhbed access orto a Corpora
394. yer Security oe 7 IP with dPwirbnesgHon NBMA NNI Resolution Protocol MOBILE IP Mobility Protocol IPv6 Opts Destination Options for IPv6 432 64 SAT EXPAK SATNET and Backroom EXPAK KRYPTOLAN Kryptolan RVD MIT Remote Virtual Disk Protocol IPPC Internet Pluribus Packet Core E Levate gen CPNX Computer Protocol Network Executive WSN Wang Span Network PVP Packet Video Protocol BR SAT MON Backroom SATNET Monitoring SUN ND SUN ND PROTOCOL Temporary WB MON WIDEBAND Monitoring WB EXPAK WIDEBAND EXPAK ees __ IGP ne eee 7 OSPFIGP OSPFIGP pee 1 Sprite RPC Sprite RPC Protocol 91 LARP Locus Address Resolution Protocol n AX 25 AX 25 Frames IPIP IP within IP Encapsulation Protocol MICP Mobile Internetworking Appendix 433 Netspan Release 6 5 SCC SP 97 ETHERIP ENCAP 100 GMTP 101 IFMP 102 PNNI 104 105 SCPS 110 Compaq Peer 111 IPX in IP 112 VRRP 113 114 115 Control Pro Semaphore Communications Sec Pro Ethernet within IP Encapsulation Encapsulation Header any private encryption scheme Ipsilon Flow Management Protocol PNNI over IP Protocol Independent Multicast ARIS SCPS QNX Active Networks IP Payload Compression Protocol Sitara Networks Protocol Compaq Peer Protocol IPX in IP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol PGM Rel
395. ype e MAC Address MAC Address of SS e Address IP address assigned to the SS e Registered Checked Registered e Service Enabled Checked Enabled e Service Product See Service Products e Configuration Profile Modulation Used e Port VLAN Profile Port VLAN Profile e Service Home Channel BS TRx Selected as a home BS TRx See Edit Subscriber Station Provisioning e Last Seen On Channel Last channel to have established a link with the SS e Provisioning Error Count Netspan will provision the SS on every BS TRx it is deemed to have been recently seen on unless constrained by the specification of a home BS TRx for that SS The Provisioning Error Count is the number of BS TRxs from this set on which there has been a failure to provision this SS e Provisioning Changes Displays changes e Description 1 5 User defined e Discovered Checked if SS has been discovered by a BS TRx Actions See Action Buttons 207 Netspan Release 6 5 BS TRx Management Home For SS This page shows the list of SSs that have as their Home Service Channel one of this BS TRx s channels Fiter No Filter FST ser toot 2 Registered Service Ensbied Service Product Configuration Protie 40 80 00 00 29 hoooat E Sample of Service Sample of SS Cust Sample of SS Chann A 0 000 2 1000 42 Sample of Service Sample of SS Cust Sample of SS Chann Total Database fems 0 Total Loade

Netspan - Keekles.org

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents